Operators Manual Firmware Version 6.3 Ag Leader PN 4002722

www.4qte.com
Operators Manual
Firmware Version 6.3
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
www.4qte.com
© 2015 Ag Leader Technology
2202 South Riverside Drive
Ames, Iowa 50010 USA
All Rights Reserved
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
TABLE
Table of Contents
OF
General
CONTENTS
About this Manual
Introduction and Company Profile ............................................................................1
Display......................................................................................................................1
Service......................................................................................................................1
System Uses ............................................................................................................2
System Features ......................................................................................................2
USB Flash Drive .......................................................................................................2
Color Touch Screen..................................................................................................3
CAN BUS Technology ..............................................................................................3
Technical Specifications ...........................................................................................3
System and Upgrades ..............................................................................................3
Automated Module Firmware Upgrade.....................................................................3
Product Registration .................................................................................................4
Conventions Used In This Manual............................................................................4
Cautions and Warnings ............................................................................................4
Cross-references and Web Links .............................................................................4
Viewing this Manual Online ......................................................................................4
How to Find Information You’re Looking For ............................................................4
Installation
Display Hardware .....................................................................................................7
Installation Instructions .............................................................................................7
Fuse Installation and Replacement ..........................................................................9
Screen Icon Conventions .........................................................................................9
Setup
Configuration
Initial Startup...........................................................................................................11
Advanced Options.............................................................................................11
Location Specific Setup.....................................................................................12
Single Display ...................................................................................................12
Multiple Display Setup - First Display................................................................13
Multiple Display Setup - Additional Display.......................................................14
Import Setup Data ..................................................................................................14
Import Files .......................................................................................................14
Home Screen..........................................................................................................15
Setup buttons .........................................................................................................16
Display button.........................................................................................................16
General tab .......................................................................................................17
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
iii
www.4qte.com
Display tab........................................................................................................ 18
Features tab ..................................................................................................... 18
Unlocking Features ..................................................................................... 19
Advanced tab.................................................................................................... 19
Configuration button............................................................................................... 21
Configuration tab .............................................................................................. 21
Product tab ....................................................................................................... 22
Planting Settings ......................................................................................... 23
Application Settings..................................................................................... 23
Grain Harvest Settings ................................................................................ 23
Management Setup
Configuration Selection .................................................................................... 25
All Modules Detected............................................................................. 25
Modules Missing .................................................................................... 25
Some Modules Not Detected................................................................. 26
Modules not the same as previously used............................................. 26
Events............................................................................................................... 26
Setting mode (Traditional or Events Only) using Permissions .................... 27
Starting an Event......................................................................................... 27
Managing Events ........................................................................................ 28
Management button.......................................................................................... 30
Grower/Farm/Field tab...................................................................................... 30
Grower ........................................................................................................ 30
Farm and Field ............................................................................................ 31
Importing and Exporting Field Boundaries .................................................. 32
Season tab ....................................................................................................... 33
Users tab .......................................................................................................... 33
Add a User .................................................................................................. 34
User Setup button ....................................................................................... 34
General tab ............................................................................................ 35
Phone/Email tab .................................................................................... 35
Address tab............................................................................................ 35
Permissions ...................................................................................................... 35
Operators .................................................................................................... 35
Managers ................................................................................................... 35
Permission Level For Operators....................................................................... 36
Full Permission............................................................................................ 36
Basic Permission......................................................................................... 36
Custom Permission .................................................................................... 37
Accessing Setup Menus ................................................................................... 39
Accessing USB................................................................................................. 39
Forgotten Passwords........................................................................................ 40
Businesses tab ................................................................................................ 41
Field Operations
Operator Selection............................................................................................ 43
Operator Log Out.............................................................................................. 44
Configuration Setup Screen................................................................................... 44
iv
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
TABLE
Setup Event ............................................................................................................45
Field Finder .......................................................................................................46
Field Operation Options ....................................................................................46
Run screens ...........................................................................................................47
GPS Signal Indicator.........................................................................................49
Mapping Toolbox...............................................................................................51
Map Legend tab...........................................................................................51
Map Options ................................................................................................51
Legend Settings .....................................................................................52
Markers tab..................................................................................................53
Edit Markers ...........................................................................................54
Field Tab......................................................................................................54
Boundary ................................................................................................54
Boundary Settings ..................................................................................55
Create Boundary ....................................................................................55
Pause Boundary.....................................................................................56
Headlands .........................................................................................................56
Active Area ..................................................................................................56
Add a Headland ...........................................................................................57
Headland Types .....................................................................................57
Load Headlands...........................................................................................58
Edit Headlands ............................................................................................59
Headland Alarm Settings .............................................................................59
Topography ............................................................................................60
Setup Map Screen..................................................................................60
Video .................................................................................................................63
OF
CONTENTS
External Drive
External Storage Operations ..................................................................................65
Upgrade Firmware ............................................................................................65
Import Files .......................................................................................................65
.AGSETUP...................................................................................................65
.AGDATA .....................................................................................................66
Export Files .......................................................................................................66
.AGSETUP...................................................................................................66
.AGDATA .....................................................................................................66
Export Reports.............................................................................................67
Manage Files.....................................................................................................67
Advanced Options.............................................................................................67
Devices
Device Information..................................................................................................69
Devices .............................................................................................................69
Display Diagnostics...........................................................................................69
Settings
Equipment Settings ................................................................................................71
Implement Switch Settings (for Area Logging) ............................................71
Equipment Configuration Settings for Rate Control.....................................72
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
v
www.4qte.com
Speed Input Settings.............................................................................................. 72
Calibrate Distance ............................................................................................ 73
Auxiliary Input ........................................................................................................ 74
Auxiliary Input Settings ..................................................................................... 75
Auxiliary Input: Help.......................................................................................... 75
Auxiliary Input Diagnostics ............................................................................... 75
AutoSwath.............................................................................................................. 76
Look-Ahead Settings................................................................................... 77
Vehicle Offsets....................................................................................................... 77
Antenna Offsets tab.......................................................................................... 78
Hitch Tab Settings tab ...................................................................................... 78
Mount Tab Settings (for some Application vehicles) ........................................ 78
Head Tab (for Harvest vehicles)....................................................................... 78
Swath Section Offsets ...................................................................................... 78
Section Offsets............................................................................................ 79
Virtual Terminal
Common Terminology............................................................................................ 81
Auxiliary Assignment.............................................................................................. 83
VT Alarms and Trouble Codes............................................................................... 84
Task Controller....................................................................................................... 85
Configuration Setup ............................................................................................... 85
ISOBUS Settings ................................................................................................... 86
AgFiniti
Connecting to Wi-Fi Network ................................................................................. 87
Connecting to AgFiniti............................................................................................ 88
File Transfer........................................................................................................... 89
Importing and Exporting Files........................................................................... 89
Viewing Files .................................................................................................... 89
Export Settings ................................................................................................. 90
Importing a Prescription.................................................................................... 91
Importing a Variety Reference Map (Harvest Only).......................................... 92
Remote Support..................................................................................................... 92
Remote Support Permissions Options ............................................................. 92
GPS
GPS
GPS Button ............................................................................................................ 95
Setup...................................................................................................................... 95
Serial GPS Settings ............................................................................................... 95
Differential Source ............................................................................................ 97
WAAS/EGNOS Settings.............................................................................. 97
TerraStar Settings ....................................................................................... 98
RTK External Settings................................................................................. 99
RTK Settings - NTRIP ................................................................................. 99
vi
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
TABLE
RTK Settings - 900/400 MHz .....................................................................101
Upgrade Receiver.................................................................................................102
Serial Port Settings...............................................................................................103
Port A tab..............................................................................................................103
Port B tab..............................................................................................................103
GPS Information ...................................................................................................104
GPS Information - General Tab ......................................................................105
GPS Messages..........................................................................................106
Satellite Plot ....................................................................................................107
GPS Information - Receiver Tab .....................................................................107
GPS Information - Differential Tab ..................................................................108
GPS Information - OmniSTAR Tab .................................................................109
RTK/NTRIP Information (ParaDyme/GeoSteer Only)................................109
GPS Information - NTRIP................................................................................110
OmniSTAR Settings .............................................................................................110
OmniSTAR Settings — GPS 2500 .......................................................................112
GPS Information for 2500 RTK .......................................................................113
2500 RTK Setup..............................................................................................114
OF
CONTENTS
Guidance
Guidance
Guidance/Steering Control ...................................................................................117
Setup ....................................................................................................................117
Lightbar Settings...................................................................................................118
Setup ....................................................................................................................118
Guidance Tab on Mapping Toolbox .....................................................................118
New Pattern..........................................................................................................119
Straight............................................................................................................119
Select Pattern ............................................................................................119
Create AB line using 2 points ....................................................................119
Create AB line using Current Location and Heading .................................119
Create AB line using Current Location and Inputting Heading ..................119
Adaptive Curve................................................................................................120
Select Pattern ............................................................................................120
Create AB line using 2 points ....................................................................120
Identical Curve ................................................................................................121
Select Pattern ............................................................................................121
Create AB line using 2 points ....................................................................122
Pivot ................................................................................................................122
Select Pattern ............................................................................................123
Create AB line using driven path ...............................................................123
SmartPath .......................................................................................................124
Select SmartPath.......................................................................................124
Inputting Paths into SmartPath ..................................................................125
Cycle between Loaded Paths ....................................................................125
Select a Previous SmartPath Pass............................................................126
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
vii
www.4qte.com
SmartPath Guidance Options ................................................................... 126
AutoSave ............................................................................................................. 127
Manage Patterns.................................................................................................. 128
Spatial Sort .......................................................................................................... 128
Import Pattern................................................................................................. 128
Export Pattern................................................................................................. 128
Edit Pattern..................................................................................................... 128
Remove Pattern/Remove All Patterns............................................................ 129
Reset Pattern.................................................................................................. 129
Pattern Groups..................................................................................................... 129
Guidance Options ................................................................................................ 130
Save ............................................................................................................... 130
Pause ............................................................................................................. 131
Remark A........................................................................................................ 131
Nudge ............................................................................................................. 131
Shift ................................................................................................................ 132
Steering .......................................................................................................... 133
OnTrac Tuning................................................................................................ 133
Lightbar........................................................................................................... 134
Tramlines........................................................................................................ 134
OnTrac2+
AutoSteer Setup Screen ...................................................................................... 137
Vehicle ................................................................................................................. 138
Setup Wizard .................................................................................................. 138
Manage Vehicle.............................................................................................. 139
Select.............................................................................................................. 139
Edit ................................................................................................................. 140
Delete ............................................................................................................. 140
Export/Import .................................................................................................. 140
Export profile to a USB drive ............................................................... 141
Import profile to a USB drive................................................................ 141
Auto Calibrate ...................................................................................................... 141
Adjust Lateral Offset.................................................................................. 142
Steering Adjust ............................................................................................... 143
Steering Components..................................................................................... 144
OnTrac2 ECU............................................................................................ 144
Manual Steering Override ......................................................................... 144
Remote Engage Switch............................................................................. 144
MDU .......................................................................................................... 144
System Menu ....................................................................................................... 145
System Health ................................................................................................ 145
Manage Settings............................................................................................. 146
Log Files.................................................................................................... 146
Database................................................................................................... 147
Reset Factory Default ............................................................................... 147
Accessories .................................................................................................... 147
Technician ...................................................................................................... 148
Software Upgrade........................................................................................... 148
viii
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
TABLE
GPS Diagnostics ..................................................................................................148
Details...................................................................................................................149
OF
Tillage
CONTENTS
Create Tillage Configuration.................................................................................151
Configuration Setup..............................................................................................151
Load Configuration..........................................................................................152
Run Configuration.................................................................................................152
Planting
Create Planting Configuration
Create Equipment Configuration ..........................................................................155
AutoSwath
Row Shutoff ..........................................................................................................159
Configuration Setup ........................................................................................159
Row Shutoff Look-Ahead Numbers.................................................................159
Automatic AutoSwath Control...............................................................................160
Look-Ahead Settings .................................................................................160
Checking AutoSwath Performance for Row Shutoff .......................................161
Fixing Overplanting and Underplanting in AutoSwath.....................................162
Rate Control
Hydraulic Seed Rate Control ................................................................................163
Controller Settings for Hydraulic Seed Rate Motor Drives ..............................163
Channel Tab settings.................................................................................164
Control Valve Settings - PWM..............................................................164
Control Valve Settings - Servo .............................................................165
Auxiliary Tab settings.................................................................................165
Hydraulic Seed Controller Settings for Specific Planters ................................166
Hydraulic Seed Meter Calibration Numbers....................................................167
Stepper Seed Rate Control ..................................................................................168
Controller Settings for Stepper Seed Rate Motor Drives ................................168
Channel Tabs ............................................................................................169
Auxiliary Tab ..............................................................................................169
Gear Ratio Calculations for Seed Rate Motors ...............................................170
Gear Ratio Drawing - For Single Motor Drive ............................................170
Gear Ratio Drawing - For Multiple Drive Combinations.............................171
Seed Ratio Calculation Example Procedure..............................................171
Gear Ratio Drawing Shaft Drives...............................................................172
Planter Options Screen ........................................................................................173
Priming Seed Rate Meters ...................................................................................173
Calibrating Seed Rate Meters ..............................................................................173
Rate Control: Map Screen ....................................................................................174
Product Control Toolbox.......................................................................................175
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
ix
www.4qte.com
Rate Control Settings ..................................................................................... 176
Loading Prescriptions .......................................................................................... 176
Showing Prescriptions on the Map Screen..................................................... 177
Troubleshooting ................................................................................................... 177
Hydraulic Seed Control: Zero Flow Offset Variation....................................... 177
Hydraulic Seed Control: Zero Flow Offset Variation....................................... 178
Stepper Seed Control Meter Alarms............................................................... 178
Planting Map Screen - Zoom to Extent........................................................... 179
Planting Map Screen - Zoom Detail................................................................ 179
Legend Setup ................................................................................................. 179
Application
Liquid Rate Control
Create Configuration ...................................................................................... 181
Implement Offsets .......................................................................................... 183
Controller Settings .......................................................................................... 184
Creating Products........................................................................................... 184
CREATING SINGLE PRODUCTS ............................................................ 184
CREATING PRODUCT TEMPLATE......................................................... 185
Load Configuration ......................................................................................... 187
Mix Calculator................................................................................................. 188
Configuration Setup........................................................................................ 190
Hardi Safe Track............................................................................................. 191
Liquid Application Controller Settings............................................................. 192
Control Valve Settings - PWM................................................................... 193
Control Valve Settings - Servo, Calibrated Reflow and Ramsey Valve .... 194
Calibrate Pressure .................................................................................... 194
Fence Row Nozzle Indicators......................................................................... 195
Load Configuration ......................................................................................... 195
Run Configuration........................................................................................... 196
Application Map screen - Zoom to Detail........................................................ 196
Legend Select................................................................................................. 196
Rate Control: Product Control Toolbox ................................................................ 197
Rate Control Settings ..................................................................................... 198
Container Level Settings ................................................................................ 199
Tank Fill..................................................................................................... 199
Tank Empty ............................................................................................... 199
Tank Partial Fill ......................................................................................... 199
Adjust Container Amount..................................................................... 199
Tank Alarms .............................................................................................. 200
Loading Prescriptions .......................................................................................... 200
Showing Prescriptions on the Map Screen..................................................... 201
Shape File Conversion......................................................................................... 201
Liquid Application Diagnostics........................................................................ 203
Troubleshooting DirectCommand Liquid Applications.................................... 203
John Deere Specific Instructions ......................................................................... 206
x
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
TABLE
Master Switch Input.........................................................................................206
Master Switch Usage ......................................................................................206
Target Rate .....................................................................................................206
Data Collection................................................................................................206
AutoSwath Boom Section Control...................................................................206
SprayStar Application Rate .............................................................................206
SprayStar Rinse Cycle ....................................................................................206
Control Valve Settings ..........................................................................................207
Liquid Product Control Valve Configuration Options .................................207
Servo Control Valve Settings (By Manufacturer) ............................................208
Liquid Servo Settings Description ...................................................................212
Liquid PWM Control Valve Settings Description .............................................212
Dickey-John NH3 Conversions .......................................................................213
Conversion Formulas.................................................................................213
Troubleshooting Serial Control Applications ...................................................213
Miscellaneous.......................................................................................................214
Glossary of Application Settings .....................................................................214
Configuration Settings ...............................................................................214
Speed Input Settings .................................................................................214
Automatic Swath Control Settings .............................................................214
Auxiliary Input Settings ..............................................................................215
Controller Settings .....................................................................................215
Fertilizer default Product Settings ...................................................................217
OF
CONTENTS
ISOBUS Serial Application Rate Control
Enable Virtual Terminal and Task Controller........................................................219
Setup ....................................................................................................................220
Status Screen .......................................................................................................222
Settings Screen ....................................................................................................223
Manage Configurations ...................................................................................223
Alarm Settings ......................................................................................................223
Diagnostics ...........................................................................................................224
Injection
Create Configuration .......................................................................................225
Setup Configuration ........................................................................................225
Rate Response Warning ......................................................................225
Flow Monitor Warning ..........................................................................226
Calibrating an Injection Pump....................................................................226
Priming an Injection Pump.........................................................................227
Load Configuration..........................................................................................228
Run Configuration ...........................................................................................228
Injection Diagnostics .......................................................................................229
Troubleshooting Direct Injection Configurations .............................................229
Direct Injection: Pump Doesn’t Run...........................................................230
BATTERY POWER PIN OUTS ............................................................................231
Direct Injection: Pump Runs Full Speed ....................................................231
Digital Pump Speed Pin Outs ...............................................................................231
Analog Speed Pin Outs ........................................................................................232
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
xi
www.4qte.com
Direct Injection: Application Error.............................................................. 232
Direct Injection: Discharge Flow Sensor Error .......................................... 232
Discharge Flow Sensor Pin Outs ......................................................................... 233
Direct Injection: Inlet Restriction................................................................ 233
Vacuum Switch Pin Outs ..................................................................................... 233
Controller Settings: Direct Injection Pump Calibration .............................. 233
Pump Calibration Setting ..................................................................... 233
Rate Response Warning...................................................................... 234
Flow Monitor Warning.......................................................................... 234
Field Notes ................................................................................................ 234
Setting Name and Description ............................................................. 234
Run Screen ............................................................................................... 234
NORAC UC5
Norac Unlock .................................................................................................. 235
Create Configuration ...................................................................................... 235
Setup Configuration........................................................................................ 236
Load Configuration ......................................................................................... 237
Run Configuration........................................................................................... 238
Engage button........................................................................................... 238
Boom Height Control Options Button ........................................................ 238
Boom Height Control Options Screen ....................................................... 239
Boom Height Diagnostics ............................................................................... 239
Spreader
Create Configuration ...................................................................................... 241
Controller Settings .......................................................................................... 243
Spreader Control: PWM Control Valve ..................................................... 244
Spreader Control: Servo Control Valve..................................................... 244
Spreader Control: Spinner Tab ................................................................. 245
Creating Products........................................................................................... 246
CREATING SINGLE PRODUCTS ............................................................ 246
CREATING DRY FERTLIZER BLENDS ................................................... 246
Load Configuration ......................................................................................... 248
Run Configuration........................................................................................... 249
Automatic Spinner Control ................................................................................... 249
Spinner Spreader, with two-bin configuration ...................................................... 250
Run Time Operations ..................................................................................... 250
Spreader Control screen ........................................................................... 250
Conveyor Rate Look-Up ...................................................................... 251
Fan Frame & Feed Gate Actuator Settings ......................................... 252
Spreader Control: Routine Operations ................................................ 252
Spreader Control: Chain Oiler ............................................................. 252
Spreader Control: Static Calibration .................................................... 253
Spreader Control: In-Field Calibration ................................................. 254
Troubleshooting DirectCommand Granular Applications ............................... 254
Troubleshooting Serial Control Applications................................................... 255
xii
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
TABLE
Strip Till
OF
Create Strip Till Fertilizer Configuration ..........................................................257
Create Air Seeder Configuration .....................................................................259
Controller Settings...........................................................................................261
Strip Till Control: Servo Control Valve .......................................................262
Strip Till Control: PWM Control Valve........................................................263
Linear Actuator/Clutch Settings .................................................................263
Actuator/Clutch Logic................................................................................265
CREATING DRY FERTLIZER BLENDS....................................................265
Load Configuration..........................................................................................266
Run Configuration ...........................................................................................266
Meter Prime ...............................................................................................267
Run Time Operations ......................................................................................268
Strip-Till (Three-Bin Configuration).......................................................................268
Strip Till Control Screen.............................................................................269
Static CFR Calibration Procedure for Hydraulic Drive systems ...........269
Static CFR Calibration Procedure for Ground Drive Systems..............270
In-Field Calibration Procedure (Strip Till) .............................................271
Strip Till Control: Auxiliary Tab ..................................................................272
Troubleshooting DirectCommand Granular Applications ................................272
Troubleshooting Serial Control Applications ...................................................273
Fertilizer Default Product Settings...................................................................274
CONTENTS
Harvest
Harvest Monitoring/Mapping
Display Preparation.........................................................................................275
Vehicle Inspection ...........................................................................................275
Create Configuration .......................................................................................275
Configuration Setup ........................................................................................275
Calibration Sequence ................................................................................275
Calibrate Distance...........................................................................................276
Calibrate Header Sensor ...........................................................................276
Input Header Offset ...................................................................................277
Vibration Calibration........................................................................................277
Temperature Calibration .................................................................................278
Moisture Calibration ........................................................................................278
Manual Moisture Setting ............................................................................279
Grain Weight Calibration .................................................................................279
Turn On/Off Auto Calibration...........................................................................280
AutoSwath Sensitivity Settings........................................................................281
Load Configuration..........................................................................................281
Run Configuration ...........................................................................................281
Harvest Status Items.......................................................................................282
Harvest Diagnostic Button on Map Screen .....................................................283
Map Options....................................................................................................283
Map Screen: Flow Delay .................................................................................284
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
xiii
www.4qte.com
Grain Harvest Diagnostics ................................................................................... 284
Claas Quantimeter
Create Configuration ...................................................................................... 287
Configuration Setup........................................................................................ 287
Calibration Information ................................................................................... 288
Load Configuration ......................................................................................... 288
Manual Moisture Setting ........................................................................... 289
Map Screen for CLAAS Quantimeter ............................................................. 290
Diagnostics for CLAAS Quantimeter .............................................................. 290
Diagnostics Screen for CLAAS Quantimeter ............................................ 290
Bridge Module...................................................................................... 291
Troubleshooting CLAAS Quantimeter Configurations .................................... 291
Appendix
Appendix
System Diagrams Reference ............................................................................... 293
Current File Formats ............................................................................................ 293
.AGSETUP ..................................................................................................... 293
.AGDATA........................................................................................................ 293
Legacy File Formats ............................................................................................ 294
Prescription Map File Types ........................................................................... 294
Boundary and Guideline File Types ............................................................... 294
Image File Types ............................................................................................ 294
System File Types .......................................................................................... 294
Module LED Diagnostic States ............................................................................ 295
Company Warranty Statement............................................................................. 295
Unauthorized Access ........................................................................................... 295
PROPRIETARY TECHNOLOGY NOTICE .......................................................... 296
COPYRIGHT NOTICE ......................................................................................... 296
SERVICE AND SUPPORT .................................................................................. 296
xiv
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
GENERAL
ABOUT
GENERAL
GENERAL
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
THIS
INTRODUCTION AND COMPANY PROFILE
Welcome to the Ag Leader Technology family. Ag Leader Technology, Inc. is the global leader in yield
monitor and precision farming systems and is committed to meeting the present and future needs of the
agriculture industry by providing high quality products and first class customer support.
INNOVATION
Ag Leader Technology manufactures and sells products which support a wide array of precision farming
practices. These include grain yield monitoring, application rate control and monitoring, variable rate
fertilizer application, site-verification, GPS guidance and interface to Autosteer technologies.
COMPATIBILITY
Ag Leader Technology offers compatibility and supports integration of many different types and brands
of equipment used for precision farming. The latest equipment available is supported as well as older
series of combines, planters, sprayers, tillage equipment, etc.
QUALITY AND SUPPORT
Ag Leader Technology continues to provide the best customer support in the industry. Precision farming
doesn't come without questions. Ag Leader is committed to providing the most responsive,
knowledgeable and friendly technical support available. Our technical support team is available sevendays-a-week during peak seasons to answer your questions on the operation of Ag Leader products.
WE WANT TO HEAR FROM YOU!
Feel free to call and discuss:
• Operational questions about the display
• Features you would like to see implemented to improve the system or features you would like to see added
to the system to increase functionality
DISPLAY
The display is a full-featured, year-round hub of any precision farming operation. A full-color, highbrightness, high-resolution touchscreen display is easy to read and offers powerful, year-round precision
farming tools. Built-in manual guidance, full-screen mapping, planter and application control, yield
monitoring, real-time data logging and automated steering make up the core functionality of the display.
WARNING: Read manual completely before operating display. Understand and follow all operating and
safety instructions for proper use of this display. Failure to use display properly could result in an impairment
of the safety features of this product.
SERVICE
There are no user-serviceable parts inside the display. Contact the manufacturer for a Return Material
Authorization (RMA).
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
1
MANUAL
ABOUT US
www.4qte.com
ph: (515) 232-5363
fax: (515) 232-3595
e-mail: support@agleader.com
CAUTION: This display has an internal lithium coin cell battery that is good for the life of the product and
does not need to be replaced. There is a risk of explosion if the battery is replaced by an incorrect type.
Dispose of used batteries according to the battery manufacturer’s instructions.
SYSTEM USES
• Guidance
• Norac UC5
• Video Camera Inputs
• Mapping Tillage Operations
• Mapping and Logging Product Applications
• Mapping of all field boundaries, sub-boundaries, waterways and terraces
• Grain Yield Monitoring
• Variety Logging
• Granular and Liquid Fertilizer Application
• Liquid Spray System Control
• NH3 Application Control
• Application Control of Multiple Bin Spinner Spreaders
SYSTEM FEATURES
• Rugged sealed enclosure
• Compatible with most NMEA GPS receivers
• DirectCommand and SeedCommand Product Control using Industry-Standard CAN Bus interface
• Adjustable volume control
• Perspective 3D View Map
• Automatic Field Selection
• Automatic Module Firmware Upgrade
• Advanced GPS Diagnostics
• USB media slot
• 28-pin plug compatible with other Ag Leader displays.
• RAM mount
USB FLASH DRIVE
Display kits include a USB Flash Drive which you can use to save and transfer your data in and out of
the display.
2
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
GENERAL
• Do not use any sharp objects for running the touch screen device, this could result in damage to the
display. Using the tip of a finger is the recommended method of operating the display touch screen.
• The touch screen requires only a gentle touch of about half-second in duration to operate correctly. A
common mistake is to try to navigate too quickly through the system using firm taps instead of gentle
presses.
CAN BUS TECHNOLOGY
This system uses Controller Area Network (CAN) technology. CAN systems are comprised of individual
modules, each with their own high speed processor, connected through a high-speed communications
cable. CAN has many benefits, including greater ability to configure and expand the system,
compatibility, simpler installations with less wiring, and increased system dependability.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Do not exceed the specifications below:
• Storage Temperature: -4 to +176 °F (-20 to +80 °C)
• Operating Temperature: 14 to +156 °F (-10 to +70 °C)
• Operating Input Voltage: 9 –16 V DC
• Max Current Rating: 4.0 amp
• Environmental Protection Rating: IP64
• No Protective Grounding required
• Use 150V minimum insulation rating for external circuits
CAUTION: Exceeding these specifications may result in degraded operation and/or damage to the display.
SYSTEM AND UPGRADES
AUTOMATED MODULE FIRMWARE UPGRADE
In the display, all display and module firmware upgrades are packaged in a single.fw2 file. The module
firmware files are stored internally in the display. A warning alerts you when a module upgrade is
required. You can upgrade all files in a single batch by using an upgrade screen. For more information,
see “Advanced tab” on page 19.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
3
MANUAL
• Do not use any harsh chemicals to clean the touch screen. Using a damp soft cloth or an anti-static wipe
made specifically for cleaning computer displays is the correct way to clean the screen and the
enclosure.
THIS
The display features a color touch screen display. The touch screen allows easy and intuitive navigation
through the screens on the display without the need for any external keypad or mouse devices. Here are
a few key things to remember if you are new to using a touch screen device:
ABOUT
COLOR TOUCH SCREEN
www.4qte.com
PRODUCT REGISTRATION
CONVENTIONS USED IN THIS MANUAL
CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS
The operators manual uses the following text formatting schemes to call attention to information related
to simplifying system operation and proper operating practices to prevent accidental data loss. If in doubt
about the results of performing an action or deleting an item from the system, back up all system files to
the USB external drive prior to proceeding with the action.
Note: Provides informative tips to assist with system setup, calibration, and operation.
CAUTION: Indicates specific settings, calibrations, and procedures that must be followed for proper system
performance and operation.
WARNING: Indicates specific instructions to avoid accidental loss of data and system configurations
settings.
CROSS-REFERENCES AND WEB LINKS
Throughout this manual, numerous cross-references are provided to other pages or sections. These
cross-references are always shown in blue, italic text; and list the title and page number as in the
following example: To find the information you’re looking for, see “How to Find Information You’re Looking
For” on page 4. If you are viewing this manual in PDF format, you can click on this blue text and go
directly to the link.
VIEWING THIS MANUAL ONLINE
This operators manual can be viewed online at Ag Leader’s Web site. To view an online version, go to
the Ag Leader Web site and click the Customer Support link. You will see a page titled “Product
Manuals.”
To view and/or print the Operators Manual online, you will need the Adobe Acrobat or Adobe Reader.
The Adobe Reader software comes pre-installed on most personal computers. If Adobe Reader is not
installed on your computer the program is available for download at no charge. A link to the Adobe
download site is located at the Ag Leader Web site.
HOW TO FIND INFORMATION YOU’RE LOOKING
FOR
What do you do if you cannot find the information that you’re looking for There are three different ways
at your disposal to find specific information quickly. These steps can include:
4
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
GENERAL
2. Look up the information in the section indexes that are located at the end of each manual section
(Planting, Tillage, Application, and Harvest).
THIS
3. Use the Adobe Reader’s search function. While viewing this manual online in PDF format, press the
CTRL+F buttons on your keyboard. A search menu should appear, and from here, you may enter in a
search term.
ABOUT
1. Look up the information in the Table of Contents.
MANUAL
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
5
www.4qte.com
6
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
GENERAL
INSTALLATION
GENERAL
INSTALLATION
DISPLAY HARDWARE
• (A) USB media slot
Used for data transfer in and out of the display.
• (B) speaker
The built-in speaker is used for audible warnings. The
volume can be adjusted through the display setup
routine.
• (C) RAM mount
• (D) Power/Reset switch
The Power/Reset switch is used for turning the display
on and off in installations where the system is
connected to a continuous power supply. If the display
ever stops responding, the manual power switch may
be held in for five seconds to restart the system. Only do this as a last resort, data loss could occur during
times of improper shutdown.
• (E) 28-pin auxiliary connection
Used for camera input.
• (F) 28-pin plug
The 28-Pin round connector contains CAN, RS-232 serial, and system power and ground connections. It is
compatible with other Ag Leader displays. Ethernet for ParaDyme and GeoSteer automated steering is
included in connection.
• (A) USB media slot
• Used for data transfer in and out of the display.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
All machine installation and mounting kits are shipped with instructions specific to that kit. Instructions
include special details relating to mounting, wiring and display configuration.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
7
www.4qte.com
Mount the display to a secure support inside the vehicle cab. The following must be considered when
choosing a mounting location:
• The display must be readily accessible to the machine operator.
• The display must not obstruct the machine operator's normal driving view.
• The display must not interfere with or limit access to any of the existing machine controls.
• The CAN system cabling be routed and secured without interfering with existing machine controls.
WARNING: If drilling holes is required during the mounting process, care must be taken to insure that
damage is not done to existing vehicle wiring, mechanical, or cab structure. Refer to vehicle manufacturer
documentation for specific details on your equipment. Follow all OEM instructions, cautions, and warnings
when working around equipment.
• (A) RAM Base
• (B) RAM Arm
• (C) Base
8
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
GENERAL
INSTALLATION
FUSE INSTALLATION AND REPLACEMENT
Fuse Type: Blade Style (ATO/ATC)
Rating:
Fuse Holder (orange wire) 5A, 250 VAC
Fuse Holder (pink wire) 15A, 250 VAC
CAUTION: The fuse is to be placed in the fuse holder in-line with the battery power cable and used with
display only.
SCREEN ICON CONVENTIONS
The following control buttons are made available for entering names and calibration values into the
system.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
9
www.4qte.com
An on-screen Keyboard is made available when
appropriate for use during all setup processes. Press
the keyboard button to access the on-screen text entry
screen.
Clear
All
Symbols
An on-screen Numeric Keypad is made available for
changing configuration settings and calibration
numbers. Press the keypad button to access the onscreen numeric entry screen.
Clear
An on-screen calendar is made available for changing
dates. Press the calendar button to access the
calendar screen.
Start Date
March 2015
Sunday
10
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
SETUP
CONFIGURATION
SETUP
SETUP
CONFIGURATION
INITIAL STARTUP
An Initial Setup wizard is presented on startup.
Language Selection
Once the wizard is completed, it is not shown again
unless the display memory is cleared.
Language
English / US
Advanced
ADVANCED OPTIONS
Press “Advanced” button on Language Selection
screen (first screen to appear on initial startup).
Advanced Options
• Restore Backup
• Upgrade Firmware
• Unlock Display Features
Restore
Restore data from a backup file (same display model only)
Upgrade
Upgrade the display firmware.
Features
Unlocks
Unlock display features.
Note: Using the Restore backup option is not the proper method to get multiple displays set up to
be the same. Use the AGSETUP file.
It is acceptable to complete the initial setup wizard and then upgrade. Setup information will not change.
On a “clean” display going out for service, to stand in for a failed display, the customer should use the
Restore backup option in the initial setup wizard.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
11
www.4qte.com
LOCATION SPECIFIC SETUP
1. Language
Press
Language Selection
to continue.
2. Unit System
Imperial or Metric
Press
Language
English / US
to continue.
3. Date and Time
Set to GPS Time and Date requires ZDA NMEA
message to be turned on from the GPS receiver.
Advanced
Press
to continue.
SINGLE DISPLAY
Press “Single Display” button then
continue.
to
Single Display
Select “Single Display” if you only have one
display in your operation.
Multiple Display
Select “Multiple Displays” if you only have more
than one display and want to share setup items
between displays.
NEW SETUP
Press “New Setup” button then
to continue.
Press
Name).
to enter a Display Owner (Business
Press
to enter a display nickname. Press
New Setup
Import Setup
to continue.
Select “New Setup” to perform all setup through
the display user-interface.
Select “Import Setup” to select an AgSetup file to
import setup items from your computer.
Press
to accept the setup and return to
Home screen.
12
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
SETUP
Press “Import Setup” button then
continue.
to
Select desired setup file from directory.
Press
to accept the setup and return to
Home screen.
New Setup
Select “New Setup” to perform all setup through
the display user-interface.
Import Setup
Select “Import Setup” to select an AgSetup file to
import setup items from your computer.
MULTIPLE DISPLAY SETUP - FIRST DISPLAY
Press “Multiple Display” button then
continue.
Press “First Display” button then
to
to continue.
Single Display
Select “Single Display” if you only have one
display in your operation.
Multiple Display
Select “Multiple Displays” if you have more than
one display and want to share setup items
between displays.
NEW SETUP
Press “New Setup” button then
to continue.
Press
Name).
to enter a Display Owner (Business
Press
to enter a display nickname. Press
New Setup
Import Setup
to continue.
Select “New Setup” to perform all setup through
the display user-interface.
Select “Import Setup” to select an AgSetup file to
import setup items from your computer.
Press
to accept the setup and return to
Home screen.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
13
CONFIGURATION
IMPORT SETUP
www.4qte.com
IMPORT SETUP
Press “Import Setup” button then
continue.
to
Select desired setup file from directory.
Press
to accept the setup and return to
Home screen.
New Setup
Select “New Setup” to perform all setup through
the display user-interface.
Import Setup
Select “Import Setup” to select an AgSetup file to
import setup items from your computer.
MULTIPLE DISPLAY SETUP - ADDITIONAL DISPLAY
Press “Multiple Display” button then
continue.
Press “Additional Display” button then
continue.
to
to
Select desired setup file from directory.
Press
to accept the setup and return to
Home screen.
Single Display
Select “Single Display” if you only have one
display in your operation.
Multiple Display
Select “Multiple Displays” if you have more than
one display and want to share setup items
between displays.
Note: The business created on the first display, and any other management and equipment items, will be
imported to the additional displays.
IMPORT SETUP DATA
IMPORT FILES
Import
Files
Press: Home button > External Storage button > Import Files
14
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
SETUP
CONFIGURATION
Use the scroll bar to find the file you wish to import.
File Selection
When a setup file is created it is saved in a folder titled
with the displays serial number _nickname. The file will
include a date and have the .agsetup suffix.
Size
Name
2009120009-2-634
2009120009-2-634
2009120009-2-634
Select the desired setup file from directory and press
Demo Waterway
.
No Preview
North Field
Waterloo Farm
Highlight item with conflict
Davenport Farm
Ashton Farm
Press
Resolve
Conflicts can be resolved by:
Conflict Resolution
• Rename Import
Item to Import
Name:
Modification Time:
Creation Time:
• Rename Existing
Existing Item
Corn
03/05/2012 14:24
03/05/2012 14:24
Name:
Modification Time:
Creation Time:
Corn
01/09/2012 08:35
01/09/2012 08:35
• Merge
- Product Mixes and Configurations can not be
merged. The Merge button will be grayed out
and not selectable for these items.
Once all conflicts have been resolved. press
.
Rename
Imported
Rename the item being imported.
Rename
Existing
Rename the existing Item.
Merge
Merge the imported and existing items together.
HOME SCREEN
Press: Home button
Most of the functionality of the display is not available until the
basic setup process is completed.
Configuration
Start Field Operation
(A) Status bar
(B) Setup button
(C) Task bar
You must complete these initial configuration steps for the Run
Time Environment to be active:
1. Grower, Farm, and Field management
For more information, See “Management button” on page 30.
2. Equipment Operating Configuration
You can access Configuration Setup by pressing the Setup (wrench) button (B) at the upper right-hand
portion of the Home screen. For more information, see “Configuration button” on page 21.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
15
www.4qte.com
3. Product setup
For more information, see “Product tab” on page 22, as well as the additional configuration information
described in each Operations chapter.
4. Select Event
For more information, “Setup Event” on page 45.
SETUP BUTTONS
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button
The Setup buttons are used to toggle between screens that adjust settings for Configuration,
Management, GPS and display.
• Configuration button
Press to adjust the configuration settings particular to your vehicle and
equipment; as well as enter and edit product information. For more information,
see “Product tab” on page 22, as well as “Configuration Setup Screen” on page 44.
• Management button
Press to access and edit Grower, Farm, Field and Operator information. For more
information, see “Management button” on page 30.
• GPS button
Press to adjust Guidance settings, GPS settings, and lightbar settings (if
applicable). For more information, see “Guidance” on page 117.
• Display button
Press to adjust settings for Time and Date, brightness and volume settings,
operating units, language; enable video; view features; and also create and
restore backups.
DISPLAY BUTTON
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > Display button
The Display screen contains the following tabs:
• General tab
displays settings related to Time, Date, display screen settings, operating units, video and display owner
information.
16
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
SETUP
• Features tab
lists unlocks for a particular display.
• Advanced tab
includes information related to log files and system backups.
GENERAL TAB
Console Setup
General
Display
Advanced
Features
Language/Country
100%
40%
Brightness
Volume
General
Operating Units
Time/Date
8:56:50 AM
11/01/2011
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button >
Display button > General tab
Calibrate
Touchscreen
English/US
Imperial
ISOBUS Settings
Time Zone
Americas (Central Time)
Enable Video
The Setup General Tab is consists of the following
items:
• Time/Date button
Press button and use
/
to adjust the
hours, minutes, A.M./P.M. settings, month, date and
year. To make these changes effective, press
.
Note: The display will then shut down immediately. If you do not want to shut the display down, press the
Close (Red X) button; however the time/date changes will not be accepted until the display is shut down and
restarted.
• Brightness and volume percentages.
To change these, press the Brightness/Volume button and use
of the Display Brightness and Speaker Volume.
/
to change the percentage
• Calibrate Touchscreen.
Press this to launch the Touch screen Calibration wizard. Calibrate the touch screen by following the onscreen instructions.
CAUTION: Do not use any sharp objects to operate the touch screen or the display may be damaged.
• Time Zone
Use the drop-down menu to select your time zone.
• Language/Country Selection
Use the drop-down menu to select the language.
• Operating Units
Select either Imperial or Metric.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
17
CONFIGURATION
• Display tab
contains functionality for setting up a Display Owner and making any needed edits to the owner personal
information.
www.4qte.com
• Enable Video
Enables input from up to four video cameras.
• ISOBUS Settings
Enables Virtual Terminal and Task Controller
Must be unlocked
DISPLAY TAB
Console Setup
General
Display
Features
Advanced
This Display
geo
Display
Phone:
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button >
Display button > Display tab
Nickname:
geo
Serial Number: 2009120056
Product Type: AL VERSA
Owner: George Eilers
Phone:
Email:
Address:
Image:
Change
Owner
Edit
Information
The Display tab contains functionality for setting up a Display Owner and making any needed edits to the
owner personal information. The Display Owner information is used in the product application report
feature of application rate control.
• Nickname
• Serial Number
• Product Type
• Owner
• Phone
• Email
• Address
• Image
• Change Owner
• Edit Information
FEATURES TAB
Features
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > Display button > Features tab
18
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
SETUP
Console Setup
The Features Tab is where you can enter unlock
codes. Unlock codes are unique to the serial number
of each display and the feature registration number.
You must supply these numbers to your dealer when
purchasing any unlock codes. Press
the unlock code and press
feature.
CONFIGURATION
Unlocking Features
to enter
to enable the
Display
General
Features
Advanced
Feature
Status
Feature Description:
Automatic Swath Control
Enabled
Multiple Product
Enabled
Norac UC5 Interface
Enabled
Fan Frame - Feed Gate Control
Enabled
ISOBUS Virtual Terminal
Enabled
HARDI Sprayer
Off
Unlock
Note: Once a feature is unlocked, that feature remains with that display and cannot be transferred to another.
ADVANCED TAB
Advanced
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > Display button > Advanced tab
Console Setup
The Advanced Tab allows you to specify settings for
copying log files; specify Key Switch Standby
settings; view and manually upgrade module
firmware; and create and restore backup files.
General
Display
Features
Key Switch Standby
(minutes)
Log Files
5
Advanced
Memory
Guidance
Export by Grower
Create
Backup
Copy
Debug Files
Export data files
on shutdown
Restore
Backup
Clear
Debug Files
Export All
Log Files
Remove
Patterns
Clear Internal
Memory
Export
Diagnostic Files
About
View Module
Firmware
Advanced
Parameters
Memory
Test
Service
Mode
CAUTION: The Export Diagnostic Files, Advanced Parameters, Copy Debug Files, Clear Debug Files
and Service Mode functionality on the Advanced Tab is reserved for use by the manufacturer. DO NOT
change any of these settings without specific instruction from the manufacturer.
• Key Switch Standby
This setting allows the display to remain powered up after the vehicle power has been shut down. Instead,
the display will switch into standby mode and will appear to be shut off; however the power light will change
to an amber color. Pressing the touchscreen while it is in standby mode will immediately turn the screen
back on again.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
19
www.4qte.com
Use
/
to specify a length of time that you wish the display to remain powered up in standby
mode after the vehicle power has been shut down.
Note: When the time you specified in Key Switch Standby is nearly expired, then the amber-colored power
light will flash on and off immediately preceding shutdown. If you wish the display to remain powered up for a
longer period of time, touch the display to restart the Key Switch Standby countdown.
• About button
Displays product licensing information and copyright information.
• Log Files
These settings allow you to copy your data in the display.
- Export by Grower Press of export log files by growers.
- Export Data Files. Press to copy all logged data in the display to the USB drive.
- Export Data Files on Shutdown. Checking this checkbox will copy all log files to the USB drive when
the display is powering down.
- See “Export Files” on page 66 for more information.
• Memory
Adjusts information stored in the display’s internal memory.
- Create Backup. Press to create a backup file of all configuration settings, products, and Grower-FarmField Management data structure on the USB drive. Backup files are stored using the .ibk2 file format.
- Restore Backup. Press to restore a backup file from the external data drive to the internal memory of
the display.
- Clear Internal Memory. Press this button to clear the internal memory of the display. The system will
present a warning dialog box and ask if you would like to create a backup file prior to clearing the
memory.
CAUTION: Once you clear the system’s internal memory, this information is deleted and cannot be restored
unless a backup has been made.
• View Module Firmware. Displays the Module Firmware Management screen, which is a list of all firmware
modules and firmware versions that are available for the display.
Note: The Module Firmware Management list includes module firmware that you may not be running.
- Import - Imports any firmware stored on the USB drive into the display memory.
- Direct Upgrade - Upgrades an individual module directly from the USB.
- Remove - Removes unwanted module firmware from the Module Firmware Management list.
Note: Pressing the Remove button does not remove firmware from the module itself. It merely removes the
upgrade file from the display.
• Remove Patterns. Pressing this button permanently erases all guidance patterns from the display’s
memory.
20
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
SETUP
CONFIGURATION
CONFIGURATION BUTTON
CONFIGURATION TAB
Configuration
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > Configuration (tractor) button > Configuration tab
The Configuration tab is where you can create, view
and change configuration settings.
An operating configuration is a task-specific
association of vehicle, implement, controller, and
speed source that is saved for use over different
seasons and on different displays.
Configuration Setup
Configuration
Equipment
Product
Tillage
Equipment
Name
JD 8400, JD 2400
Application
JD 4630
• Add button
Press to add an operating configuration. A wizard takes you through the process of creating
a configuration.
• When finished, the new configuration appears in the list on the left side of the screen.
• When you highlight the configuration, the equipment in the configuration are listed in the box on the right
side of the screen.
• Information regarding configurations for specific operations is given in each operations chapter.
• Rename button
Press to rename the configuration.
• Setup button
Press to adjust configuration settings.
• Remove button
Press to remove a configuration.
CAUTION: When you remove a configuration all data logged with that configuration will also be removed!
However, all log files will remain in memory until exported to the USB drive.
Equipment
• Equipment button
Press to add, edit, or remove information for a specific vehicle, implement or controller.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
21
www.4qte.com
PRODUCT TAB
Product
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > Configuration (tractor) button > Product tab
The Product tab is where you can add, edit. or
remove product information.
Configuration Setup
Configuration
Equipment
Product
Planting
Manufacturer:
Type:
T5423
Units:
Restricted Use:
CSX56A11VT3PRO
EPA Number:
Fertilizer
gallons
No
CSX56B10CONV
Application
28% UAN
30% UAN
Ag Lime
The Product tab is where you can perform the following tasks:
• Add or import Planting products.
• Add or import Application products.
• Add Product Template (such as a tank mix, or a dry blend of multiple products).
• Add or import Harvest products.
• Add button
Press to add or import a Product. At the following screen, choose a Product Option: Add
Product, Import Product, or Add Product Mix (if in Application). From here, an on-screen
wizard continues you through each step of the setup process.
• When finished, the new product appears in Product Tab.
• When you highlight the product, information about the product appears on the right side of the screen.
• Specific planting and application product information can be viewed in those respective chapters.
• Rename button
Press to rename the product.
• Setup button
Press to adjust configuration settings.
• Remove button
Press to remove a product.
CAUTION: When you remove a product all regions using that product will also be removed!
22
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
SETUP
CONFIGURATION
Planting Settings
• Edit Info button
Press to edit the following information for the highlighted product in the Product List.
- Manufacturer
• Edit Legend button
Press to change the legend settings listed below.
- Average
- Range Spacing
- Color Scheme
- Ranges
- Reset to Default Legend
For more information, see “Legend Settings” on page 52.
Application Settings
• Edit Info button
Press to edit the following information for the highlighted product in the Product List.
- Product Units
- Manufacturer
- EPA Number
- check box for restricted use pesticides
• Edit Legend button
Press to change the legend settings listed below.
- Average
- Range Spacing
- Color Scheme
- Ranges
- Reset to Default Legend
For more information, see “Legend Settings” on page 52.
Grain Harvest Settings
• Crop Settings
Press the Edit button to open the Grain Settings screen where you can adjust the following settings:
- Dry% The percentage of grain moisture used to calculate Dry Bushels
- Weight to Volume The Weight to Volume conversion number used to calculate bushels.
- Expand bushels for all grains below dry% If the moisture of the harvested crop is below the dry
percentage, the display increases weight to show the weight which would be shown if the
crop equaled or exceeded the dry percentage.
• Legend Settings
Choose Yield or Moisture from drop down box.
Press Edit Legend to change the settings listed below.
- Average
- Range Spacing
- Color Scheme
- Ranges
- Reset to Default Legend
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
23
www.4qte.com
For more information, see “Legend Settings” on page 52.
24
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
SETUP
MANAGEMENT SETUP
CONFIGURATION SELECTION
Note: Configuration Setup is specific to an operation (Guidance, Tillage, Planting, Application, Harvest). Go to
the specific operation section in this manual for information on how to setup a configuration.
1. Press the Configuration button on the home page.
Configuration button shows name of current selected
configuration. System defaults to guidance configuration.
Guidance
2. Operating Configuration Selection
Use
3. Press
to select an operating configuration from the drop-down menu.
to finish Configuration Selection process.
All Modules Detected
Operating Configuration
Configuration can be loaded and is detecting all
modules setup in the configuration.
CIH Magnum 180, White 8816
Equipment
Display is detecting the module.
Name
Vehicle
CIH Magnum 180
Implement
White 8816
Device
Row Shutoff
Auxiliary Input Module
Row Clutch Control Module
Device
Seed Monitor
Seed Tube Monitor Module
Modules Missing
Operating Configuration
Configuration can not be loaded.
CIH Magnum 340, JD1770
Display is not detecting module.
Equipment
Name
Auxiliary Input Module: Not found
Planter Hydraulic Rate Control Module: Not found
Device
Row Shutoff
Auxiliary Input Module: Not found
Row Clutch Control Module: Not found
Device
Seed Monitor
Seed Tube Monitor Module: Not found
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
25
MANAGEMENT SETUP
SETUP
www.4qte.com
Some Modules Not Detected
Configuration can be loaded but is not detecting
all the modules associated with the configuration.
When loaded, it will not perform the functions of the
missing modules.
Display is detecting module.
Operating Configuration
CIH Magnum 340, Hardi Commander 10000
Name
Equipment
Vehicle
CIH Magnum 340
Implement
Hardi Commander 10000
Device
DC COM10K
Auxiliary Input Module
Liquid Control Module
Display is not detecting module.
An example of an application configuration is shown.
The Direct Command module is detected by the
display but the Direct Injection, Crop Sensor, and
Boom Control modules are not.
Container
Main Tank
Device
DL1
Auxiliary Input Module
Direct Injection Module: Not found
Container
Device
Injection Tank
Crop Sensor
Crop Sensor Master Module: Not found
Device
Boom Control
Norac UC5 Controller Modu le: Not found
Modules not the same as previously used
Configuration has a module that was not used
previously.
Operating Configuration
JD 8235R, Appl
Name
Equipment
Module is not the one that was previously used.
Vehicle
JD8235R
Implement
Appl
Device
DirectLiquid
Auxiliary Input Module
Liquid Control Module: Serial number does not match expected.
Container Main Tank
If an operator selects a configuration that has a
, the Module
Changed/Missing window will appear, verifying that you want to load the
configuration. If you press
, the configuration will be updated with
the modules currently being used.
Module Changed/Missing
The selected configuration contains a
module that appears to have been replaced.
If this is the case, press accept. Otherwise,
press cancel and choose or create another
configuration.
EVENTS
Events are used to track field operations. New events can be created at anytime and therefore a
physical field can be broken into many events or recorded under one.
26
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
SETUP
The display can be run in two different modes:
Traditional mode: requires user to specify a Grower, Farm, and Field for the Event. The display
associates this information with setup files and logged data. When these files are reviewed or utilized in
the future, it provides the operator with a greater depth of information.
Events Only mode: minimizes the setup process so that the display is ready to run in the field with the
least amount of setup (just a few button presses).
Setting mode (Traditional or Events Only) using Permissions
The display is set to Traditional mode by default but Events Only mode can be enabled by de-selecting
“Field Management” in a user’s permissions.
Users
Select Specific
User
Management (Barn) button > User tab > Select Specific User > Setup (wrench) button
Edit User screen allows permissions to set for
user.
Edit User
General
Phone/Email
Address
Permissions
User Role
Permission Level
Custom
Operator
Management
Manager
Field Management
View Summary
Mapping
Pan/Zoom Controls
Legend Toolbox
Marks Toolbox
Display uses Traditional mode when Field Management is checked. Events using
the Traditional mode are tied to the Grower/Farm/Field structure.
Management
Field Management
View Summary
Display uses Events Only mode when Field management is unchecked.
Management
Field Management
View Summary
Starting an Event
1. Press: Select Event button.
Select a Season, Grower, Farm, and
Field on the Management Selection
screen.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
Select Event
27
MANAGEMENT SETUP
An event contains all coverage maps created while that event was active. Events are automatically
named by date and time.
www.4qte.com
Note: This screen does not appear when operating
in Events Only mode.
Management Selection
Growing Season
2014 Crop
Enable Management button
Enable Management
Grower
George Eilers
is checked by default and requires a Grower, Farm,
and Field to be entered before proceeding.
Farm
To create a Grower, Farm, and Field press the
Field
Sheldon
button on current screen and press
again next screen. Then type in name and press
Orab
Enable Management
twice.
Grower, Farm, and Field can also be created in
Management setup
. See “Grower/Farm/Field
tab” on page 30 to set up information using Management setup.
Enable Management
Un-checking Enable Management button will allow operator to continue to next
screen without entering additional information on this screen (similar to Events Only mode).
Next screen will vary depending on configuration.
New Guidance Pattern
For Example:
The screen shown to the left will appear for
Guidance configurations.
Straight
Pattern Options
Implement Width:
For Application configurations the screen will involve
product selection.
For Seeding configurations the screen will involve
seed selection.
Make selections and press
Guidance Width
30.0000
30.0000
Enable Tramlines
Change
Pattern
to continue.
Map screen will appear and user can begin
operation.
Managing Events
Edit Event Name, Suspend Event, and Clear Map Bounds
Press Setup
button (wrench)
on Event bar.
28
Event: 2014-01-09_14:40:42
Grower: George Eilers
Farm: Sheldon
Field: Orab
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
SETUP
MANAGEMENT SETUP
The Event Options screen allows operator to change
the Event name, Suspend Event, and to Clear Map
bounds.
Event Options
Event Name
014-01-10_08:3:31
Suspend
Event
Clear
Map Bounds
Select a Previous Event
Press event
name on Event
bar.
Event: 2014-01-09_14:40:42
Grower: George Eilers
Farm: Sheldon
Field: Orab
Note: This screen does not appear when operating
in Events Only mode.
Management Selection screen appears.
Management Selection
Growing Season
2014 Crop
Grower
Press
to accept.
George Eilers
Farm
Sheldon
Field
Orab
Enable Management
The Field Operation Wizard: Event Selection screen
allows the operator to pick a previously created
event.
Event Selection
New Event
Corn
2014-01-12_16:01:17
2014-01-12_15:54:14
Press
to accept.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
29
www.4qte.com
MANAGEMENT BUTTON
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > Management (Barn) button
From this screen the operator can access Grower/Farm/Field, Season, User, and Businesses tabs.
GROWER/FARM/FIELD TAB
Grower/Farm/Field
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > Management (Barn) button > Grower/Farm/Field tab
Grower
The Grower refers to the business or person that the system is in operation for. Contact information can
also be entered for each Grower. The Grower information will be passed into mapping software for
automatic Grower setup within desktop software.
• Add button
Press to add a Grower.
• Rename button
Edit an existing name of a Grower by highlighting that name and pressing button.
• Setup button
Press to enter information for the Grower’s Name, Tax ID and Memo.
• Remove button
Press to remove a Grower.
Note: Personal Information entered at this screen can be added or edited at any time.
30
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
SETUP
Management Setup
Grower/Farm/Field
Season
Users
Contacts
Businesses
True Area:
Grower: Gene Eilers
In the display, farms are subdivided into fields. You
can associate Field names with a particular Grower. If
the display will be used for multiple Growers, enter
each Grower business name and associate the field
names with the correct grower when the fields are set
up within the system.
40 ac
Boundary
Farm: Sheldon
Field: Low 80
Grower: Seth
Clear
In the Field Tab, select a Grower underneath the dropdown menu at the top. Each farm of that particular
grower is shown in a list, with the fields within that farm
as subcomponents within that list.
39.92 ac
• Add button
Press to add a Field.
• Rename button
Edit an existing name of a Field by highlighting that name and pressing button.
• Setup button
Edit the Farm and Field information by highlighting that name and pressing button. The Field
Information screen appears.
• Remove button
Press to remove a Field.
The Field Information screen opens, showing the
name of that field in the Title Bar. Field Name
information that can be added or edited by pressing
including Farm, County, Township, Range,
Section Number, Area, FSA Number, FSA Area and
Legal Description.
Field Information
Field
Area
Sheldon
Farm
Low 80
0 ac
Clear
Bounds
County
FSA Number
Township
FSA Area
Range
Legal Description
0 ac
Section
• Area
shown in the total acres (hectares) of the field.
• FSA Number
refers to the U.S. Farm Service Agency’s four-digit number assigned to every field.
• FSA Area
refers to tillable acres as established by the FSA.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
31
MANAGEMENT SETUP
Farm and Field
www.4qte.com
• Clear Bounds button
Press to center the map on the current GPS position.
Note: The Clear Bounds feature is particularly useful if you have flyer points or have logged a point outside
the mappable range of your current location.
Importing and Exporting Field Boundaries
Boundaries can be created with the display or imported from desktop GIS software. Any boundary files
present in the display can also be exported for use in desktop mapping software.
Note: For more information on creating boundaries, see “Create Boundary” on page 55.
Management Setup
Grower/Farm/Field
•
USB Import button
To import a boundary from the USB drive, first go to the
Setup Field tab, highlight the correct field in the
Farm/Field list and press the USB Import button.
Season
Users
Contacts
Businesses
True Area:
Grower: Gene Eilers
40 ac
Boundary
Farm: Sheldon
Field: Low 80
Grower: Seth
Clear
39.92 ac
File Selection
The File Selection screen appears. Highlight the
desired file to import.
Name
Field:
Farm:
Grower:
Boundaries
Demo
Allegon County
Michigan Test Fields
New Folder 1
Field_1.iby
Operator can import/export all fields and boundaries
at once with an .AGSETUP file. For more
information on .AGSETUP files see See “.AGSETUP”
on page 293.
Field_2.iby
Field_3.iby
Field_4.iby
irx_multi_product
irx_single_product
91.51 ac
Press
to complete the import process.
• USB Export button
To export a boundary to the USB drive, highlight the correct field in the Farm/Field list and
press the USB Export button. At the File Selection screen, highlight the desired field to export.
A screen will appear telling you that the boundary was exported successfully. Press
field setup screen.
32
return to the
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
SETUP
Season
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > Management (Barn) button > Season tab
A season is defined as the calendar year that the crop will be harvested. A season has a start and an
end date. Creating a season and setting it to active is required prior to the system logging any data.
The seasons are displayed in lists, with the Active season displayed in bold face type. All new data is
logged to the active season; therefore a season must be set as Active before you can log any new data
to it.
• Add button
Press to add a Season.
• Edit button
Edit an existing name of a Season by highlighting that name and pressing button.
• Set Active button
Press to set the season selected in the Summary list box to the active season.
• Season Reminder button
Press to set the date that the system will prompt the operator to create a new season.
• Remove button
Press to remove a season.
USERS TAB
Users
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > Management (Barn) button > User tab
Management Setup
Grower/Farm/Field
Season
Users
Businesses
Eilers, George
Eilers, Joan
Oakes, Bill
Schmidt, Jack
VanBurkum, Doug
Management Setup screen - User tab allows user to add, modify, or delete users from the display.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
33
MANAGEMENT SETUP
SEASON TAB
www.4qte.com
Add a User
Users
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > Management (Barn) button > User tab > Plus (+) button
1. Enter first name and/or last name (have to enter a first or last name, recommend entering both)
2. Enter applicator license (optional). Press
to continue.
3. Select Operator or Manager (can select either, none, or both). For more information on selecting
Operator/Manager and setting up permissions, see “Permissions” on page 35. Press
to continue.
4. Enter and verify password (optional)
• Locks the displays ability to load/change operating configurations, access setup and USB, if Manager has
a password set
• Leaves display unsecure unless each manger sets a password
• Warning message appears if passwords do not match
• No restriction for password format (can be any combination of letters, numbers, and special characters)
• Case sensitive
5. Press
to accept
• Setup button
Press to edit operator information by highlighting that name and pressing button. Setup button
allows user to edit information originally entered when profile was added. Edit button also
allows access to more phone, email, and address information.
• Remove button
Press to remove an operator.
User Setup button
Users
Select Specific
User
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > Management (Barn) button > User tab > Select Specific
User > Setup (wrench) button
34
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
SETUP
MANAGEMENT SETUP
Edit User
General tab
General
Phone/Email
Address Permissions
• First and Last Name
First
George
• Set and Clear Password
Last
Eilers
• Applicator License
Applicator License
• Memo
Memo
Phone/Email tab
Clear Password
Set Password
Passwor
• Home Phone
• Mobile Phone
• Business Phone
• Home Email
• Business Email
Address tab
• Address
• Extended Address
• City/Locality
• State/Province
• Country
• Postal Code
PERMISSIONS
This is an optional function that defines what access the user will have in the display. Users are defined
as Operator or Manager (can select either, none, or both).
Operators
• Have full or limited access
Edit Person
General
Phone/Email
Address Permissions
Permission Level
• No access to USB or Setup options, unless also
set as a Manager
- Can import from USB from Map Screen (RX,
patterns, boundaries)
Operator
Full
Full Permission Level
Manager
• Manager sets up privileges
Managers
• Full access to the display settings and functions
• Only user that can change the selected
configuration
• Ability to log out of the display
System can be set up with operators only. Passwords are not used when set up this way.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
35
www.4qte.com
PERMISSION LEVEL FOR OPERATORS
Full Permission
Provides full access to features and functionality on the map and home screen. A user, set only as an
Operator, cannot select a different configuration and cannot access USB or Setup, when a manager is
setup in the display.
Basic Permission
No access to:
• Summary screen
• Legend Tab on Map screen
• Marks Tab on Map screen
• Boundary Tab on Map screen
Limits Guidance options to:
• Creating & loading Straight AB or SmartPath patterns
• Nudge
• Remark A
• Save or reset guidance line
36
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
SETUP
MANAGEMENT SETUP
Custom Permission
Edit User
General
Phone/Email
User Role
Operator
Manager
Address
Permissions
Permission Level
Custom
Management
Field Management
View Summary
Mapping
Pan/Zoom Controls
Legend Toolbox
Boundary Toolbox
Guidance Toolbox
Minimize Toolboxes
Patterns
Straight AB
SmartPath
Pivot
Adaptive Curve
Identical Curve
A + Heading
Tramlines
Nudge
Shift
Remove Patterns
Can allow or deny the following options:
• Management screen
• Pan/Zoom controls
• Legend Toolbox
• Marks Toolbox
• Boundary Toolbox
• Guidance Toolbox
• Minimize Toolbox
• Each individual guidance pattern
• Ability to remove guidance patterns
Display uses Traditional mode when Field Management is checked. Events using
the Traditional mode are tied to the Grower/Farm/Field structure.
Management
Field Management
View Summary
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
37
www.4qte.com
Display uses Events Only mode when Field management is unchecked.
Management
Field Management
View Summary
Management, GPS/Guidance, Console Setup, and External Storage Buttons are locked for
Operators.
A manager can access these buttons by pressing the button and inputting their password.
A User can be setup as an Operator and Manager to have the same access as a Manager.
Setup and USB buttons are locked for Operators if a Manager is present in the system. A
Manager can access setup menu and USB by pressing button and inputting their
password.
A User can be setup as an Operator and Manager to have the same access as a Manager.
The Home and Map screen will appear different depending on how you assigned user permissions. For
setting up users with permissions see “Users tab” on page 33.
Basic Permissions - Home screen
• No Summary screen
• Setup and USB buttons are locked (as indicated by a padlock icon on those buttons)
• Brightness and volume are on home screen - settings saved per operator
• Operator Change - Option to continue or start new operation when operators change
Full Permissions - Home Screen
• Summary screen button is present
• Setup and USB are locked
• Management, GPS/Guidance, Console Setup, and External Storage Buttons are locked for
Operators.
• A manager can access these buttons by pressing the button and inputting their password.
A user, set only as an Operator, cannot select a different configuration, when a manager is setup in the
display. When a manager is setup in the display, only a managers can unlock and change the
configuration so the manager should make sure to select a configuration upon setup.
38
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
SETUP
Map screen appearance of an operator
with Basic permission. Only the
Guidance toolbox is present.
MANAGEMENT SETUP
4.5 mph
0.67 ac
Guidance
New
Pattern
Load
Pattern
Operator can
• Create guidance lines
- Straight AB
- SmartPath
Manage
Patterns
• Nudge
• Guidance setup
1
ACCESSING SETUP MENUS
1. Press Setup (wrench) button.
2. Select Manager from drop-down menu. Press
3. Enter password. Press
.
.
Now have complete access to the setup menus:
• Configurations Settings
• Grower management
• GPS settings
• Display settings
Do not have to be a Manger to create certain objects
• Grower
• Farm
• Field
• Product (can't change units)
ACCESSING USB
1. Press USB button
2. Select Manager from drop-down menu. Press
3. Enter password. Press
.
.
Now have complete access to the USB functions:
• Import/export
• AgSetup files
• Export data
• Upgrade firmware
• Advanced options
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
39
www.4qte.com
Advanced Options with USB
• Ability to create/restore backups from USB
• Options for exporting log files
- Export by grower
- Export data at shutdown
- Export all log files
FORGOTTEN PASSWORDS
When a Manager forgets his password he won't be able to access Setup.
Tech Support will be able to generate a password based on the serial number and firmware of the
monitor.
Password generator will require the following
information:
• (A) Display serial number
Devices
CAN A
CAN B
DISPLAY
• (B) Major revision
- First digit of firmware version
• (C) Minor revision
Firmware:
4.0.18/4.0.17
Firmware ID:
VERSA
Hardware ID:
4001683
Product ID:
VERSA
Serial Number:
2009120056
Revision:
4.3.2.0
Run Time:
436:54:39
Boot Counter:
394
- First digit of firmware version after decimal.
Example:
Version 4.5
Major = 4
Diagnostics
Minor = 5
Only needed when a Manger forgets their password and works within the display until firmware is
upgraded.
How will Tech Support identify if the person calling in is a Manager or not?
They will ask the caller, “Are you a Manager in the display?” If the customer answers yes, Tech Support
will generate the password. If the customer answers no, Tech Support will require a Manager to
authorize the display to be unlocked.
What if a customer doesn’t want to risk forgetting passwords and generating new ones?
A display does not need to be locked with a password. The display can be operated as it has been in the
past without passwords. Operators can also be setup with limited or customized access without
passwords.
Tips
• Managers, keep a record of all passwords set in the display.
• Operators, write down your personal password.
• To avoid Operators obtaining unwanted access to a display, instruct them to call a Manager for help with
passwords before Tech Support.
40
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
SETUP
Businesses
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > Management (Barn) button > Businesses tab
The businesses are displayed in lists, with the Active business displayed in bold face type. All new data
is logged to the active business; therefore a business must be set as Active before you can log any new
data to it.
• Add button
Press to add a business
• Edit button
Edit an existing business by highlighting that name and pressing button.
• Remove button
Press to remove a business.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
41
MANAGEMENT SETUP
BUSINESSES TAB
www.4qte.com
42
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
SETUP
FIELD OPERATIONS
JD 8360R, JD 1770
Eilers, George
Event: 2014-01-09_12:39:39
Field: Orab
Products
Region:
<1>
Productivity
0 sds/ac
0.0 sds
0.0 ac
C1224
0 sds/ac
0.0 sds
0.0 ac
C1492
0 sds/ac
0.0 sds
0.0 ac
1222
A. Operator Selection, see “Operator Selection” on page 43
B. Edit Operator, see “User Setup button” on page 34
C. Operating Configuration, see “Configuration Selection” on page 25
D. Configuration Setup, see “Configuration Setup Screen” on page 44
E. Event Setup, see “Setup Event” on page 45
F. Event Options, see “Field Operation Options” on page 46
G. Products Tab, shows products, rates and area covered
H. Product Selection, press to change products
I. Rate Control Settings, press to change rates
J. Productivity Tab, shows speed, time, area covered, and distance traveled
K. Region Options, see “Region button” on page 46
OPERATOR SELECTION
1. Press Select Operator button
Select Operator
Allows you to select a machine operator from the dropdown list. Machine operator information is logged with all
field operations. Operator information may be entered in Management Setup at “Management button” on
page 16
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
43
FIELD OPERATIONS
SETUP
www.4qte.com
2. Choose the operator from drop-down menu.
Operator Selection
Note: Checkbox will require a password to be
entered upon start up of the display.
Press
Select Operator
Eilers, George
.
3. Enter password. Press
.
The operator will now be selected and permissions
active
Options
Show Operator Selection on Startup
Note: If the active operator has a password, the
operator selection will always be displayed on startup.
OPERATOR LOG OUT
Log Out
Press: Home button > Operator: button > Logout button
Users that are both a Manager and Operator can logout which locks Setup and USB access and an
operator must log in before an operation can be performed.
CONFIGURATION SETUP SCREEN
Guidance
The Configuration Setup screen is where you can make settings adjustments for your equipment,
ground speed, GPS, and controllers.
The appearance of this Configuration Setup screen varies, based on your particular configuration. Some
DirectCommand and SeedCommand configurations include settings that are mentioned in those
individual chapters. Most Configuration Settings screens will include the following buttons.
• Equipment Settings. For more information, see “Equipment Settings” on page 71.
• Speed Input. For more information, see “Speed Input Settings” on page 72.
• AutoSwath. For more information, see “AutoSwath” on page 76.
• GPS Offsets. For more information, see “Vehicle Offsets” on page 77.
• Swath Section Offsets. For more information, see “Swath Section Offsets” on page 78.
• Controller Settings. For more information, see information in the SeedCommand and DirectCommand
chapters.
• Calibrate Pressure. Used in DirectCommand Liquid Application configurations.
44
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
SETUP
You must have already created the following:
• A Season, Grower, Farm and Field in Setup Management. For more information, see “Management
button” on page 30.
• An Operating Configuration at the Setup screen’s Configuration Tab. This Operating Configuration
consists of Equipment, Vehicle, Implement, Controller (optional), Container (in Application), and Ground
Speed Source.
• A Product (if you are creating an Application or Planting Field Operation) at the Setup Product Tab. For
more information, see “Product tab” on page 22.
All of these are referenced by the Field Operation Wizard during the Field Operation setup process.
Press the “Select Event” button
and follow the steps in the wizard.
Select Event
Select Event button opens the Field Operation Wizard where you can enter information relating to your
Growing Season, Grower, Farm, Field, Crop Type and Product. For more information, see “Setup Event”
on page 45 and also “Field Operation Options” on page 46.
1. Grower, Farm and Field Selection
Enter a Growing Season, Grower, Farm, and Field by pressing
down menu, or by pressing
to select existing ones from a drop-
to create a new one.
Use
to select an operating configuration from the drop-down menu. For more informations on
Configuration Selection see“Configuration Selection” on page 25.
2. Product Selection
A planting or application configuration must include a product. Select product from the drop-down list or
press
to create a new one. Press
• If a configuration is loaded with undetected
modules, the Product Selection screen may show
some grayed out (unavailable) options. The
example to the left shows that the Direct
Command module is active but Direct Injection,
Crop Sensor, and Boom Control modules are
grayed out and not functional.
to continue.
Product Selection
DC COM10K
DL1
Crop Sensor
Boom Control
Active
Active
28% UAN
Select Product
Active
Active
3. Region Options
to edit or change the region name from the system default if desired. At this screen, you can
Press
also create a new region or change the controlling product.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
45
FIELD OPERATIONS
SETUP EVENT
www.4qte.com
4. Return to Home screen
When you complete the steps in the Wizard, you will return to the Home screen.
• For information on Run screen operations, see “Run screens” on page 47.
FIELD FINDER
If you have an existing field boundary, and your current GPS position is within that field boundary, the
display will automatically pick the correct Grower, Farm and Field combination when you start a Field
Operation.
Region:
<1>
• Region button
A region is used to subdivide a field into smaller sections. The region in which data
is currently being logged is listed on the Region button. A new region can be created at any time as you
are performing a field operation.
To change between or add a new region to a field, press the Region button and follow the on-screen
instructions.
• Field Notes button
Edit any of the report items that are listed in Smart Report™. For more information, see
“Smart Report™” on page 66.
FIELD OPERATION OPTIONS
During a field operation, you can suspend or close the event by pressing on the wrench at the end of the
Grower Farm Field (Select Event) button. This opens the Events Options screen.
Press Setup
button (wrench)
on Event bar.
Event: 2014-01-09_14:40:42
Grower: George Eilers
Farm: Sheldon
Field: Orab
The Event Options screen allows operator to change
the Event name, Suspend or Close Event, be
Prompted to Close the Event, and to Clear Map
bounds.
Event Options
Event Name
2020-01-10_08:3:31
A closed event cannot be re-opened and will not
show up in the Event Selection screen. A user can
manually close Events or be prompted to close
events.
Suspend
Event
46
Clear
Map Bounds
Close
Event
Prompts to
Close Event
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
SETUP
Corn
• (A) Status Bar
1.97
C1420
sds/ac
32000
32000
Varieties
C1420
1
32000
2
30000
• (B) On-screen Light bar
• (C) Mapping toolbox
Flow 12864 sds/min
• (D) Mapping Function tabs
100%
40 ft 0 in
• (E) Product Control toolbox
• (F) Product tabs
Planter Drives (rpm)
1
75
• (G) Function buttons
• (H) Task bar
• (I) Main Screen buttons
• (J) Equipment tab
The appearance of the Map screen varies, depending upon which operation you are performing, and
your specific operating configuration.
The task bar displays buttons relating to various functions of the display. These buttons and status
indicators include Home, Mapping, Autoswath, Logging, and Auxiliary Input Status. These buttons are
shown in front of a green background when you are at that screen; otherwise they are shown in front of
a blue background.
Home button - Pressing the Home button takes you to the Home screen.
Map button - Pressing the Map button takes you to the Map screen. Pressing it more than once cycles
the Map screen to zoom in and out.
ZOOM DETAILS
ZOOM TO EXTENT
PERSPECTIVE VIEW
Note: The Perspective View is only available when guidance is active.
Video button. Pressing this button takes you to the video screen. Pressing this button
repeatedly cycles through the video inputs.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
47
FIELD OPERATIONS
RUN SCREENS
www.4qte.com
Note: For more information on the Video screen, see “Video” on page 63.
AutoSwath button. Pressing this button turns the AutoSwath feature on and off. When AutoSwath is
on, the icon is green; when it is off the icon is white.
AutoSwath - ON
AutoSwath - OFF
Area Logging Status button - This button appears for configurations that do not use rate control, such
as Tillage, Harvest, Planting operations that do not use SeedCommand, and Application operations that
do not use DirectCommand. Pressing this button turns logging on and off.
ON
OFF
The NORAC Engage button enables boom height control. This button can toggle back and forth
between Automatic Mode and Manual Mode.
When you enable Automatic Mode, this button turns green with three lines appearing underneath the
triangle. At the same time, the display beeps three times.
When you disable Automatic Mode on any part of the boom and the display switches to Manual Mode,
this button turns gray and the display beeps twice. If less than the full boom remains in Manual Mode,
the display will continue beeping twice every three seconds.
NORAC Engage - Enabled
NORAC Engage - Disabled
The Engage icon shows that the autosteer system is on, off, or off but ready to engage. The appearance
of this icon displays the following:
Engage - ON
Green if the autosteer system is on.
Engage - Ready
Grey if the autosteer system off but ready to engage.
48
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
SETUP
FIELD OPERATIONS
Engage - Not Ready
Grey with a red circle and slash if the autosteer system is off and unable to engage.
Note: For more information, see “Guidance” on page 117.
Master Switch Status. This bar shows that the Master Switch is active.
Master Switch - ON (GREEN)
Master Switch - OFF (RED)
GPS SIGNAL INDICATOR
The GPS button in the upper left-hand corner of the Map screen, displays the following colors:
Differential GPS
Green if you are receiving a differential GPS signal
GPS - No differential
Yellow if you are receiving GPS, but no differential signal
No GPS
Grey if you are receiving no GPS signal.
The Flex Mode icon appears for ParaDymes and GeoSteers using Flex Mode. Flex mode provides
continuity of position solution to maintain automated steering by seamless flexing (transitioning) to a
lower accuracy mode when a higher accuracy mode is lost; such as loss of the RTK radio link.
Flex Mode - ON (GREEN)
Flex Mode - Exceeded (YELLOW)
StableLoc - ON (GREEN)
Note: For more information, see the ParaDyme Insert.
The Device Information button opens screens that display Device Information, Memory,
Display, and display diagnostics.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
49
www.4qte.com
Note: For more information, See “Device Information” on page 69.
Vehicle Icon - Zoom to Extent
The Vehicle Icon is shown by an arrow inside a circle if the Map screen is viewed in Zoom to
Extent.
The vehicle appears as a gold-colored triangle if the Map screen is viewed in Zoom Detail. The
appearance of the zoomed-in icon changes depending upon the data being logged in the field.
Vehicle Icon - logging
If the vehicle is logging, the implement icon appears as a green bar behind it.
Vehicle Icon - with sections
If the vehicle is logging data from an implement split into sections, (for instance during a
planting or application operation), then these sections appear in the implement icon.
Vehicle Icon - not logging
If the vehicle is not logging data, then the implement icon appears as a gray bar.
Press the grid area of the Map screen, and four arrow icons appear at the
bottom right of the Map screen. An example showing these arrow buttons is
at left. Pressing these arrow icons will move the center of the Map screen in
the direction of the arrow button.
The Zoom Tool icons, which resemble a magnifying glass, are shown at the right-hand side
of the Map screen.
Pressing the zoom tool with the plus sign increases the scale of the Map screen.
Pressing the zoom tool with the minus sign decreases the scale of the Map screen.
Pressing the zoom tool with the four arrows underneath re-centers the Map screen and
brings its scale back to the default.
50
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
SETUP
At the upper left hand side of the Map screen is the Mapping Toolbox. Press any of the
four buttons on the toolbox and it expands. The toolbox consists of the following buttons:
• (A) Map Legend
• (B) Map Markers
• (C) Field
• (D) Guidance
The Map Legend, Map Markers and Field buttons are explained in the rest of this chapter.
The Guidance button is described in “Guidance” on page 117.
Map Legend tab
Product
Rate
Press the Map Legend button at the top of the Mapping Toolbox, and the Legend
appears. User can choose between Rate or Coverage using the drop-down menu.
205+
185 - 205
165 - 185
145 - 165
0 - 145
Map Options
Press the Legend Setup
(wrench) button,
and the Map Options screen appears. Here the user
can select map options, clear the map, and load a
reference map
• Clear Map
Permanently removes on-screen map from the
active field operation, but the log data will still be
exported to the USB drive.
• Load Reference
Loads a list of maps of previous operations
performed in that field. For each operation, you can
view As-Applied or Coverage attributes (and
Varieties if you are performing a Planting operation).
Map Options
Data
Guidance
Boundary
Marker
Reference
Rx
Tile
Grid
Topography
Clear Map
Load
Reference
CAUTION: Once you clear the map, this information cannot be retrieved.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
51
FIELD OPERATIONS
MAPPING TOOLBOX
www.4qte.com
Press
Load
Reference
. Select the reference map you want to
use.
Reference Map Wizard displays each operation
performed in field, filtered by season. The map can be
displayed as an As-Applied or Coverage.
Press
to continue.
Select the Autoswath channel to apply the reference
map to
Not selecting a channel will load the reference map as
a visual only
Press
to complete Reference Map Wizard.
Note: Using Reference maps for AutoSwath
functionality is applicable to planting and application
configurations only.
Legend Settings
On the Legend Select screen, press legend, and the Legend Settings screen appears. The
Legend Settings screen allows you to change the default legend.
Notes:
• The Legend Settings screen can also be accessed by
pressing the Edit Legend button on the Setup
screen’s Product Tab.
Legend Settings
Attribute: Rate
• Legend settings changes that are made at the
Legend Settings screen will affect all regions.
16.0 - (20.0)
12.0 - 16.0
8.0 - 12.0
4.0 - 8.0
(0.0) - 4.0
Average
175
Range Spacing
Color Scheme
Green-Yellow-Red
Ranges
10
Reset to Default
Legend
Save as Product
Legend
5
Automatic
Legend
The Legend Settings screen includes the following items:
52
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
SETUP
205 - (225)
185 - 205
165 - 185
145 - 165
(125) - 145
• Attribute
Appears at the top left of the Legend Settings screen. Attributes shown for Harvest
include Yield and Moisture. The Rate attribute is shown for Planting and Application
operations. You can adjust the color scheme, spacing and ranges as they appear on the
map screen, by using the buttons described below.
• Average
The Average button changes the average rate for the legend. Press
ranges shown on the map legend.
to specify the average of the
• Range Spacing
The Range Spacing button changes the difference between the rates in one color range. Press
to
edit the legend range spacing value, which is the total number of units represented by a particular color.
• Ranges
The Ranges
/
change the number of range increments displayed in the legend.
• Color Scheme
The Color Scheme can be modified by using the drop-down list. Choices include the following:
- Green-Yellow-Red
- Single Hue (blues or greens)
- Rainbow
• Reset to Default Legend
Resets the legend to the default settings.
• Automatic Legend
If the Automatic Legend checkbox is selected, the average automatically sets itself to the field average and
updates as the field average changes
• Reset to Default Legend
Press the reset legend to the system default.
• Save as Product Legend
Select the Save as Product Legend checkbox if you wish to set the current legend as the default legend for
all regions of the same product.
Markers tab
Markers are a collection of point objects that are available on the Map Markers
tab of the Mapping Toolbox. Map markers allow you to map points on the go in
order to identify specific features within a field. Press an individual marker to
indicate a Map Marker on the Map screen.
If all of the Markers that you created are not immediately visible in this screen,
use the Cycle Markers button to view more that you created.
Markers
Rock
Weeds
Washout
Cycle Markers
Hole
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
53
FIELD OPERATIONS
Attribute: Yield
www.4qte.com
Edit Markers
Marker Sets
Marker Management
Marker Sets
Pressing
allows operator to create, name, and
delete marker sets.
All Markers
Markers
Rock
Markers
• Press
Washout
Post
to add a marker.
Weeds
• Press
• Press
Outlet
to edit a marker.
to remove a marker
Load
Reference Marks
• If you have numerous map icons, you can cycle
through them by pressing
/
.
• When creating or editing a marker, check the Georeferenced Note button if you wish to add a Field Note
that is referenced to the current GPS position when that marker is used.
Field Tab
Field tab allows the user to setup boundaries, headlands, and topography.
Field
Boundary
Headlands
Topography
Boundary
Press the Boundary button on the Field tab to access the Boundary Options screen.
Field
Boundary
Headlands
Topography
54
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
SETUP
Boundary Options
Region
OUTER (39.74)
Pressing
on the Boundary Options screen
opens the Boundary Settings screen.
Highlighting an existing region and pressing
on deletes that region.
Use Import and Export buttons to move regions to
and from USB drive.
39.74
Clear All Boundaries. Press Clear All to permanently
delete all Boundary information for that field.
Import
Clear All
Export
CAUTION: Once you clear this information, it cannot be retrieved.
Boundary Settings
Boundary Settings
Underneath the Boundary Type area, you have the
choice of creating either an Outer Boundary or an
Inner Boundary.
Boundary Type
Region Type
Outer
Inner
Undefined
Boundary Offset
• Outer boundaries delineate the borders of an entire
field.
Distance
Direction
0
Left
• Inner boundaries mark specific features within that
field, such as waterways or buildings.
Create Boundary
1. Choose whether to create either an Outer boundary or Inner boundary by pressing one of the two
Boundary Type buttons.
2. If you chose to create an Inner Boundary, use the Region Type drop-down menu to choose the type
of boundary. Choices include: Roadway, Body of Water, Waterway, Buildings or Undefined.
3. The Boundary Offset feature enables mapping a boundary at a user-defined distance to the left or right
of the GPS antenna center line. If desired, specify a Boundary Offset distance by choosing a direction and
distance from the GPS antenna center line.
4. Press
to start the boundary.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
55
FIELD OPERATIONS
On the Boundary Options screen, you can Import
Boundaries, Export Boundaries, and Clear All
Boundaries.
www.4qte.com
5. During the creation of a boundary, the Pause/Resume button and Stop button
appear at the top of the Field tab.
Field
6. Press the Stop button to complete the boundary. At the Boundary screen, choose
whether to Save, Resume or Discard the boundary.
Headlands
Pause Boundary
Topography
When creating a boundary, you can use the Pause Boundary button to create a
straight line between two points. To do this, drive the vehicle to a point, press the
Pause Boundary button, then drive to the second point. When you press the
Resume Boundary button, a straight line is created between your current point and
your pause location.
HEADLANDS
Press the Headlands button on the Field tab to access the Headland Options
screen.
Field
Boundary
Headlands
A Field Boundary is required to create a headland.
Topography
Headlands Options
Enable Headlands - use checkbox to turn
Headlands functionality on and off
Enable Headlands
Add Headland
Active Area
Load a Headland
All
Edit Headland
Alarm Settings
Active Area
Product will
be applied to
headlands of
Product will
be applied to
main section
of field.
AutoSwath
will turn off
product on
headlands.
56
Work Area
AutoSwath
will not be
affected by
headlands.
Headlands
All
field.
AutoSwath
will turn off
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
SETUP
Press
FIELD OPERATIONS
Add a Headland
on Headlands Options screen.
Select Headland Type from drop-down box.
Headland Types
All-Around
New Headlands
Offset Implement Width - number of implement
widths used to set the headland width
Offset Implement Widths
2
Offset Distance
Offset Distance - distance used to set headland
width.
Press
80
0
to accept.
Top Bottom
Offset Implement Width - number of implement
widths used to set the headland width
New Headlands
Offset Implement Widths
2
Offset Distance
Offset Distance - distance used to set headland
width.
Heading - used to generate boundary, headlands
are created perpendicular to heading
80
Heading
0
Scaling
0
7.8
Use AB
Scaling - sets the amount of variation that is allowed
(from perpendicular) to include part of field boundary
in the headlands
Use AB - select AB line to set heading for
determining headlands
Shows the heading used for Headland creation.
Press
to accept.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
57
www.4qte.com
Driven
New Headlands
1. Select Driven from drop-down menu and press
to continue.
2. Press
on New Headlands screen.
3. Input Headland Offset Distance and Direction (Left
or Right). Press
to accept.
4. Drive Boundary
Clear All
•
pause
•
resume recording after pausing
•
stop recording
5. Save, Resume, or Discard
• Save
-a. Press Save button
-b. Default name is time and date. Press
-c. Press
to accept or
to change name.
to discard boundary.
• Resume - resume creating boundary
• Discard - discards boundary and returns display to map screen
Load Headlands
Press Load Headlands button.
Load Headlands
Name
Select a headland from list.
• Press
58
2014-01-14_15:25:35
to delete selected headland
• Press
screen
to return to Headland Options
• Press
to load selected headland.
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
SETUP
Press Edit Headlands button.
Edit Headlands
1
Select a headland from list.
• Press
to add a driven headland.
• Press
to delete selected headland.
• Press
FIELD OPERATIONS
Edit Headlands
to delete all driven headlands.
• Press
screen.
to return to Headland Options
• Press
to load selected headland.
Clear All
This screen will vary depending on type of headland.
Headland Alarm Settings
Press Headland Alarm Settings button.
Headland Alarm Settings
Alert Distance - distance from approaching
headland at which display will warn user of
upcoming headland
Alarm Distance
Alarm Duration
150
Alert Duration - time length from approaching
headland at which display will warn user of
upcoming headland
10 s
Audible Alarms
Approaching Headland
Audible Alarms
Crossing Headland Boundary
• Approaching Headland
• Crossing Headland Boundary
0.67 ac
Map Screen with Headlands
traigh
4.5 mph
Pass: 2 R
Corn1
Headland: 113 ft
Reset
Corn2
Nudge: 30.0 in
Total: 0.0 in
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
59
www.4qte.com
Topography
The display allows you to record points that can be used to make a reference layer
that is relative to the elevation throughout the field. This requires that you have an
RTK GPS signal to collect the accurate elevation data.
You can also import data from mapping software such as SMS Advanced via
.agsetup files.
Field
Boundary
Headlands
Topography
Pressing the Topography button takes you to the Topography screen which allows
user to setup Topography functionality.
Setup Map Screen
Topography screen
New Survey button - press to create a new elevation
survey
Topography
Elevation Surveys
Tue Sep 2 08:00:00 2013
West 160_20130820
Add to Selected button - press to add to an
elevation survey
Minus (-) button - press to delete a topographical
survey
Enable checkbox - press to turn elevation reference
layer on/off (Enable checkbox functions the same as
Topography checkbox in Map Options screen shown below.)
New
Survey
Add to
Selected
Enable
Set Active
Set Active - select the desired survey from list and
use button to set as active.
You are allowed to have multiple elevation surveys for the same field. This can be useful for different
applications. For example, if you have a survey that is for the entire field this will give you a greater
perspective of the whole field, in addition, you could also drive a very dedicated portion of the field that
would allow you to have greater elevation detail in certain areas if you needed it. By default the naming
that is generated in the display will be Date/Time based. You can export surface elevation data from
software packages like SMS Advanced into the display, and those will be tagged with the field name and
the date exported (both examples are in the above screen shot. You can also add points to existing
elevations surveys and save them. Only one elevation survey can be active at a time, when exported as
an.agsetup, or.agdata file, this will be the survey that is exported. Non-active surveys will stay in the
display. At any time you can remove an elevation survey, and collect a new one.
60
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
SETUP
FIELD OPERATIONS
This topography layer can be turned on/off as a
reference layer during any operation using Enable
checkbox on Topography screen (shown above) or
using the Topography checkbox on the Map Options
screen (see “Map Legend tab” on page 51).
Map Options
Data
Guidance
Boundary
Marker
Reference
Rx
Tile
Grid
Topography
This can provide you with valuable information in
regards to the highs and lows of a field when you
may not be able to visually tell with the naked eye.
Surveying and Tiling operations will probably benefit
the most with respect of where to place the mains
and laterals in a field.
Clear Map
Load
Reference
0.67 ac
If you have RTK GPS reception, you are
allowed to collect an elevation survey.
This will allow you to collect the Lat/Long
and elevation values as you traverse the
field. A point will be dropped every 3
meters as you drive regardless of speed,
or direction. If you are collecting during
operations like planting or application
using autoswath, it will also log points
outside the boundary of the field (i.e.
through a grassed waterway) to get the
most information throughout the field.
4.5 mph
Field
Boundary
Headlands
It is critical that the GPS Antenna to
ground measurement is correct in your
configuration, any error in this
measurement, will add to the error in the
data logged.
The following are suggestions to get the best possible elevation survey for a given field. Following
these recommendations will provide the best results for your field.
• Keep swaths in the field to 60ft (19 M) or less, the closer the better
• Driving a dedicated route at the lowest or highest points in a field (i.e. lengthwise of a grassed waterway,
or at the top of a ridge) then traversing the field in regular swaths will provide the best detail of the field
• If surveying with the tile plow antenna, ensure that the plow is in the fully raised position
• Driving too fast with mounted plows, can cause bouncing and affect quality
• Surveying with harvesting equipment can provide streaked maps as the hopper filling and unloading can
affect the height of the vehicle, and therefore antenna
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
61
www.4qte.com
4.5 mph
0.67 ac
After these points have been collected,
they will be converted into a surface layer
in which you can define the color scheme
Red, White, Blue, or Brown-Tan. See
“Map Legend tab” on page 51. In the Red,
white, blue scheme, the darker blue hues
will represent the lower elevation, and the
darker red values will represent the
higher elevations, white will be a
transition color between. In the BrownTan scheme, the Dark brown will
represent the lower elevations, and the
Tan the higher elevations. You can select
the number of legend ranges for your
field that will show the areas desired.
This theme will be used for each field
until changed.
No Product
Topography
816 - 819
814 - 816
811 - 814
808 - 814
806 - 808
0 - 806
During collection of an elevation survey, points will be logged to the file every 3 meters. An onscreen
visual will appear in the form of a single black dot every 30 meters.
If at any point during collection your gps correction
status changes out of RTK fixed, logging will be
suspended, if you re-acquire the RTK signal, logging
will automatically resume.
At any point you can pause
the following items are outside the recommended accuracy
GPS Quality Warning
Low Fix Quality
or stop
collection of the elevation survey, and then resume
as needed.
If you forget to stop logging as you leave the field,
you will be prompted with the message that data
collection is still active, and be given the option to
continue logging, or end operation.
62
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
SETUP
In Odd-shaped fields, the surface
rendering of the elevation will connect
areas (A) even if you haven’t driven
through that area.
FIELD OPERATIONS
0.67 ac
4.5 mph
No Product
Topography
816 - 819
814 - 816
811 - 814
808 - 814
806 - 808
0 - 806
VIDEO
• Video button
Press and the Video screen appears.
• Brightness
Press
/
to increase or
decrease the brightness of the video
input.
• Contrast
Press
/
to increase or
decrease the contrast of the video input.
• Camera Number Selection
The display can receive input from up to
four video cameras. Press the
numbered buttons to switch views
between video cameras.
Note: You can adjust the brightness and contrast of each input individually.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
63
www.4qte.com
64
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
SETUP
EXTERNAL DRIVE
SETUP
EXTERNAL DRIVE
EXTERNAL STORAGE OPERATIONS
The External Storage Operations button is where you can copy your field data; upgrade
display firmware; as well as import, export and manage files.
UPGRADE FIRMWARE
Upgrade
Firmware
-
AL_package-3.0.37.0.fw2
84.8
Press: Home button > External Storage button > Upgrade Firmware button > specific .fw2 file on USB
drive > Check button
Pressing the Upgrade Firmware button allows you to upgrade the display firmware from the .fw2 file
stored on the USB drive. At the File Selection screen, scroll through the list of files on the USB drive until
you find the .fw2 firmware file. Highlight the .fw2 file and the box at the upper right-hand side of the File
Selection screen shows the version of this file. Press
to continue, and the Upgrade screen
informs you that the upgrade is beginning. At the Upgrade Ready screen, press
.
CAUTION: Do not disconnect display power when the upgrade is taking place.
IMPORT FILES
Import
Setup
Press: Home button > External Storage button > Import Setup
The File Selection screen opens. Use the scroll bar to find the file you wish to import. File formats that
you can import:
.AGSETUP
Use to transfer setup information from display to display or from SMS and display
• Replaces MSF, IBY, PAT, IRX, REF
• Allows full synchronization of the following file items:
- Management Data (Growers, Farms, Fields, Seasons, Operators)
- Products and Product Mixes
- Boundaries
- Guidance Patterns
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
65
www.4qte.com
• Marker Sets and Markers
Note: Do not use the IBK to “clone” a display. Use AGSETUP.
.AGDATA
• Includes all the necessary data to fully archive in SMS
• Includes recorded operation data
• Equipment Used
• Products Used
• Marks Logged
• Boundaries
• Guidance Patterns
• Flexible export options
• Will be able to export by Grower
EXPORT FILES
.AGSETUP
Export
Setup
Press: Home button > External Storage button > Export Setup
Use to transfer setup information from display to display or from SMS and display
• Replaces MSF, IBY, PAT, IRX, REF
• Allows full synchronization of the following items:
• Management Data (Growers, Farms, Fields, Seasons, Operators)
• Products and Product Mixes
• Boundaries
• Guidance Patterns
• Marker Sets and Markers
Note: Do not use the IBK to “clone” a display anymore. Use AGSETUP.
.AGDATA
Export
Data
Press: Home button > External Storage button > Export Data
• Includes all the necessary data to fully archive in SMS
• Includes recorded operation data
66
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
SETUP
EXTERNAL DRIVE
• Equipment Used
• Products Used
• Marks Logged
• Boundaries
• Guidance Patterns
• Flexible export options
• Will be able to export by Grower
Export Reports
Export
Reports
Press: Home button > External Storage button > Exports Reports
• Exports Reports saved on internal memory. See “Smart Report™” on page 66 for more information.
MANAGE FILES
View USB
Contents
Press: Home button > External Storage button > View USB Contents
Use the scroll bar to view a list of all files and folders. A bar at the bottom of the window shows how
much memory is available on the USB drive.
To delete files, highlight specific file and press
Delete
. The Memory Management screen warns that the
selected files will be permanently deleted. Press
to permanently delete file.
ADVANCED OPTIONS
Advanced
Options
Press: Home button > External Storage button > Advanced Options
Create
Backup
Restore
Backup
Creates Backup on USB Device
Restores data from backup file on USB Device
Export by Grower
Select to Export Log Files by Grower
Export by Event
Select to Export Log Files by Event
Export data files
on shutdown
Select to data files on shutdown
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
67
www.4qte.com
Export All
Log Files
68
Press to Export All Log files
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
SETUP
DEVICES
SETUP
DEVICES
DEVICE INFORMATION
Pressing on the Device Information button, located in the upper right corner of the display,
opens the Devices screens. Technical support may request that you look at these screens
for help in diagnosing a problem.
DEVICES
Devices
The Devices screen displays the modules that are
connected to the CAN A and CAN B bus (CAN B is
for ISOBUS). Select a device to display its particular
firmware and hardware information.
CAN A
CAN B
Firmware:
Firmware ID:
Hardware ID:
Serial Number:
Revision:
Run Time:
Boot Counter:
DISPLAY
232 DC LIQUID
233 AUX DEVICE
Device Information includes Firmware Version,
Firmware ID, Hardware ID, Serial Number,
Revision, Run Time shown in
hours:minutes:seconds and Display Boot Counter.
1.0.34/1.0.28
VERSA
4001683
2009120003
2.0.0.0
112:27:23
476
Diagnostics
Note: Check the CAN device list to ensure that all hardware modules appear there.
DISPLAY DIAGNOSTICS
Press Display on the CAN Device list, then press the
Diagnostics button on the Devices screen to open
the Display Diagnostics screen. This screen includes
information about the system memory usage and
available memory.
Display Diagnostics
RAM
Buffers: 26.1 MB
Cached: 53.3 MB
Internal Storage
Note: For information on Auxiliary Input Settings Diagnostics, see “Auxiliary Input” on page 74.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
69
www.4qte.com
70
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
SETUP
SETTINGS
SETUP
SETTINGS
EQUIPMENT SETTINGS
Press the Configuration Settings button on the Configuration Setup screen to
Equipment
Settings
view or edit the name of your Equipment Configuration Settings. The appearance
of this button will vary, depending upon whether you are using a Area Logging
operating configuration (with or without an implement switch); or whether you are using Rate
Logging/Control for a DirectCommand or SeedCommand operating configuration. Area Logging settings
are explained below. If you have an operating configuration with Rate Control, see “Equipment
Configuration Settings for Rate Control” on page 72.
Implement Switch Settings (for Area Logging)
If you are using an Area Logging (Site Verification)
operating configuration (meaning that the
configuration does not use Rate Logging or Rate
Control) then you must specify an Implement Switch
Setting. At the Configuration Setup screen, press the
Configuration Settings button.
Equipment Configuration Settings
Implement Switch Polarity
Standard
The Equipment Configuration Settings screen appears.
If you will be using an implement switch choose Standard or Reversed polarity.
If an implement switch is not in use, select None.
Press
to return to the Configuration Setup screen.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
71
www.4qte.com
Equipment Configuration Settings for Rate Control
If you are using an operating configuration with Rate
Control, (such as for certain DirectCommand and
SeedCommand configurations) you must specify
Equipment Configuration Settings. At the
Configuration Setup screen, press the Configuration
Settings button. The Equipment Configuration
Settings screen appears.
Equipment Configuration Settings
Rate Outside of Field
Rate Change
Look-Ahead
Zero
0 sec
Rate Display
Smoothing
These settings are directly related to that specific combination of Vehicle, Implement, and Controller.
• The configuration name can be changed by pressing
.
• The Rate Outside of Field selection determines product control channel behavior when the field
boundary is exited.
- Zero Product - Product application will turn off.
- Last Good - Product application will continue at the last value used by the control system.
- Rx Default - Product will be applied at the default rate setting.
• Rate Display Smoothing setting
Determines how the feedback from the control channel rate sensor will be displayed on the map screen.
When de-selected, the system will display raw feedback from the rate sensor. When checked, the system
will display target rate when the application rate is within 10% of the target rate setting.
• Rate Change Look-Ahead setting
Setting compensates for any latency in the control system and is designed to provide control valve
additional time to fully adjust and achieve new rate when transitioning between flow rates during variable
rate application. Typical setting rate is 0-1 second.
SPEED INPUT SETTINGS
Configuration
Your Specific
Configuration
Speed
Input
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > Configuration (tractor) button > Configuration tab > your
specific configuration > Setup (wrench) button > Speed Input button
72
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
SETUP
SETTINGS
The Speed Input Settings screen is where you can
calibrate the ground speed input for accurate speed
and area calculations.
Speed Input
Primary Source
Display GPS
Backup Source
Auxiliary Device
Auxiliary Device Channel
Radar
Auxiliary Channel Calibration
2000
Calibrate
Distance
Pulses/ 100 ft
In most cases GPS is the primary speed source with Radar serving as backup. If you will be using GPS
as the primary you will need to select a Backup source.
Choices for Primary Source include:
• GPS
• Wheels
• Radar
• Manual
• Other Possible Options:
- Hardi ISO (on Hardi equipment)
- Claas (on Claas Cebis)
Choices for Backup Source include:
• Wheels
• Radar
• Filtered - This setting is used only as a backup speed source for low pulse ground speed sensors. In times
when primary speed source is lost, this setting allows you to calibrate and operate with a speed sensor
that has a pulse output below the standard threshold of 305 pulses/100ft (imperial) or 10 pulses/meter
(metric). Using the “filtered” selection will allow calibration values down to 15 pulses/100ft (imperial) or
0.5 pulses/meter (metric). When the calibration values fall in this lower range, the speed sensor input will
be filtered to achieve a more accurate rate control.
Other Notes:
• If you are using a backup radar speed source it is recommended that you calibrate it before the season
begins.
• It is recommended to Calibrate Distance in the event of GPS loss. For more information, see “Calibrate
Distance” on page 73.
CALIBRATE DISTANCE
If you are not using GPS for ground speed, then after you have created a configuration you must
calibrate the ground speed input for accurate speed and area calculations. If you are using GPS, it is
recommended to calibrate distance in the event of GPS loss. Use the following procedure to calibrate
distance:
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
73
www.4qte.com
Configuration
Speed
Input
Your Specific
Configuration
Calibrate Speed Sensor
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > Configuration (tractor) button > Configuration tab > your
specific configuration > Setup (wrench) button > Speed Input button > Calibrate Speed Sensor
Follow instructions on screen to calibrate sensor.
Note: Calibration settings can be manually adjusted if desired by pressing Enter CAL Number and making
small changes to the setting.
AUXILIARY INPUT
Configuration
Your Specific
Configuration
Auxiliary
Input
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > Configuration (tractor) button > Configuration tab > your
specific configuration > Setup (wrench) button > Auxiliary Input button
This Switch Mapping function is active only for
DirectCommand or SeedCommand. The Auxiliary
Input Settings screen displays settings for the Master
Switch and other switches on a DirectCommand or
SeedCommand Switch Box.
Auxiliary Input Settings can be adjusted by going to
the Auxiliary Input Summary screen. Go to the
Configuration Setup screen and press the Auxiliary
Input button. The Auxiliary Input Summary screen
appears. This screen lists each switch on a switch
box and which functions (if any) are assigned to
particular switches.
Auxiliary Input
DirectLiquid
F1 (Master)
F2 (Switch 1)
F3 (Switch 2)
F4 (Switch 3)
F5 (Switch 4)
F6 (Switch 5)
F7 (Switch 6)
F8 (Switch 7)
F9 (Switch 8)
F10 (Switch 9)
F11 (Switch 10)
External 1
External 2
External 3
External 4
Assign
1
2
3
Master Source
Switch
Reset
All
The Assign button, located at the upper right-hand corner of this screen, opens the Auxiliary Input
Assignment screen, where you can assign functions to switches and external inputs. For more
information, see “Auxiliary Input Settings” on page 75.
The Master Switch Source drop-down menu controls the master switch for your entire configuration. You
may see the following options underneath this menu:
• Switch - Controls the master switch.
• External 2 - This setting can control an optional, floor-mounted master switch.
• External 1, 3 & 4 - Not used at this time.
The F1-F11 switches can be assigned to any implement sections. You can use these to choose the
switches that control a particular section or controller planting clutch. You can also make the following
changes to the switch settings.
• Add a switch setting. For more information, see “Auxiliary Input Settings” on page 75.
74
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
SETUP
SETTINGS
• Reset All. This button resets the settings to defaults.
AUXILIARY INPUT SETTINGS
Your Specific
Configuration
Configuration
Auxiliary
Input
Assign
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > Configuration (tractor) button > Configuration tab > your
specific configuration > Setup (wrench) button > Auxiliary Input button > Assign button
This screen shows all the switches and external inputs.
Unassigned switches and external inputs are shown
with a yellow “X”.
Auxiliary Input
Master
Change a switch’s function by selecting a switch from
the top row and a function from the bottom menu.
SeedCommand
AUXILIARY INPUT: HELP
If you need help adjusting the Auxiliary Input settings, then press the question mark key. The
Auxiliary Assignment Help screen appears, which provides definitions for each of the icons.
Note: DirectCommand can control fence row nozzles through a DirectCommand switch box by mapping the
switches in Auxiliary Input Settings. The fence row nozzles can be mapped to any switch.
AUXILIARY INPUT DIAGNOSTICS
AUX DEVICE
Diagnostics
Press: Display Information button > AUX DEVICE button > Diagnostics button
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
75
www.4qte.com
The Auxiliary Input Diagnostics screen lists the active
switches. These color-coded boxes display the
following diagnostics:
Auxiliary Input Diagnostic
• Green
The switch box is connected to the Auxiliary Module
in the On position.
• Black
The switch box is connected to the Auxiliary Module,
but is in the Off position.
Ground Speed Pulses 0
• Grey
The switch box is not connected to the Auxiliary Module.
Below the list of switches is the number of Ground Speed Pulses coming in from the radar to the
Auxiliary Module.
Technical support may request that you look at this screen for help in diagnosing a problem.
Note: The E2 position is the indicator for the foot box.
AUTOSWATH
Select Your Specific
Configuration
Configuration
Automatic
Swath Control
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > Configuration (tractor) button > Configuration tab > select
your specific configuration > Setup (wrench) button > Automatic Swath Control button
The Automatic Swath Control feature turns sections
off and on automatically based upon the following
conditions:
• Entering and exiting internal and outer field
boundaries.
Automatic Swath Control
Planting
Outside Boundary Option
Coverage Option
Look-Ahead
Settings
Keep Unchanged
Minimize Skip
Turn Section Off
Minimize Overlap
• Entering and exiting previously-applied areas
within a field.
User Defined
100 %
• Outside Boundary Option
Select one of the two options to determine system behavior when a section exits a field boundary.
• Coverage Option
In the Coverage Option area, you must choose between three options:
76
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
SETUP
Look-Ahead Settings
AutoSwath Control settings are saved per controller per configuration. The Look-Ahead
Settings screen will contain every controller’s look-aheads.
On the AutoSwath Control screen, press the Look-Ahead button.
• Turn-On
This setting determines how far ahead the system
looks to turn the sections back on. This setting
compensates for delay in the planting control
system when the implement sections are turned on.
Look Ahead Settings
Planting
Row Shutoff
Turn-On
1.1 s
Turn-Off
0.4 s
• Turn-Off
This setting determines how far ahead the system
looks to turn the sections off. This setting
compensates for delay in the product control system
when the sections are turned off.
Note: To use AutoSwath for planting operations, you are required to use a 5 Hz or higher GPS output rate.
AutoSwath control will not allow sections to be turned on until the master and planting section switches are
on. If you have less than a 5 Hz GPS output rate and you select AutoSwath, a warning appears, telling you
that AutoSwath Control is not available at less than 5 Hz.
Note: If you are performing a Harvest operation, see “AutoSwath Sensitivity Settings” on page 281.
VEHICLE OFFSETS
Configuration
Your Specific
Configuration
Vehicle Offsets
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > Configuration (tractor) button > Configuration tab > your
specific configuration > Setup (wrench) button > Vehicle Offsets button
After completing the process of setting up a Vehicle, you must configure vehicle offsets. The these
offsets define where the machine’s rear axle and hitch is in relation to the GPS antenna. These settings
are used by mapping.
The GPS Offsets settings consist of two tabs: the Antenna Tab and the Hitch Tab.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
77
SETTINGS
- The Minimize Skip option turns off the implement section after the entire section is fully inside your
coverage area. This prevents the possibility of skips.
- The Minimize Overlap option turns off the implement section when that section first enters your
coverage area. This prevents the possibility of overlaps.
- The User Defined option allows you to choose what percentage of the implement section is within the
coverage area before that section turns off. For example, if you choose 50%, then the section will
switch off when half of it is within your coverage area.
www.4qte.com
ANTENNA OFFSETS TAB
At the Antenna Tab, enter the distance from locations on the vehicle to the antenna.
• Measure and enter the horizontal distance from the rear axle to the position of the GPS antenna. Select
IN FRONT or BEHIND to indicate the position of the antenna in relation to the rear axle.
• Measure and enter the horizontal distance from the centerline of the vehicle to the position of the GPS
antenna. Select LEFT or RIGHT to indicate the position from the vehicle centerline.
• Measure and enter the vertical height of the antenna above the ground.
Note: Accuracy when measuring for a specific setting is essential to ensure proper machine performance.
HITCH TAB SETTINGS TAB
The Hitch Tab allows you to enter in the distance from four different mounting positions on the tractor to
the rear axle. Press
to enter these values in if using the hitch point.
Note: Accuracy when measuring for a specific setting is essential to ensure proper machine performance.
MOUNT TAB SETTINGS (FOR SOME APPLICATION VEHICLES)
The Mount Tab will only be available when using a self-propelled application sprayer or spreader. This
allows you to enter in the application location from the rear axle. Press
and the drop-down box to select if it is in front or behind of the axle.
to enter in the distance
HEAD TAB (FOR HARVEST VEHICLES)
The Head Tab allows you to enter in the distance from the head attachment point to the rear axle. Press
to enter the distance to the axle.
SWATH SECTION OFFSETS
Configuration
Select Your Specific
Configuration
Offsets
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > Configuration (tractor) button > Configuration tab > select
your specific configuration > Setup (wrench) button > Offsets button
The Implement Offsets screen opens. Depending upon your configuration, this screen may consist of up
to two tabs: the Section Offsets Tab and the Hitch Offsets Tab.
78
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
SETUP
SETTINGS
Section Offsets
Offsets
• Press the first
to enter the distance that
the swath section is located from the hitch point.
Planting with SeedCommand 2
Enter Forward or Backward Distance from Hitch Point
5 ft
• Press the second
to enter the distance
from the mid-point of the swath section to the
machine’s centerline. Select to the left/to the right
to indicate the direction the swath section is
located from the vehicle centerline.
• Press
when finished.
Enter Left or Right Distance from Centerline
0 ft
Left
Advanced
Note: Accuracy when measuring and entering implement offsets is required to ensure proper machine
performance.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
79
www.4qte.com
80
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
SETUP
VIRTUAL TERMINAL
The display is compatible with the ISO 11783 (ISOBUS) Virtual Terminal Standard. This enables support
of many ISOBUS compliant implements on the display. Virtual Terminal functionality enables the
compliant implement’s user interface to be viewed and controlled on the display.
COMMON TERMINOLOGY
• ISOBUS Working Set
One or more ISOBUS modules that control an implement’s functionality
• Working Set Master (WSM)
Main module responsible for coordinating all communication between the VT and the Working Set including
loading of the Object Pool to the VT screen
• Object Pool
The graphic image presented to the user on the VT display. The Object Pool is sent to the VT by the
ISOBUS module.
WARNING: Before operating an ISOBUS implement with the display, read the operator’s manual provided
by the implement’s manufacturer and follow all safety information provided in the manual. When this display
is used with an ISOBUS implement, the information and functions on the display are provided by the
implement ECU and are the responsibility of the implement manufacturer.
CAUTION: OnTrac2 and Virtual Terminal each utilize CAN B for communication. These systems can not be
used at the same time. Verify which hardware has been installed.
CAUTION: OnTrac2+ communicates on CAN A, independent of Virtual Terminal communication on CAN B.
These systems can be used at the same time. Verify which hardware has been installed.
To enable the Virtual Terminal:
ISOBUS Settings
Enable Virtual Terminal
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > Display button > ISOBUS Settings > Enable Virtual
Terminal checkbox
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
81
VIRTUAL TERMINAL
SETUP
www.4qte.com
ISOBUS Settings
Virtual Terminal
Once a Virtual Terminal has been enabled
will appear in the task bar. Toggle between the
Virtual Terminal run screen and other display
functions by pressing the VT button.
• Broadcast Display Speed (ISO GBSD)
Checking this box allows speed source currently
being utilized by the display to be broadcast over the
ISOBUS to the implement ECU.
Task Controller
Enable Virtual Terminal
Enable Task Controller
Broadcast Display Speed
(ISO GBSD)
Function Instance
0
Broadcast GPS (J1939)
Auxiliary Module Support
Use 480 Mask Size
Function Instance
0
• Broadcast GPS (J1939)
Checking this box allows GPS data being supplied
by the GPS receiver to be broadcast over the ISOBUS to the implement ECU.
• Auxiliary Module Support
Checking this box allows the Ag Leader Auxiliary Input Module or Smart Switchbox, to be used with
ISOBUS ECUs that support AUX-N auxiliary functions.
• Use 480 Mask Size
Checking this box sets the display mask size from 600 pixels to 480 pixels. Some ISOBUS ECUs have
problems scaling their Object Pools to the 600 pixel mask. The 480 pixel size is more common and should
reduce or eliminate scaling issues such as overlapping text, or missing display items.
• Virtual Terminal Functional Instance
Always set to 0 except when there are multiple VTs on the ISO Bus. Use
Reboot Display
to change instance.
• Task Controller Function Instance
Always set to 0 except when there are multiple TCs on the ISO Bus. Use
Reboot Display
to change instance.
When an ISOBUS compliant implement
is connected to the display for the first
time, the implement WSM sends its
graphic interface, called the Object Pool,
to the display. Status bar (A) appears
while Object Pools are being loaded. This
process might take several minutes
depending on the number of Object Pools
being loaded. Once loaded, object pools
are stored in the display memory.
82
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
SETUP
VIRTUAL TERMINAL
If there are multiple ISO implements
connected, press the VT button
0.0
0.0
lbs/ac
lbs/ac
to toggle between Working Sets.
The Working Sets can also be accessed
by pressing tabs (A) or (B) individually.
74.0
50.0
Rate
0.0
ac/hr
98.5
ac
1
0
rev/min
Command received. Front Meter
Clutch OFF!
Advance through multiple screens of buttons. This button remains hidden unless more
than 10 buttons are present.
Opens the Virtual Terminal Settings screen.
Auxiliary
Virtual Terminal Settings
Assign implement functions to ISO compatible
inputs.
Clear Virtual Terminal
Allows operator to clear the Object Pools sent to the
display from the implement WSM. After the object
pools have been cleared, the next time the
implement is connected the object pools will be
transferred from the implements WSM to the display
again. When this button is pressed, a warning
dialogue box appears with the following message:
Auxiliary
Assignment
Clear
Virtual Terminal
“All virtual terminal interfaces saved in the display
will be cleared. Do you want to continue?”
AUXILIARY ASSIGNMENT
Auxiliary
Assignment
Press: Virtual Terminal (VT) button > Setup (wrench) button > Auxiliary Assignments button
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
83
www.4qte.com
Assign implement functions to ISO compatible
inputs.
Auxiliary Mappings
Function
Input
The number of functions and inputs shown on the
Auxiliary Mappings screens will vary depending on
the implement and input devices connected to the
display.
VT ALARMS AND TROUBLE CODES
Virtual Terminal Alarm
If the display receives an active trouble code, the
Virtual Terminal Alarm (A) will appear in the
Status bar at the top of the screen.
When an alarm is activated on the VT, the display
will indicate the alarm by flashing “Virtual Terminal
Alarm” in the status bar.
Low fan speed detected
Alarms are acknowledged and cleared by pressing
Disable Main
Drive Shutoff
.
This button is only present when a virtual terminal
alarm has been activated.
The Devices screen displays the following
information:
• (A) Caution icon indicates module has active
trouble codes (DTCs)
• (B) Device Class
• (C) ECU Serial Number
• (D) VT Manufacturer, name and code
Devices
CAN A
CAN B
129 ISOBUS Liquid Product Module
Generic ISOBUS
198 WSM 7-Section Aux Input
A00C80000C202719
CAN Name:
Yes
Self Configurable:
Agriculture and
Industry Group:
Forestry
Device Class:
Sprayer
Class Instance:
0
128
Function:
Function Instance: 0
ECU Instance
0
Identity Number:
10009
Manufacturer Code: 97
Ag Leader
Technology, Inc
Device Name: AGL Sprayer
Boom
Volume (Crop Protection)
Diagnostics
84
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
SETUP
• SPN
“Suspect Parameter Number” = Error Number
• FMI
“Fault Mode Indicator” = Error State.
ISO Node Diagnostics
ECU ID:
Software ID:
FMA_R 0.9 2006-05-23
Previously Active Errors:
Active Errors:
SPN
OC
FMI
SPN
OC
FMI
522102
12
1
522102
12
1
523666
3
2
523666
3
2
• OC
“Occurrence Count”
• DTC
Diagnostic Trouble Code
Clear Previously
Active Errors
This is a combination of the SPN and the FMI (for
example 522102.12).
Cross-reference DTC in equipment manufacturer’s operator manual for description of error.
TASK CONTROLLER
With the addition of Task Controller, a code component within the VT, the system can provide support
for functions such as data logging and variable rate application, if the ECU supports TC.
CONFIGURATION SETUP
Application
Configuration
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > Configuration (tractor) button > Configuration tab > Plus
(+) button > Application button.
Configuration setup is the same as Liquid Rate Control and Granular Rate Control (“Create Configuration”
on page 181) until Select Controller step. Select ISOBUS controller as follows:
Select ISOBUS as the device
Controller Setup Wizard: Device
Select Controller or Flow Meter
Device
ISOBUS
DirectCommand
Serial Controller
Flow Meter
ISOBUS
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
85
VIRTUAL TERMINAL
Pressing the Diagnostics button on the Devices
screen brings up the ISO Node Diagnostics screen
which shows the following information.
www.4qte.com
Select the controller make and model
Controller Setup Wizard: Make and Model
Select Controller Make and Model
Select Generic if implement is not included in list.
Make
The rest of the steps will follow the Liquid Rate
Controller or Granular Configuration.
Ag Leader
Ag Leader
Hardi
Horsch
John Deere
Kuhn-Rauch
Kverneland
Mueller
Generic
ISOBUS SETTINGS
To enable TC:
ISOBUS Settings
General
Enable Task Controller
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > Display button > General tab > ISOBUS Settings button
> Enable Task Controller
Function Instance
• Defines which display the implement ECU goes to
• 0 defines 1st display
ISOBUS Settings
Virtual Terminal
Task Controller
Enable Virtual Terminal
Enable Task Controller
Broadcast Display Speed
(ISO GBSD)
Function Instance
0
Broadcast GPS (J1939)
Auxiliary Module Support
Use 480 Mask Size
Function Instance
86
0
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
SETUP
AGFINITI
SETUP
AGFINITI
CONNECTING TO WI-FI NETWORK
Insert USB Wi-Fi Adapter to USB port of the display.
To connect to a Wi-Fi network:
Networking
Press: Home button > AgFiniti button > Networking button
Select network you wish to use. Secured networks are
indicated by a lock on the signal strength icon and require a
password.
Status:
Signal Strength:
Security:
Wireless Networking
Network Name (SSID)
Verizon Tablet
Status
Connected
David’s iPad
Secured with WPA/WPA2
iPhone
Not Secured
AT&T Mobile HOTSPOT
Secured with WEP
Office
Not Secured
Connected
Excellent
WPA/WPS2
Password
Press Connect to connect to a network.
Connect
Forget
If you no longer want to be connected to a network you can press Forget, which will disconnect
the network.
No networks in range. User will not be able to connect to a Wi-Fi network when this icon is shown.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
87
www.4qte.com
One or more networks are in range but display is not configured to connect to a network.
Connected to network. Green bars represent network connection strength: the more green bars, the
stronger the network strength. Note: This does not represent cell strength.
CONNECTING TO AGFINITI
In order to connect the display to AgFiniti you must first have an AgFiniti account and active license. If you don’t
have an AgFiniti account go to www.AgFiniti.com to create one or use your SMS login credentials. To obtain a
license please contact your dealer. First-time AgFiniti users must accept terms of use on www.AgFiniti.com.
To login:
Login
Press: Home button > AgFiniti button > Login button
Your username/password to log into www.AgFiniti.com is the same username/password used on the display.
Not connected to a network: Please connect to a Wi-Fi network
Not logged in to AgFiniti or don’t have a connection to AgFiniti: Login or improve your internet
connection. Often caused by poor cellular
data coverage areas.
Have a connection to AgFiniti and ready to perform AgFiniti functions.
Advanced
Options
Press: Home button > AgFiniti button > Advanced Options button
Connection Management
Logout: This will logout the current user of the display so a
different user within the same account can login.
AgFiniti Advanced Options
Log Files
Remote Support
Export by Grower
Export by Event
Deregister Display: This will remove the AgFiniti licenses
associated with this display so the licenses can become
available for other displays within the AgFiniti account. This
also allows the ability for a different AgFiniti account to be
linked to this display.
Always Allow
Preauthorize Session
Connection Management
Logout
Deregister Display
Export data files
on shutdown
Export All
Log Files
Once a display has been registered to an AgFiniti account it
is linked to that account until the display is de-registered.
This de-registration process can be done from the display or
from www.AgFiniti.com. Clearing memory on the display will also allow a display to move between
accounts.
88
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
SETUP
AGFINITI
FILE TRANSFER
File Transfer requires a File Transfer license (one per display). AgFiniti is compatible with Ag
Leader Integra and Versa displays.
IMPORTING AND EXPORTING FILES
Press: Home button > AgFiniti button
AgFiniti Options
criemersma
Display Registration Expires 12/09/2020
I
Import
Import an AgSetup file with
setup data from AgFiniti.
Export
Export an AgSetup file with
setup data to AgFiniti.
View
Files
Export
Export an AgData file with
logged data to AgFiniti.
Advanced
Options
Export
Export automatically
stored reports to AgFiniti.
AGL-Public
I
m
p
o
r
t
a
n
AgSetup file with setup data from AgFiniti. See “.AGSETUP” on page 293 for information on AgSetup files.
Export
Export an AgSetup file with setup data to AgFiniti
Export
Exports logged data in the display since the last time log files were exported to AgFiniti
via a AgData file. See “.AGDATA” on page 293 for information on AgData files.
•
Export
Exports Reports saved on internal memory to AgFiniti. See “Smart Report Auto-
Generation” on page 67 for more information.
VIEWING FILES
View
Files
Press: Home button > AgFiniti button > View Files button
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
89
www.4qte.com
AgFiniti tab shows AgSetup and AgData files that
are present in the AgFiniti account.
File Selection
AgFiniti
Downloaded
Changed
01/03
Description
Name
2014-Prescription.agsetup
Variable Rate
From the AgFiniti tab, select file and
press Download button to download file.
Pressing on the column titles will sort the files by the
column selected in ascending or descending order.
By default the files are sorted by date/time.
The Downloaded tab shows AgSetup files that are
stored on the internal memory of the display. These
files can be accessed when there isn’t an internet
connection, but Wi-Fi adapter must be inserted.
Uploaded: 01/03/2014 1:15 PM
Modified: 01/03/2014 1:16 PM
Description: Variable Rate
File Size: 7 KB
File Selection
AgFiniti
Downloaded
Name
Size
2014-Prescription.agsetup
Date Modified
7 KB 1/3/14 1:11 PM
Note: These buttons delete files from internal
memory NOT from AgFiniti.
Select file and press Delete button to delete file from
internal memory.
Press Delete All button to delete all files from internal
memory.
Delete
2%
Delete All
EXPORT SETTINGS
Advanced
Options
Press: Home button > AgFiniti button > Advanced Options button
AgFiniti Advanced Options
Log Files
Remote Support
Export by Grower
Export by Event
Always Allow
Preauthorize Session
Connection Management
Logout
Deregister Display
Export data files
on shutdown
Export All
Log Files
90
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
SETUP
Export by Grower
Exports AgData files by grower
Export by Event
Exports AgData files by event
Exports AgData files each time display is shut down if logged into AgFiniti account
Export data files
on shutdown
Exports all logged data in display to AgFiniti via an AgData file
Export All
Log Files
IMPORTING A PRESCRIPTION
C1222
sds/ac
C1224
Rate Control Settings
1
sds/ac
32000
Rate Control
2
34000
Rate 1
32000
C1492
Rate 1
sds/ac
36000
Flow:
2400
34000
Rate 2
38000
Increment
500
Increment
500
Minimum Flow
Rx
0 sds/min
Minimum Flow
Rx
0 sds/min
min
Rate 1
400000
40 ft 0 in
Rate 2
Rate 2
42000
Increment
500
Minimum Flow
Rx
0 sds/min
100%
Import Prescriptions: Select File
AgFiniti
Downloaded
Changed
01/03
Name
2014-Prescription.agsetup
2014-Prescription.agsetup
Description: Variable Rate
File Size: 7 KB
Description
Variable Rate
7 KB 1/3/14 1:11 PM
Uploaded: 01/03/2014 1:16 PM
Modified: 01/03/2014 1:16 PM
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
91
AGFINITI
Log Files
www.4qte.com
IMPORTING A VARIETY REFERENCE MAP (HARVEST ONLY)
from Options screen in the Event Wizard
Press the “Select Event” button and
follow the steps in the wizard until
screen with Import Variety Map
button.
Select Event
Import Reference: Select AgSetup File
Options
Region
AgFiniti
Downloaded
Name
Changed
01/03
2014-Prescription.agsetup
Description
Spring Planting Maps
Variety Tracking
Automatic Variety Tracking
Automatic Region Changing
C1224
Import
Variety Map
Description: Spring Planting Maps
File Size: 7 KB
Uploaded: 01/03/2014 1:16 PM
Modified: 01/03/2014 1:16 PM
REMOTE SUPPORT
Remote Support requires a Remote Support license (one per account). AgFiniti is compatible with Ag
Leader Integra and Versa displays.
Remote viewer has no control over the display.
Remote viewer can only view the display and not
press buttons.
Green border will always appear around the screen when the display is being viewed remotely.
Remote Support Preauthorization
Advanced
Options
Preauthorize Session
Press: Home button > AgFiniti button > Advanced Options button > Preauthorize Session
Pressing the “Preauthorize Session” button will generate a 10 digit
code that can be verbally communicated to remote viewer to initiate
the viewing session.
Remote Support
Contact the person you would like to allow to
view the display, and provide the following
authorization code:
2088D-0568D
REMOTE SUPPORT PERMISSIONS OPTIONS
Advanced
Options
92
Always Allow
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
SETUP
AGFINITI
Press: Home button > AgFiniti button > Advanced Options button > Always Allow
Allows remote viewer to view display screens without display user having to give permission
Advanced
Options
Ask For Permission
Press: Home button > AgFiniti button > Advanced Options button > Ask For Permission
This selection will require the display user to grant remote user permission
to view the display.
allow remote viewer access to view the display
Remote View
Allow John Doe to
remotely view the
display?
deny remote viewer access to view the display
If buttons are grayed out then there isn’t a remote support license tied to the AgFiniti account. Must enter
Remote Support activation code at www.AgFiniti.com. See dealer for activation code.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
93
www.4qte.com
94
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
GPS
GPS
GPS
GPS BUTTON
During your field operation, the GPS (satellite) button in the upper left-hand side of the
Status Bar should appear green, which means you are receiving a differential GPS signal. If
this icon appears yellow, you are still receiving GPS but are not receiving a differential
signal; and if it appears gray then you have lost GPS. In either case, you should check your GPS
settings.
SETUP
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > GPS button
GPS/Guidance Setup
Guidance/Steering, Lightbar Settings,
and Required Differential Correction for
Guidance
Receiver: 6500
Steering
Manual Guidance
For more information, see the
Guidance chapter at “Guidance” on
page 117.
Serial
Operator Presence Alarm
15 Minutes
Lightbar
Settings
Require Differential
Correction for Guidance 0
SERIAL GPS SETTINGS
Receiver: GPS 6500
Serial
General
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > GPS button > Serial (from Receiver drop-down box)
> Receiver Setup (wrench) button > General tab
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
95
www.4qte.com
• Differential Source
Select choice of WAAS/EGNOS,
Satellite (TerraStar®), Glide, RTK, or
RTK External differential sources.
• Wrench button
Pressing the Wrench button opens
different settings screens, depending
on the differential source selected.
• Age of Differential
Displays the elapsed time since
reception of last differential correction
signal. The Age of Differential button is
only functional when GPS is
connected.
GPS Settings
General
Port A (Connected)
Port B
Features
Differential Source
RTK
Upgrade
Receiver
Age of Differential
Reset to
Defaults
60
StableLoc
StableLoc Error Limit
2 in
NMEA Talker
4 in
6 in
8 in
12 in
None
• StableLoc checkbox
StableLoc maintains accurate steering
– even when your correction signal is temporarily lost – by seamlessly transitioning to the next available
signal source. When the signal is restored, the system will then transition back to the higher accuracy
source, eliminating position jumps.
• StableLoc Error Limit (RTK & TerraStar only)
When using StableLoc, select the error limit at which the system will no longer allow steering. If your error
limit is “4 in (10 cm)” and the system accuracy reaches that limit, steering will no longer be allowed until the
error decreases. If set to “none” accuracy of the differential source will not affect the ability to autosteer.
• Reset to Defaults
Press the Reset to Defaults button to restore receiver settings to the factory default. This will remove all
custom settings.
• NMEA Talker
This button disables the GLONASS prefix in the NMEA messages. If using the GPS receiver with legacy
displays or a device that does not support GLONASS messages, uncheck the box.
Note: If using OmniSTAR, see “OmniSTAR Settings” on page 110.
96
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
GPS
DIFFERENTIAL SOURCE
GPS Settings
General
Port B
Port A (Connected)
Differential Source
TerraStar
Features
GLIDE
Upgrade
Receiver
WAAS/EGNOS
Reset to
Defaults
TerraStar
NMEA Talker
RTK External
RTK
WAAS/EGNOS Settings
Receiver: GPS 6500
Serial
General
Differential Source
WAAS/EGNOS
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > GPS button > Serial (from Receiver drop-down box) >
Receiver Setup (wrench) button > General tab > WAAS/EGNOS (from Differential Correction drop-down
box) > Differential Source Setup (wrench) button
WAAS/EGNOS Settings
• PRN
- Automatic
- WAAS
- EGNOS
- Custom
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
PRN
Automatic
97
www.4qte.com
TerraStar Settings
Reciever: GPS 6500
Serial
General
Differential Source
TerraStar
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > GPS button > Serial (from Receiver drop-down box) >
Receiver Setup (wrench) button > General tab > TerraStar (from Differential Correction drop-down box)
> Differential Source Setup (wrench) button
• Serial Number
This box shows the serial number of
your receiver - used to purchase
TerraStar subscription.
• Differential Source
TerraStar Setup
Serial Number
BFN14200204
Provider Settings
Automatic Tuning
Differential Source
TerraStar-D
- TerraStar
Frequency 98W
Convergence
30 in.
Threshold
• Automatic Tuning check box
Receiver will automatically select the
strongest frequency. Frequency dropdown box will be grayed out when this
is selected.
• Frequency
In the Frequency drop-down list box,
select the geographic region where you
are located.
• Convergence Threshold
The receiver uses the standard deviation of the solution to determine when the TerraStar position has
converged. The receiver will label the TerraStar solution as “converged” when the horizontal standard
deviation reaches the Convergence Threshold setting. Relaxing the convergence threshold shortens the
time before a TerraStar solution is reported as converged. However, it does not alter the absolute behavior
of the solution.
Note: The use of TerraStar® differential requires purchase of a subscription from your Ag Leader dealer.
Settings related to using satellite differential correction vary based upon your geographic location. Setup
details are explained on the following pages. More specific information can be obtained through you Ag Leader
dealer.
Note: You will need to know serial number when contacting Ag Leader to set up the receiver.
Note: The display does not come with custom frequency numbers.
98
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
GPS
RTK External Settings
Reciever: GPS 6500
Serial
General
Differential Source
RTK External
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > GPS button > Serial (from Receiver drop-down box) >
Receiver Setup (wrench) button > General tab > RTK External (from Differential Correction drop-down
box) > Differential Source Setup (wrench) button
Setting the differential source to RTK
External enables GGA NMEA message
output on Port B at 1 Herz (Hz).
Radio Settings
Radio Baud Rate
38400
RTK Settings - NTRIP
Reciever: GPS 6500
Serial
General
Differential Source
RTK
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > GPS button > Serial (from Receiver drop-down box) >
Receiver Setup (wrench) button > General tab > RTK (from Differential Correction drop-down box) >
Differential Source Setup (wrench) button
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
99
www.4qte.com
NTRIP
• Server
• Username
• Password
RTK Settings
NTRIP
Server
Streams
RTCM_NEAR - Connected
165.206.203.10:10000
Username
Disconnect
RTCM3_MAX
Info
• Steams
• Disconnect/Connect - to the NTRIP
Network
agleader11
RTCM_IMAX
Password
RTCM2_IMAX
******
RTCM2_NEAR
• Info - see “Info button” on page 101
CMR_NEAR
CMRP_NEAR
Cellular
Cellular
• IP Address - indicates a connection
to the Internet
IP Address:
10.44.64.32
Modern Status: Connected
• Modem Status
NTRIP Server
Server Address
165.206.203.10
Port
NTRIP Server
10000
• Server Address
• Port
Server Address and Port are provided
by the NTRIP Network.
100
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
GPS
Cellular Settings
APN
Broadband
Username
Cellular Settings
Password
• APN
• Username
• Password
APN, Username and Password are
Network provided settings. Contact the
Cellular provider for this information.
Stream Info
Stream
Format:
RTCM3_NEAR
RTCM 3
Format Details:
Info button
Navigation System:
Network:
Authentication:
GPS & GLONASS
Iowa RTK Network
Required
• Stream
• Format
• Format Details
• Navigation System
• Network
• Authentication
The information shown on this screen
is provided by the NTRIP Network.
RTK Settings - 900/400 MHz
Reciever: GPS 6500
Serial
General
Differential Source
RTK
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > GPS button > Serial (from Receiver drop-down box) >
Receiver Setup (wrench) button > General tab > RTK (from Differential Correction drop-down box) >
Differential Source Setup (wrench) button
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
101
www.4qte.com
Channel Spacing
Use drop-down menu to select Channel
Spacing (Relay 400 Only)
Frequency
Press button to add a
Frequency (400 Only) or
Channel (900 only)
Select frequency or channel
and press button to delete
selected frequency or channel
Set
Active
Select frequency or channel
and press button to make
selected frequency or channel
active
UPGRADE RECEIVER
Reciever: GPS 6500
Serial
General
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > GPS button > Serial (from Receiver drop-down box)
> Receiver Setup (wrench) button > General tab > Upgrade Receiver button
Select OEM file.
Press
to accept.
Display will upgrade receiver.
Select ESC file.
Press
to accept.
Display will upgrade receiver.
Press
to return to previous screen
without updating receiver.
102
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
GPS
SERIAL PORT SETTINGS
PORT A TAB
Receiver: GPS 6500
Serial
Port A
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > GPS button > Serial (from Receiver drop-down box)
> Receiver Setup (wrench) button > Port A tab
The Serial Port Settings screen is the
place where you can adjust GPS output.
The appearance of the Serial Port
Settings screen varies depending upon
your model of GPS receiver.
• Output Baud Rate
Displays the speed at which the
receiver communicates with the
display. For optimal performance, the
GPS baud rate is set at 115200 and
can not be changed.
• GPS Position Rate (Hz)
Represents the cycles per second
(shown in Hz) that the display receives
position information from viewable
satellites.
• NMEA Messages
These checkboxes represent various communication protocols or formats that have been set by the
National Marine Electronics Association (NMEA), and used in information “strings” or sentences output by
the GPS Receiver. At present, the display only requires two NMEA Message formats: GGA and VTG.
- GGA: position in longitude and latitude.
- VTG: ground speed
- GSV, GSA: required to view the Satellite Plot, but are not required for GPS information.
- GLL, ZDA, RMC, MSS: Leave these other NMEA message formats unchecked, unless you are
connected to a third-party monitor and have been directed to do so.
PORT B TAB
Receiver GPS 6500
Serial
Port B
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > GPS button > Serial (from Receiver drop-down box)
> Receiver Setup (wrench) button > Port B tab
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
103
www.4qte.com
The appearance of the Port B tab is
similar to Ports A.
GGA(Legacy) - shortens the decimal
precision of the GGA message for
connection to legacy equipment.
The appearance of this TSIP receiver GPS Port Setup
screen is the same for both Ports A and B.
GPS Port Setup - PORT A
NMEA Messages
Output Type TSIP
Output Baud Rate
GGA (Position)
GSA
VTG (Speed)
ZDA
GLL
RMC
GSV
MSS
4800
Output Parity None
GPS Pos. Rate (Hz) 1
Output Rate (Hz) ASAP
GPS INFORMATION
To access diagnostic information about the GPS signal, press the GPS (satellite) button
that appears in the in the upper left-hand side of the Status Bar. GPS Information then
appears on General, Receiver, and OmniSTAR tabs. Information on these GPS Information
screens is described on the following pages.
GPS button with bars - bars indicate cellular signal strength
104
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
GPS
GPS INFORMATION - GENERAL TAB
General
Press: GPS (satellite) button > General tab
• Latitude, Longitude, Elevation
Displays current position (in longitude and latitude)
and elevation.
• Heading
Displays degree heading of travel.
• Number of Satellites
• Differential
- No Diff: Indicates the receiver is not receiving a differential GPS signal.
- Diff On: Indicates the receiver is receiving a differential GPS signal.
- GLIDE (GPS 6000/GPS 6500 Only)
- WAAS/EGNOS
- TerraStar-D (GPS 6500 Only)
- RTK Fixed: The receiver is receiving a valid RTK differential source.
- RTK Float: The receiver is receiving information from the Base Station, but the signal is not strong
enough for an RTK fix.
• GPS Speed
• Position Rate
The frequency that the receiver is sending the display your position in longitude and latitude (GGA). For
example, at 5 Hz the display would be receiving a position message 5 times every second.
• Speed/Heading Rate:
The frequency that the receiver is sending the display your ground speed and heading (VTG)
Note: Position Rate and Speed/Heading Rate should both be set at a minimum of 5 Hz for guidance or
steering.
• Change Longitude/Latitude Format
Pressing this button changes the Longitude/Latitude format. These can either be shown in
Degrees, Minutes and Seconds; or Decimal Degrees.
View
Messages
• View Messages button - see “GPS Messages” on page 106.
• UTC Time
UTC is an acronym for Coordinated Universal Time, a high-precision atomic time standard that defines local
time throughout the world. Different versions of universal time use atomic clocks to correct for irregularities
in the Earth's rotation and orbit. UTC is used in navigation, astronomy, aviation, Internet broadcasts, and
amateur radio. If you are receiving information from the satellite, then the UTC Time should automatically
update.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
105
www.4qte.com
• UTC Date
If you are receiving information from the satellite, then the UTC date should automatically update.
• HDOP
Horizontal Dilution of Precision (HDOP) indicates the quality of the horizontal GPS position. Lower HDOP
numbers are optimal, higher numbers are undesirable.
• PDOP
Position Dilution of Precision (PDOP) is a unitless measure indicating when the satellite geometry can
provide the most accurate results. When satellites are spread around the sky, the PDOP value is low and
the computed position is more accurate. When satellites are grouped close together, the PDOP is high and
the positions are less accurate. Lower PDOP numbers are optimal, higher numbers are undesirable.
• Port
The connection between the display and the GPS as established at a message format and baud rate.
• RTK Throughput
Indicates a percentage of information available from the RTK base station. Used for troubleshooting an RTK
link between the base and rover.
• Frequency
The Correction Frequency indicates the GPS satellite frequency used by the receiver.
Note: The Correction Frequency diagnostic does not show for WAAS connections.
• SNR
If your receiver is using Beacon differential corrections, the frequency and signal to noise ratio (SNR) will
be displayed. Signal-to- Noise Ratio (SNR) indicates the strength of the differential correction signal in
relation to the amount of background noise that can interfere with signal reception.
• Correction Age
The length of time since the GPS receiver has obtained its last update.
Note: The age of the DGPS corrections (as delivered to the GPS receiver) will vary from one second to
several seconds, depending on the characteristics of the individual satellite signals.
GPS Messages
General
View
Messages
Press: GPS (satellite) button > General tab > View
Messages button
View the NMEA or TSIP messages coming from the
receiver.
Press
and use keyboard screen to write a
command to the receiver. Only send commands to
the receiver when told to by technical support.
Press Send
106
to send message to the receiver.
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
GPS
SATELLITE PLOT
General
Satellite
Plot
Press: GPS (satellite) button > General tab > Satellite Plot button
The Satellite Plot feature can display either as a plot
or a graph. The information on these screens is used
as an advanced diagnostic tool for GPS satellite
availability. In the event of GPS availability issues,
technical support may request you to view these
screens.
Satellite Plot
Plot
Graph
PRN
Satellites in View
Satellites Tracked
10
7
Satellite Plot - Graph
Elv
Corrections Age (sec) 7.40
VDOP 2.40
Azm
SNR
HDOP 1.50
PDOP 2.80
Satellite Plot
Plot
Graph
Satellite Plot requires GSV and GSA NMEA
messages to be turned on from the GPS receiver.
SNR
PRN
Satellites in View
Satellites Tracked
10
7
Corrections Age (sec) 7.40
VDOP 2.40
HDOP 1.50
PDOP 2.80
Note: In order to use Differential GPS, you must have at least four available satellites. In order to use RTK
differential sources, you must have at least five available satellites.
GPS INFORMATION - RECEIVER TAB
Receiver
Press: GPS (satellite) button > Receiver tab
• Receiver ID
• Firmware Version
• Product Serial Number
• Internal Serial Number
• TerraStar Unlocked
• RTK Unlocked
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
107
www.4qte.com
GPS INFORMATION - DIFFERENTIAL TAB
Differential
Press: GPS (satellite) button > Differential tab
• Latitude, Longitude, Elevation
Displays current position (in longitude and latitude)
and elevation.
Differential Tab:
• Active Estimated Error
Estimated error of the active differential source.
• Active Differential
Indicates the active differential source and will vary
depending on the current state of StableLoc.
• Selected Differential
Indicates the selected differential source (the source selected in the GPS setup).
• StableLoc Error Limit
Indicates the error limit selected in the GPS setup.
• Device Name
Indicates the connected Relay Module.
• Software Version
Software version of the radio/modem within the Relay Module.
• Manufacturer
Manufacturer of the Relay Module.
• Serial Number
Serial number of the Relay Module.
• Signal Strength
• Mobile Directory Number
• Mobile Subscriber ID
• NTRIP Connect/Disconnect
• RTK Convergence
Three states to indicate the current convergence level.
- Red Arrows, pointing out
The device is not currently converging on RTK. This may indicate a RTK link problem.
- Green Arrows, pointing in
The device is currently converging.
- Green Bull’s-eye
The device is converged on RTK.
108
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
GPS
Base Station
Press: GPS (satellite) button > Base Station tab
• Latitude
• Longitude
• Distance to Base
• Common Satellites
GPS INFORMATION - OMNISTAR TAB
OmniStar
Press: GPS (satellite) button > Relay tab
• HP/XP Expiration Date
GPS Information
General
Receiver
OmniStar
HP/XP Expiration Date:
HP/XP Time Remaining:
VBS Time Remaining:
VBS Time Remaining:
AutoSeed Fast Restart:
AutoSeed Status:
Estimated Position Error:
03/19/2010
0 Days
03/19/2010
0 Days
OFF
N/A
N/A
• HP/XP Time Remaining
• VBS Expiration Date
• VBS Time Remaining
• AutoSeed Fast Restart
• AutoSeed Status
Reset
AutoSeed
• Estimated Position Error
RTK/NTRIP Information (ParaDyme/GeoSteer Only)
The following information appears on the second GPS Information screen for RTK or NTRIP.
• Convergence (%)
Successful communication between Base Station and ParaDyme Roof Module.
• Radio Throughput
Displays percentage of data received from Base Station.
• Distance to Base
Shows distance to Base Station in miles (kilometers).
• Base Channel
Displays Channel ID of Base Station.
• NTRIP
(NTRIP users only) Shows either Connected or Disconnected.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
109
www.4qte.com
GPS INFORMATION - NTRIP
GeoSteer
or
GPS Information
ParaDyme
General
GeoSteer
1.2.25159
1219150027
JD 7280R
Active Vehicle:
Good
Steering Status:
NTRIP Stream
CMRP_NEAR
NTRIP Status:
Stream Connected
Connected
Cellular Status:
Cellular Signal Strength (%)
100
Connected
WiFi Status:
100
WiFi Signal Strength (%)
Firmware Version:
Serial Number:
Press: GPS (satellite) button > GeoSteer tab or
ParaDyme tab
• NTRIP Connect
Connects the display to the NTRIP correction
source.
• NTRIP Stream
Network mount point.
• NTRIP Status
Displays NTRIP connection; either Connected or
Disconnected.
NTRIP
Connect
• Cellular Status
Displays status of ParaDyme cellular modem; either Connected or Disconnected.
• Cellular Signal Strength (%)
Displays a number between 0 and 100%.
• WiFi Status
Displays status of WiFi router; either Connected or Disconnected.
• WiFi Signal Strength
Displays a number between 0 and 100%.
OMNISTAR SETTINGS
Differential Source
Receiver
General
OmniSTAR
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > GPS button > Receiver Setup (wrench) button > General
> OmniSTAR (Differential Source drop-down menu) > Setup (wrench) button
Note: If using the GPS 2500 receiver, see “OmniSTAR Settings — GPS 2500” on page 112.
110
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
GPS
OmniSTAR Setup
Serial Number
Provider Settings
0224019369
Frequency Central USA (MSV-C)
Differential Source
VBS
Custom
Frequency
HP/XP
Baud Rate 1200
1557.835
HP/XP with VBS Backup
Fast Restart
Note: The use of OmniSTAR® differential requires purchase of a subscription from OmniSTAR. Settings
related to using satellite differential correction vary based upon your geographic location. Setup details are
explained on the following pages. More specific information can be obtained by contacting OmniSTAR.
• Serial Number/OmniSTAR User ID
This box shows the serial number of your receiver. It may also display your OmniSTAR User ID.
Note: You will need to know this number when contacting OmniSTAR in order to set up the receiver.
• Differential Source
The choices include VBS, HP/XP, and HP/XP with VBS backup. These three options are described below.
- VBS - OmniSTAR VBS is a "sub-meter" level of service.
- HP/XP - The OmniSTAR XP service is more accurate than VBS, but slightly less accurate than HP. The
OmniSTAR HP (High Performance) service is the most accurate of the three options.
- HP/XP with VBS backup - If this option is chosen, and you lose your HP/XP signal, your receiver will
automatically switch to VBS.
• Frequency
In the Frequency drop-down list box, select the geographic region where you are located. If you wish to
enter a Custom Frequency, select Custom. Then enter the frequency number in the text box below.
Note: The display does not come with custom frequency numbers. Enter a number only if directed to by
OmniSTAR.
• Baud Rate
The baud rate represents the speed at which your receiver obtains information from the satellite.
Note: You should always keep the baud rate set at 1200 unless directed by OmniSTAR or Technical Support.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
111
www.4qte.com
• AutoSeed Fast Restart
Checking this box before the vehicle is shut down allows the receiver to utilize shutdown time to acquire the
appropriate satellites in order to ensure a quick and efficient startup. This reduces the time taken for satellite
convergence after startup, and thus increases accuracy in the field.
Note: To get the most benefit from AutoSeed technology, you should shut down the vehicle in a place where
the receiver has a clear view of the sky. Do not move the vehicle before powering up again.
OMNISTAR SETTINGS — GPS 2500
Differential Source
Receiver
OmniSTAR
General
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > GPS button > Receiver Setup (wrench) button > General
tab > OmniSTAR (Differential Source drop-down menu) > Setup (wrench) button
OmniSTAR Setup
OmniSTAR ID
Provider Settings
1802697
Automatic Tuning
Differential Source
VBS
Frequency Custom
HP/XP
Custom
Frequency
1575.42
Baud Rate
1200
Fast Restart
GGA
(GLONASS)
Convergence
None
Threshold
Note: The use of OmniSTAR® differential requires purchase of a subscription from OmniSTAR. Settings
related to using satellite differential correction vary based upon your geographic location. Setup details are
explained on the following pages. More specific information can be obtained by contacting OmniSTAR.
• Serial Number/OmniSTAR User ID
This box shows the serial number of your receiver. It may also display your OmniSTAR User ID.
Note: You will need to know this number when contacting OmniSTAR in order to set up the receiver.
• Differential Source
- VBS - OmniSTAR VBS is a "sub-meter" level of service.
- HP/XP - The OmniSTAR XP service is more accurate than VBS, but slightly less accurate than HP. The
OmniSTAR HP (High Performance) service is the most accurate of the three options.
112
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
Note: To get the most benefit from Fast Restart, you should shut down the vehicle in a place where the
receiver has a clear view of the sky. Do not move the vehicle before powering up again.
• GGA (GLONASS)
Checking this box allows the additional GLONASS satellites to be displayed in the GGA message.
• AutoTune Frequency check box
Receiver will automatically select the strongest frequency.
• Frequency
In the Frequency drop-down list box, select the geographic region where you are located. If you wish to
enter a Custom Frequency, select Custom. Then enter the frequency number in the text box below.
Note: The display does not come with custom frequency numbers. Enter a number only if directed to by
OmniSTAR.
• Baud Rate
The baud rate represents the speed at which your receiver obtains information from the satellite.
Note: You should always keep the baud rate set at 1200 unless directed by OmniSTAR or Technical Support.
• Convergence Threshold
The receiver uses the standard deviation of the solution to determine when the OmniSTAR position has
converged. The receiver will label the OmniSTAR solution as “converged” when the horizontal standard
deviation reaches the Convergence Threshold setting. Relaxing the convergence threshold shortens the
time before a OmniSTAR solution is reported as converged. However, it does not alter the absolute
behavior of the solution.
GPS INFORMATION FOR 2500 RTK
GPS2500
Press: GPS (satellite) button
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
113
GPS
• Fast Restart
Checking this box before the vehicle is shut down allows the receiver to utilize shutdown time to acquire the
appropriate satellites in order to ensure a quick and efficient startup. This reduces the time taken for satellite
convergence after startup, and thus increases accuracy in the field.
www.4qte.com
GPS Information
eneral
Receiver
Receiver ID:
Firmware Version:
Serial Number:
e-Dif Subscription:
RTK:
GLONASS:
Active Application:
Application Slot 1:
Application Slot 2:
GPS Information
Base Station
General
GPS2500
1.2Qe4
Receiver
Base Station
Latitude (N)
Longitude (W)
1840159
Off
On
42.002612500
-93.628621120
0.0
Distance to Base:
On
RTK Rover
RTK Rover
SBAS/OmniSTAR
GPS Information is given for the Receiver and the Base Station
2500 RTK SETUP
Receiver
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > GPS button > Receiver Setup (wrench) button
• Differential Source
Select RTK for RTK Differential Correction
• Wrench button
Pressing the Wrench button opens the screens to
set the RTK radio channel. Base Station and Rover
must be set to the same channel
GPS 2500
General
Port A - Connected
Port B
Differential Source
RTK
Reset to
Defaults
Age of Differential
• Ignore NMEA Checksum
Check this to ignore intermittent GPS message
errors.
60
Enter Unlock
Ignore NMEA
Checksum
• Reset to Defaults
Press the Reset to Defaults button to restore
receiver settings to the factory default. This will
remove all custom settings.
• Enter Unlock
Press to enter feature code unlocks. Unlock codes can be purchased through AgLeader.
Receiver
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > GPS button > Receiver Setup (wrench) button >
Differential Source Setup (wrench) button
114
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
GPS
• RTK Radio Channel
RTK Setup
Press button to set the RTK radio channel. Base Station
and Rover must be set to the same channel.
RTK Radio Channel
Channel:
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
46
115
www.4qte.com
116
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
GUIDANCE
GUIDANCE
GUIDANCE
GUIDANCE/STEERING CONTROL
SETUP
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > GPS button
• Manual Guidance
Select this to perform guidance by
lightbar while manually steering the
vehicle.
GPS/Guidance Setup
Receiver
Steering
SteerCommand
TSIP
Manual Guidance
tor Presence Alarm
• OnTrac2/OnTrac2+
For more information, see the OnTrac2
section.
• ParaDyme/GeoSteer
For more information, see the
ParaDyme insert or GeoSteer manual.
OnTrac2+ (CAN A)
OnTrac2 (CAN B)
es
Lightbar
Settings
ParaDyme/GeoSteer
uire Differential
ection for Guidance0
OnTrac3
SteerCommand
• OnTrac3
For more information, see the OnTrac3
manual.
• SteerCommand
For more information, see the
SteerCommand manual.
• Operator Presence Alarm
The Operator Presence Alarm disengages guidance control if the operator does not have any interaction
with the display for a specified period of time. Use the drop-down menu to specify the period of time before
guidance is automatically disengaged.
• Lightbar Settings
For more information, see “Lightbar Settings” on page 118.
• Required Differential Correction for Guidance
When un-checked allows guidance to operate without differential correction.
Pressing the Setup (wrench) button on the Guidance Tab opens the guidance system
settings for the selected guidance system.
Note: In order to use guidance with the display, you must have a GPS receiver capable of a GPS output rate
of 5 Hz or more.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
117
www.4qte.com
LIGHTBAR SETTINGS
SETUP
Lightbar
Settings
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > GPS button > Lightbar Settings button
LIghtbar Settings
• LED Spacing
Enter the distance represented by each square of
the lightbar (6-72 in.).
• Mode
Chase - center the vehicle by followig the indicator
lights.
Pull - center the vehicle by turning in the opposite
direction of the indicator lights on the lightbar.
Spacing
12 in
Mode
External Lightbar
LED Brightness
5
Chase
• External Lightbar LED Brightness
If applicable, press
/
to enter in a
number specifying the brightness of the LED lights
on the optional L160 external lightbar. The number
1 is the dimmest and 10 is the brightest. Default is 5.
GUIDANCE TAB ON MAPPING TOOLBOX
Press: Map button > Guidance tab (in Mapping Toolbox)
Guidance
New
Pattern
The Guidance Tab on the Mapping Toolbox allows you to you can create a
new pattern, load an existing pattern, or adjust Guidance Options and
Guidance Settings.This tab changes its appearance after you create or load
a pattern.
Load
Pattern
Before you create any patterns, the map screen’s Guidance Tab appears as
shown.
Manage
Patterns
Note: Guidance pattern will default to the one last used.
Guidance patterns can be set to widths up to 2000 ft (609 m).
118
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
GUIDANCE
NEW PATTERN
STRAIGHT
Select Pattern
New
Pattern
Press: Map button > Guidance tab (in Mapping Toolbox) > New Pattern button > Straight Pattern
Selection
System defaults pattern type to last used. Press the pattern icon to select a different pattern.
- Implement Width (from Implement Setup)
- Guidance Width input box
- Enable Tramlines checkbox
Press
. You will automatically return to the Map screen.
Create AB line using 2 points
•
Press to mark point A. A green ball appears on the map screen where point was
placed.
•
Button is greyed out until you drive a minimum of 100 feet.
- Pause - Press
to pause path during path creation
- Resume - Press
- Cancel - Press
•
to resume path during path creation
to cancel path during path creation
Press to mark point B. The AB line appears on the map screen and point B is marked
with a red ball.
Create AB line using Current Location and Heading
•
uses current location and heading, line extends 1 mile before and after the A point
(recommend vehicle having forward motion to get a good heading).
Create AB line using Current Location and Inputting Heading
•
uses current location and input heading, line extends 1 mile before and after the
A point
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
119
www.4qte.com
Patterns are automatically saved when the B point is set (A point for A+ pattern). For more information
see “AutoSave” on page 127.
Note: On straight AB lines, if you complete a swath that is longer than the previous one, the display
automatically extends the guidance path for the following swaths.
ADAPTIVE CURVE
Use the Adaptive Curve pattern to follow gentle
contours in the field, or when you need to avoid
obstacles (B). This pattern provides guidance based
on the last curve driven.
Select Pattern
New
Pattern
Press: Map button > Guidance tab (in Mapping Toolbox) > New Pattern button > Adaptive Curve Pattern
Selection
System defaults pattern type to last used. Press the pattern icon to select a different pattern.
- Implement Width (from Implement Setup)
- Guidance Width input box
Press
. You will automatically return to the Map screen.
return to the Map screen.
Create AB line using 2 points
•
Press to mark point A. A green ball appears on the map screen where point was
placed.
•
Button is greyed out until you drive a minimum of 100 feet.
- Pause - Press
- Resume - Press
- Cancel - Press
120
to pause path during path creation
to resume path during path creation
to cancel path during path creation
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
Press to mark point B. The AB line appears on the map screen and point B is marked
with a red ball.
Note: Guidance extends beyond the end of curved swaths. This makes it possible to get LED guidance back
onto the swath if the vehicle drives past the end of a swath. The extended swath lines do not appear on screen.
Adaptive Curve
Press: Map button > Guidance tab (in Mapping Toolbox) > Setup (wrench) button > Adaptive Curve tab
Guidance Options
• You can adjust the degree heading at which the
system generates the next pass by doing the
following: Go to the Guidance screen and press
the Options button. The Guidance Options
screen appears; press the Adaptive Curve
button. At the New Pass drop-down menu, select
Nudge
Adaptive Curve
Shift
Lightbar
Save
New Pass
Save
Group
Heading Threshold
Heading Change
100
Pause
Heading Change, then use
to enter in
the degree number of your Heading Threshold.
Patterns are automatically saved when the vehicle
turns for the first time. For more information see
“AutoSave” on page 127.
IDENTICAL CURVE
Use the Identical Curve pattern to follow gentle
contours in the field. This pattern provides guidance
based on the original curve driven.
Select Pattern
New
Pattern
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
121
GUIDANCE
•
www.4qte.com
Press: Map button > Guidance tab (in Mapping Toolbox) > New Pattern button > Identical Curve Pattern
Selection
System defaults pattern type to last used. Press the pattern icon to select a different pattern.
- Implement Width (from Implement Setup)
- Guidance Width input box
- Enable Tramlines checkbox
Press
. You will automatically return to the Map screen.
return to the Map screen.
Create AB line using 2 points
•
Press to mark point A. A green ball appears on the map screen where point was
placed.
•
Button is grayed out until you drive a minimum of 100 feet.
- Pause - Press
to pause path during path creation
- Resume - Press
- Cancel - Press
•
to resume path during path creation
to cancel path during path creation
Press to mark point B. The AB line appears on the map screen and point B is marked
with a red ball.
Patterns are automatically saved when the vehicle turns for the first time. For more information see
“AutoSave” on page 127.
Note: Guidance extends beyond the end of curved swaths. This makes it possible to get LED guidance back
onto the swath if the vehicle drives past the end of a swath. The extended swath lines do not appear on screen.
PIVOT
Use the Center-pivot pattern for a field that is irrigated using a centerpivot. With this pattern, you can drive concentric circles around the
center-pivot. The display will calculate the center point based on where
you have driven. Otherwise, you can enter in the latitude and longitude
of the center point, if known.
122
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
New
Pattern
Press: Map button > Guidance tab (in Mapping Toolbox) > New Pattern button > Pivot Pattern Selection
System defaults pattern type to last used. Press the pattern icon to select a different pattern.
- Implement Width (from Implement Setup)
- Guidance Width input box
- Manual Entry checkbox and Latitude and Longitude input boxes
Press
. You will automatically return to the Map screen.
Create AB line using driven path
• Position one wheel of the vehicle in a pivot wheel rut, with the rear of the vehicle to the pivot arm.
•
Press to mark point A. A green ball appears on the map screen where point was
placed.
• Drive around the field. Keep the vehicle wheel in the rut.
•
Button is greyed out until you drive a minimum of 160 feet.
- Pause - Press
to pause path during path creation
- Resume - Press
- Cancel - Press
•
to resume path during path creation
to cancel path during path creation
When you are almost back to the pivot arm or the edge of the field, press to mark
point B., the AB line appears on the map screen and point B is marked with a red ball.
1. Next, you must set the Field Edge. You may do this
when the Pivot Field Edge window appears on your
display.
Pivot Field Edge
Inches
Feet
Shift By
0 ft
Distance
Inward
30 in
Outward
From here, you may choose one of three options:
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
123
GUIDANCE
Select Pattern
www.4qte.com
• Shift By Distance
This sets the field edge as the distance and direction in relation to the AB Line created. In the Pivot Field
Edge Distance portion of the window, enter the distance in feet and inches.
• Shift By Rows
This sets the field edge as the number of crop rows multiplied by the number of spacing. In the Pivot Field
Edge Distance portion of the window, enter the Number of Rows and Row Spacing.
• Cancel
The vehicle uses the driven pass as the AB Line.
2. If you chose Shift by Rows in the previous step, use
to enter the Number of Rows and Row
Spacing. Choose the direction relative to the AB Line (either Outward or Inward), and press
continue.
to
3. Steer the vehicle so that you center the green lights in the lightbar as you drive forward along the path.
Note: To work from the center of the field outwards, the initial pivot must have:
• A radius of at least two swath widths.
• An arc length of at least two swath widths.
SMARTPATH
The SmartPath™ pattern is designed to give guidance
from any previously-driven pass. This is used in
irregular-shaped and terraced fields where you cannot
run all passes parallel to the previous pass. Instead, the
SmartPath guidance allows you to move to a different
area of the field, and then resume a previous guidance
pattern later. Moreover, you can use SmartPath to
create straight AB patterns within the SmartPath
pattern and cycle between any available pattern within
SmartPath to choose the appropriate one.
Select SmartPath
New
Pattern
Press: Map button > Guidance tab (in Mapping Toolbox) > New Pattern button > SmartPath Pattern
Selection
System defaults pattern type to last used. Press the pattern icon to select a different pattern.
- Implement Width (from Implement Setup)
- Guidance Width input box
124
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
GUIDANCE
Press
. You will automatically return to the Map screen.
Inputting Paths into SmartPath
AB Manager
Press: Map button > Guidance tab (in Mapping Toolbox) > A-B button > AB Manager
The AB Manager screen allow user to create, edit, remove, and load paths into SmartPath.
•
Press to create an AB line.
• Load Press to load an AB line.
•
Press to edit the name of an AB line.
•
Press to delete an AB line.
You can create up to 20 different AB lines within SmartPath.
•
Press the Back button to close the screen.
Cycle between Loaded Paths
Press: Map button > Guidance tab (in Mapping Toolbox) > Active Line Cyle button
Press
to cycle through the paths loaded in SmartPath.
If you drive your vehicle onto the Projected Path, the system guidance uses this as the Followed Path.
Once the AB line is created, you can switch between the AB line and SmartPath patterns
by pressing the AB/SmartPath toggle.
After the Guidance System has switched over to a different path, the name of the currently-followed
pattern is shown within a black box on the Map screen.
The Map screen changes its appearance to Perspective View, and SmartPath settings are shown in the
mapping toolbox. Drive along the path that you wish to create.
Note: The display will not create an A point with SmartPath, unless you are mapping a Straight AB line within
it. (For more information, see “Once the AB line is created, you can switch between the AB line and SmartPath
patterns by pressing the AB/SmartPath toggle.” on page 125).
After you turn around on your first pass, the system guidance will follow a maroon-colored line parallel to
your previously-driven pass.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
125
www.4qte.com
As you continue using the SmartPath,
the map screen will display three lines:
• (A) The Base Path
Appears as a black line, is the initial
SmartPath that you created on the first
pass.
Smart
Reset
Nudge: 30 in
Total: 0 in
• (B) The Followed Path
Appears as a maroon-colored line, is the
path that your vehicle is currently using.
• (C) The Projected Path
Appears as a blue-colored line on the
opposite side of the Base Path, is an
alternate path parallel to the Base Path.
The system guidance created this path when you created the Base Path. This is the path that your vehicle
would have taken if you had turned it in the opposite direction.
• SmartPath Notes:
- The Projected Path and Base Path both remain in display memory, unless you press the Reset button
without saving the SmartPath pattern.
- Pressing the Save button saves all the SmartPath passes within the display’s memory for future use.
Select a Previous SmartPath Pass
If you have specified SmartPath as your desired pattern, but you are not following an active guidance
pattern, the Guidance System automatically begins searching for SmartPath patterns for your use.
If you wish to use a previously-created SmartPath pattern, you can do so by pressing on
the Active Line Cycle button. This button allows you to cycle between available SmartPath
patterns.
• Notes:
- When the guidance system looks for other available SmartPath patterns, it first displays the nearestavailable pass.
- You can adjust the available area in which the Guidance System searches for previously-created
SmartPath passes. To do this, adjust the Heading Threshold settings on the Smart Tab of the
Guidance Option screen.
SmartPath Guidance Options
SmartPath only creates a SmartPath pass when you are logging data in the field. However,
you have the option of using it to create SmartPath passes continually during all field
operations.
126
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
Guidance Options
Nudge
Save
• The default setting is Logged Area. This setting
only creates passes while you are logging field
data.
• By selecting All Area Covered, you can create
SmartPath passes even when not logging field
data.
GUIDANCE
To adjust this setting, press the Guidance Options
button on the Guidance Tab. The Guidance Options
screen appears. Press the Smart Tab.
Smart
Lightbar
Path Generation
Heading
Threshold
All Area Covered
Save
Group
20
degrees
Logged Area
Pause
• The Heading Threshold setting is the available
area that the Guidance System uses to search for
previously-created SmartPath passes. The
default setting is 20 degrees.
If you chose Adaptive Curve as your pattern option at the New Pattern screen, the Adaptive Curve
button appears on the Guidance Options screen. This button opens the Adaptive Pattern Options
screen. At this screen, you can choose pattern options that tell the system where to log a new pass.
These options include:
• New Pass
This sets the conditions for the display to log a new pass. Select either Area Count or Heading Change.
- Area Count generates the next pass, based on coverage area of the previous pass. The display must
be logging coverage data in order to generate the next pass.
- Heading Change logs the next pass when the vehicle turns past the heading threshold.
• Heading Threshold
Enter in the degree of turning angle that your vehicle will need to make before creating another pass.
Note: You should always set the Heading Threshold number past 90 degrees. The default number is 110
degrees.
AUTOSAVE
0.67 ac
Patterns are automatically saved when
the B point is set (A point for A+ pattern).
A screen will notify user that the patterns
is being saved with a default name using
the date and time. Patterns can be
renamed or deleted.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
Straight
4.5 mph
Tram: 1 R
Reset
Pattern saved as
2013-01-22_16:47:07
Nudge: 30 in
Total: 0 in
127
www.4qte.com
MANAGE PATTERNS
SPATIAL SORT
New
Pattern
Press: Map button > Guidance tab (in Mapping Toolbox) > New Pattern button
Spatial Sort allows the user to select any guidance
pattern in the display, sorted by distance from the
GPS location.
Pattern at the top of the list will be the closest to
current GPS location.
Show all patterns
Check the box to show all
patterns.
Load Pattern
2014-01-02_
40.0000 01/02/2014 Straight
2014-01-02_
40.0000 01/02/2014 Straight
2014-01-02_
40.0000 01/02/2014 Straight
2014-01-02_
40.0000 01/02/2014 Curve
E headland
40.0000 03/14/2012 Straight
E headland 12
40.0000 03/14/2012 Straight
Slant east end
40.0000 03/14/2012 Straight
Slant east end
40.0000 03/14/2012 Straight
S side
40.0000 03/14/2012 Curve
Show all patterns
IMPORT PATTERN
Manage
Patterns
Import
Select Pattern
Press: Map button > Guidance tab (in Mapping Toolbox) > Manage Patterns button > Import button
>Select Pattern > Checkmark button
Display informs you when file has been successfully copied.
EXPORT PATTERN
Manage
Patterns
Select Pattern
Export
Press: Map button > Guidance tab (in Mapping Toolbox) > Manage Patterns button > Select Pattern >
Export button
Display informs you when file has been successfully copied.
EDIT PATTERN
If you wish to rename a pattern, first press the Manage Patterns button on the Guidance Tab of the
Mapping Toolbox. Press
to enter a name for the pattern. The new pattern name now appears in
the pattern list of the Manage Patterns screen.
128
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
To remove a pattern from the display memory, first press the Manage Patterns button on the Guidance
Tab of the Mapping Toolbox. At the Manage Patterns screen, press either:
• the Remove button if you wish to delete one pattern file; or
• the Remove All button if you wish to delete all of them for the current field.
RESET PATTERN
If you have been using an already-saved pattern, and wish to switch over to a different pattern in the
same field, you can use the Reset Pattern feature by following the steps below.
1. Press Reset
Press the Reset button on the Guidance screen.
2. Confirm Reset
The Guidance screen appears, asking you to reset the current guidance pattern. Press
to continue.
3. Create new pattern (optional)
The pattern is now reset. You may now create a new pattern, if desired.
PATTERN GROUPS
Pattern Groups allow the user to group up to 20 patterns per field, using the Group
Manager.
Straight
Reset
Nudge: 2.0
Total: 0.0
The Group Manager allows the user to add a new
pattern or load an existing pattern to a Group. Once
a Group is created, it can be saved and reloaded.
Group Manager
Load
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
129
GUIDANCE
REMOVE PATTERN/REMOVE ALL PATTERNS
www.4qte.com
The Pattern Cycle Button allows the user to easily cycle between patterns with a
single button press. Patterns will cycle in the order they were created or added,
starting back at the beginning of the list, once the last patterns is reached.
Straight
Reset
2.0
Total: 0.0
When loading a Pattern Group, the Group Pattern
Setting dialog appears and allows the user to select
the Guidance Width and any Shift that needs to be
applied to each Pattern within the Pattern Group.
User will also have the option to load Curve Patterns
as Adaptive or Identical.
Group Pattern Settings
Guidance Width
Implement Width: 30.0000
30.000
Description
Shift
2014-01-07_10:04:39
0
Straight
2014-01-07_10:06:28
0
Straight
Straight AB, Identical Curve, Adaptive Curve and
Pivot Patterns can be grouped. SmartPath cannot
be grouped.
2014-01-07_10:12:42
Curve
Identical
0
2014-01-07_10:06:28
Straight
0
GUIDANCE OPTIONS
SAVE
Save
Press: Map button > Guidance tab (in Mapping Toolbox) > Setup (wrench) button > Save button
This allows you can save a pattern (.AGSETUP file)
to the display's internal memory to the current field.
Press
and enter a unique pattern name.
When finished, press
.
Save Pattern
Enter New Description:
Swath
Out
60.000 12/23/2009 Straight
Pattern
Planting2
60.000 12/23/2009 Straight
Path 1
60.000 12/23/2009 Straight
1
130
Created
Existing Patterns
60.000 12/23/2009 Straight
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
GUIDANCE
PAUSE
Pause
Press: Map button > Guidance tab (in Mapping Toolbox) > Setup (wrench) button > Pause button
The Pause button allows your display to stop logging points along an AB Line. Once this button is
pressed, a Resume button will take its place until you press this button and Pause reappears.
Note: If you are using the display to follow a set AB Line and wish to temporarily deviate from this line, you
can use the Pause button to pause the display's guidance logging activity. This feature could be used, for
example, by a vehicle operator who must refill a sprayer. When paused, the display will continue to give the
distance back to the original pause point position.
Pause
• Press Pause button.
Press the Pause button on the Guidance screen. When you do so, the place where you
paused appears on the Map screen as a yellow ball.
Note: You can pause a pattern even if you have not set the “B” point yet. If you do so, the message in the
lightbar will read "Need B." If you pause the pattern after you have set your AB Line, then the lightbar will
indicate the distance your vehicle must travel to return to the pause point.
• Press Resume button.
To resume your pattern, press the Resume button to resume logging on your AB Line.
Resume
Note: If you press the Resume button before you have returned to the original AB Line, your display will select
the closest AB Line to your vehicle.
REMARK A
Remark A
Press: Map button > Guidance tab (in Mapping Toolbox) > Setup (wrench) button > Remark A button
If you chose Straight patten, the Remark A button appears on the Guidance Options screen. The
Remark A button "re-marks" the A point by moving it to the current position while maintaining the same
heading. A brief message appears in the on-screen lightbar, stating "Point A Remarked."
NUDGE
Note: Only Straight patterns offer two Nudge settings. All other patterns have a single nudge setting.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
131
www.4qte.com
Straight
Reset
Straight
Nudge allows you to adjust the
swaths by a specified distance.
Reset
Small Nudge (single arrow) shown on left.
Nudge: 30.0 in
Total: 0.0 in
Nudge: 90.0 in
Large Nudge setting (double arrow) shown on
right (Straight Patterns Only).
Use Nudge toggle button
Nudge: 30.0 in
Total: 0.0 in
Total: 0.0 in
to
switch between Small and Large Nudge setting.
Use Mapping Toolbox toggle button
to
switch the menu between Tramline and Nudge on
the Mapping Toolbox, if Tramlines are enabled.
Nudge
Press: Map button > Guidance tab (in Mapping Toolbox) > Setup (wrench) button > Nudge tab
Guidance Options
Press the Setup (wrench) button then the
Nudge
Nudge tab to make adjustments to Nudge settings.
• Press
to enter a distance for increment
that the swaths will move with each successive
press of the left or right arrows buttons on the
Guidance Tab.
Shift
Lightbar
Tramlines
Save
Save
Group
Pause
Small Increment:
30.0 in
Large Increment:
90.0 in
Remark A
• To clear out the adjustment and go to the original
position, press Clear Nudge.
Total Nudge:
0 in
Clear Nudge
Screen shows Small and Large increment settings
for Straight path. Other Patterns will only show the
small increment setting.
SHIFT
Shift
Press: Map button > Guidance tab (in Mapping Toolbox) > Setup (wrench) button > Shift tab
132
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
GUIDANCE
Shift moves all of the swaths by a specified distance
to the left or right, (including the AB line). The swaths
can be shifted by a distance or number of rows.
Guidance Options
Nudge
Adaptive Curve
Shift
Lightbar
Save
• Shift by Distance - enter the distance that you
wish to shift the pattern. Use the Shift Left and
Shift Right buttons to enter the direction and to
accept change
• Shift by Rows - enter the number of rows you wish
to shift the pattern. Use the Shift Left and Shift
Right buttons to enter the direction and to accept
change
Save
Group
Inches
Feet
Shift By
Distance
0
0
Pause
Remark A
Shift Right
Shift Left
Note: The Shift setting is not available with the SmartPath patterns.
STEERING
Steering
Press: Map button > Guidance tab (in Mapping Toolbox) > Setup (wrench) button > Steering tab
Line Acquisition — determines how aggressively
the system steers onto the desired steering path.
The ideal setting allows the system to take the
shortest route without excessively sharp or sudden
movements of the vehicle.
Steering Response — controls the oscillations of
the vehicle when it is on the desired path.
Reverse Response — (ParaDyme Only) controls
the oscillations of the vehicle when it is on the
desired path in reverse.
Guidance Options
Nudge
Shift
Steering
Lightbar
Tramlines
Save
Save
Group
Line
Acquisition
Steering
Responce
Reverse
Responce
Pause
10
10
10
Remark A
Log coverage while Autosteer is engaged
Log coverage while AutoSteer is engaged checkbox
Coverage while engaged is available when an AutoSteering system (OnTrac2+, GeoSteer, ParaDyme)
is connected. User can still manually control coverage logging with the on-screen coverage button.
AutoSwath is unaffected by this selection.
ONTRAC TUNING
OnTrac Tuning
Press: Map button > Guidance tab (in Mapping Toolbox) > Setup (wrench) button > OnTrac Tuning tab
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
133
www.4qte.com
Motor Aggressiveness — determines how
aggressively the motor engages.
Guidance Options
Nudge
Heading Aggressiveness — determines how
aggressively the system reacts to achieve the correct
heading.
Shift
OnTrac Tuning
Steering
Lightbar
Tramlines
Save
Save
Group
Cross-Track Error — adjusts how aggressively the
vehicle reacts to changes in cross-track error.
Motor Aggressiveness
0
Heading Aggressiveness
0
Cross-Track Error
0
Pause
Remark A
LIGHTBAR
Lightbar
Press: Map button > Guidance tab (in Mapping Toolbox) > Setup (wrench) button > Lightbar tab
Guidance Options
• LED Spacing
Enter the distance represented by each square of
the lightbar (6-72 in.).
Nudge
• Mode
Chase - center the vehicle by following the indicator
lights.
Pull - center the vehicle by turning in the opposite
direction of the indicator lights on the lightbar.
Shift
Lightbar
Tramlines
Save
Save
Group
Spacing
Pause
Remark A
12 in
Mode
External Lightbar
LED Brightness
1
Chase
• External Lightbar LED Brightness
If applicable, press
/
to enter in a
number specifying the brightness of the LED lights
on the optional L160 external lightbar. The number
1 is the dimmest and 10 is the brightest. Default is 5.
TRAMLINES
(if enabled on Straight and Identical Curve Pattern types)
Tramlines
Press: Map button > Guidance tab (in Mapping Toolbox) > Setup (wrench) button > Tramlines tab
Tramlines only available with Straight AB and Identical Curve Pattern Types
134
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
to enter the
• Paths to Start Field - use
number of passes at the begining of the field
before the first tramline.
• Guide To: - use drop-down menu to choose
between Paths and Tramlines.
GUIDANCE
• Paths Between Tramlines - use
to enter
the number of passes between tramlines.
Guidance Options
Nudge
Shift
Lightbar
Tramlines
Save
Save
Group
Paths Between Tramlines
1
Paths to Start Field:
1
Pause
Remark A
Guide To:
Adjust Tramline - move the placement of the tramline by one
pass left or right.
Paths
Straight
Adjust Tramline
Use the toggle button to switch menu between Tramline and
Nudge on the Mapping Toolbox.
An audible warning is sounded to alert the operator a Tramline is reached
when the vehicle is ½ a swath width away.
Tramlines are also numbered under the Pass Number. This number will flash
multiple times when the Tramline is reached for a visual warning.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
135
www.4qte.com
136
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
GUIDANCE
ONTRAC2+
GUIDANCE
ONTRAC2+
To ensure proper AutoSteer Operation make sure your GPS source is setup properly.
Complete the following steps to access AutoSteer setup screen:
1. Start the Display.
2. Turn on the Mechanical Drive Unit (MDU) with
On/Off switch (A).
Guidance/Steering
OnTrac 2 Steering
3. Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > GPS Guidance button > OnTrac2 Steering drop-down
> Setup (wrench) button
AUTOSTEER SETUP SCREEN
All instructions for the calibration and setup of the OnTrac2+ start
from the AutoSteer Setup screen.
AutoSteer Setup
System
GPS
My Account
Vehicle
<<<Instructions start from this screen
The AutoSteer Setup screen gives you access to the following
functions:
Vehicle
Setup Wizard
Manage
Vehicle
Steering
Adjust
Steering
Components
Auto Calibrate
configure a vehicle, set up a new vehicle, manage existing vehicles, perform the auto
calibration of a vehicle, perform the steering adjustments, and manage steering
components.
configure and monitor system parameters.
System
status of your GPS corrections. For more information, refer to the Display or GPS operators
manual.
GPS
configure and monitor account parameters.
My Account
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
137
www.4qte.com
To return to the previous screen, press the Back icon. Press the Back icon from the AutoSteer Setup
screen to return to your Display menus.
VEHICLE
Vehicle
Press: Vehicle button
Select the desired vehicle configuration procedure button:
create and calibrate a new vehicle
Setup Wizard
Manage
Vehicle
manage or change selected vehicle
calibrate to achieve optimal AutoSteering.
Auto Calibrate
Steering
Adjust
Steering
Components
adjust steering performance
adjust parameters of steering components, such as the manual steering override kickout
limit, and view diagnostic information for the system components.
SETUP WIZARD
Setup Wizard
Vehicle
Press: Vehicle button > Setup Wizard button
The Setup Wizard is used to create, calibrate, and tune your vehicles with the AutoSteer system. It
ensures that all required steps are performed. To achieve the best possible steering accuracy, you must
setup, calibrate, and tune the system for your specific vehicle.
1. Select vehicle type. Press
.
2. Select vehicle make. If your vehicle make is not listed choose Generic. Press
3. Select vehicle model. Press
.
4. Select vehicle controller type. Press
5. Enter a vehicle name. Press
6. Enter a Wheel Base value.
.
.
.
Press
.
7. Enter Antenna Fore/Aft offset and press either Fore or Aft button.
• Fore indicates the antenna is located in front of the vehicle’s control point.
• Aft indicates the antenna is located behind the vehicle’s control point.
138
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
GUIDANCE
ONTRAC2+
The Control Point of a vehicle is defined as:
• Standard Wheeled Vehicle (MFWD, Floater, Sprayer) - Rear Axle
• Track Vehicle - Center of tracks
• Articulated Tractor - Pivot point of vehicle
• Combine/Swather - Front Axle
Press
.
8. Enter Antenna Lateral Offset. Select Left or Right. Press
.
Note: The Antenna Lateral Offset value is tested and adjusted (if necessary) after vehicle creation
and calibration is complete. Use left or right buttons to indicate if antenna is left or right of the
vehicle’s center. If the antenna is perfectly centered, it does not matter which button is pressed as
long as the measurement is zero.
9. Enter Antenna Height, and then press the checkmark button.
The Wizard now takes you to the Manual Steering Override kickout limit setting procedure. When the
Manual Steering Override calibration is complete, the Setup Wizard starts the Auto Calibrate procedure.
MANAGE VEHICLE
Manage
Vehicle
Vehicle
Press: Vehicle button > Manage Vehicle button
The Manage Vehicle screen enables you to:
select the active vehicle
Select
change vehicle parameters
Edit
delete vehicle
Delete
import and export vehicle profiles
Export/
Import
SELECT
Manage
Vehicle
Select Vehicle
Select
Vehicle
Press: Vehicle button > Manage Vehicle button > Select Vehicle > Select button
To make a vehicle profile the Active Vehicle, select vehicle from list and press the Select button. The
confirmation box will appear. Press the checkmark button and then Back icon to return to the AutoSteer
Setup menu.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
139
www.4qte.com
EDIT
Manage
Vehicle
Select Vehicle
Edit
Vehicle
Press: Vehicle button > Manage Vehicle button > Select Vehicle > Edit button
Select the vehicle from the list and press the Edit button. The wizard will ask for the following items:
• Wheel Base
• Antenna Fore/Aft Offset
- Fore indicates the antenna is located in front of the vehicle’s control point.
- Aft indicates the antenna is located behind the vehicle’s control point.
The Control Point of a vehicle is defined as:
- Standard Wheeled Vehicle (MFWD, Floater, Sprayer) - Rear Axle
- Track Vehicle - Center of tracks
- Articulated Tractor - Pivot point of vehicle
- Combine/Swather - Front Axle
• Antenna Lateral Offset
- Use left or right buttons to indicate if antenna is left or right of the vehicle’s center. If the antenna is
perfectly centered, it does not matter which button is pressed as long as the measurement is zero.
• Antenna Height
If you are satisfied with the changes, press the checkmark button. If you are not satisfied with the
changes, press the X button and return to the Edit Vehicle Wizard.
DELETE
Manage
Vehicle
Select Vehicle
Delete
Vehicle
Press: Vehicle button > Manage Vehicle button > Select Vehicle > Delete button
The Delete button enables you to delete a vehicle. You can not delete the active vehicle. Select the
vehicle from the list, and press the Delete button. Press the checkmark in the Delete Vehicle dialog box.
Press checkmark in the confirmation box and you will return to the Manage Vehicles screen.
EXPORT/IMPORT
Manage
Vehicle
Select Vehicle
Export/
Import
Vehicle
Press: Vehicle button > Manage Vehicle button > Select Vehicle > Export button
The Export/Import button enables you to move vehicle profiles from one AutoSteer system to another.
Note: All AutoSteer systems must be running the same version of firmware to move vehicle profiles
from one system to another. For best results always upgrade all AutoSteer systems to the latest
firmware version prior to importing and exporting vehicles.
140
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
GUIDANCE
ONTRAC2+
Export profile to a USB drive
1. Insert a USB drive into the display.
2. Select the vehicle you want to export, and press Export/Import button.
3. Press the Export to Display USB button.
4. Press the Export button.
- A progress bar appears while the vehicle profile is being exported.
5. When complete, press the checkmark button.
Import profile to a USB drive
1. Insert a USB drive into the display.
2. Press the Export/Import button.
3. Press the Import from Display USB button.
4. Press the Choose File button.
5. Select the vehicle profile you want to import, and press the checkmark button.
6. Press the Import button.
7. When complete, press the checkmark button.
8. The system returns to the Export Vehicle to Display screen. Press the Back icon to return to the
previous menu.
AUTO CALIBRATE
Auto Calibrate
Vehicle
Press: Vehicle button > AutoCalibrate button
The Auto Calibrate procedure takes the vehicle through a series of calibration steps to achieve optimal
AutoSteering. You can pause the calibration at any point during the process.
Note: The Auto Calibrate procedure takes a significant amount of space for your vehicle to operate
within. Depending upon your vehicle size you may need a 100 x 100 yard (91 x 91 meter) area to
complete the Auto Calibrate procedure.
• The vehicle will execute a series of maneuvers during the calibration process including turning left
and right.
Each step of the Calibration Wizard provides specific instructions for area, speed, and RPM. The
calibration steps and time vary according to vehicle type and equipment installed. Follow the onscreen
instructions to perform the auto calibration procedure. The main steps of the calibration procedure are:
• OnTrac2 ECU Orientation: The ECU can only be physically mounted in only four directions for OnTrac2.
It must be flat with the cable connectors facing the front, back, left, or right. This step tells the AutoSteer
system which way the ECU is physically facing in the cab so the internal sensors can orient themselves.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
141
www.4qte.com
• OnTrac2 ECU Tilt Zero Measurements 1 and 2: The ECU has a tilt sensor in it to help take into account
side hills and bumps while the vehicle is AutoSteering. While the vehicle is sitting still on a flat location,
the sensor averages its readings to get an idea of what “level” is. The driver then drives the tractor and
turns it so it is facing the opposite direction at the same location and lets it average itself again. These
two steps allow the system to correct any tilt differences.
• OnTrac2 Minimum Output: This step determines the minimum power needed for the MDU to turn the
steering wheel. This value is critical to ensure proper AutoSteering performance.
Note: All steps of the Auto Calibrate procedure must be completed and the changes saved before
any attempt is made to AutoSteer the vehicle.
• You can press Pause and Resume (or manually turn the steering wheel) at any time during the Auto
Calibrate procedure if needed.
• The correct vehicle must be selected in the Manage Vehicle section prior to calibrating the vehicle. Verify
that the correct vehicle has been selected.
• Your vehicle should be moving at normal operating speed before you begin the Calibration
Verification process.
• The vehicle will execute a series of maneuvers during the Calibration Verification process including
driving in a straight line and slight left and right turns.
• You can press Pause and Resume (or manually turn the steering wheel) at any time during the
Calibration Verification procedure if needed to ensure safe vehicle operation. However, the timer
for the current step is reset each time you press the Pause button.
1. Press the Auto Calibrate button.
2. Press the Right Arrow button.
3. Select the orientation that matches your installation, and then press the Next button.
4. Follow the on-screen prompts for OnTrac2 Tilt Zero Measurements 1 and 2.
5. Follow the on-screen prompts for the OnTrac2 Minimum Output screens.
6. Press the checkmark button to save the calibration data.
7. Drive the vehicle to a location where it can be driven in a straight line for a long distance. Set the speed
of the vehicle within the speed range indicated, and then press the Resume button to begin the Calibration
Verification process. Follow the on-screen prompts to complete the calibration.
8. When the Calibration Verification procedure is complete, press the checkmark button to return to the
Vehicle screen.
9. After the vehicle has been calibrated and verified, you must confirm the accuracy of the lateral offset.
Adjust Lateral Offset
After the vehicle has been calibrated, perform the following procedure. This procedure will detect and
eliminate skips and overlaps due to an incorrect lateral offset.
1. Set an AB line, engage AutoSteering, and AutoSteer for at least 50 yards (46 meters).
2. Stop your vehicle, place it in park, and turn off the AutoSteer system. Use a plumb bob to place a flag
in the ground directly beneath the center of the draw bar.
3. Return to the vehicle, start the AutoSteer system, and engage AutoSteer for at least 50 yards (46
meters) on the same AB line.
4. Disengage AutoSteer, turn the vehicle around, and begin AutoSteering back down the same AB line
in the opposite direction.
142
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
GUIDANCE
6. Check to see if the center of the draw bar is over the flag.
7. If the flag is exactly beneath the center of the draw bar, no adjustment is needed.
8. If not, use a plumb bob to mark the spot directly beneath the draw bar, and then measure the distance
between that spot and the flag.
9. Calculate the Offset Error by dividing the measured distance by 2. (The measurement is divided by
two because taking the measurements driving in opposite directions doubles any error.)
10. Observe the offset of the error from the rear of the vehicle. Take note of whether the 2nd point is to
the left or right of the original flag. If the error is to the right of the original point, the existing Antenna Lateral
Offset must be adjusted to the left by the calculated Offset Error (and vice versa).
11. Go to the Edit Vehicle > Antenna Lateral Offset screen and edit the Antenna Lateral Offset value by
adjusting the existing value and/or changing the offset from Left to Right.
Note: This adjustment may require you to select a different left/right offset direction.
12. Repeat the procedure to ensure that the lateral offset is now correct. If the offset is consistently within
1 to 2 inches (2 to 5 cm) it is correct.
Example:
a. The calculated Offset Error is 2 inches (5 cm) [4 inches (10 cm) / 2 = 2 inches (5cm).
b. The offset direction is to the right.
c. We need to move the point to the left and the original offset was to the right, so we subtract. [5
inches (13 cm) - 2 inches (5 cm) = 3 inches (8 cm)].
d. Enter 3 inches (8 cm) as the Antenna Lateral Offset.
e. The offset direction (Left or Right) does not need to be changed in this case.
STEERING ADJUST
Vehicle
Steering
Adjust
Press: Vehicle button > Steering Adjust button
You can change the response of the following items by using the slider bar.
Steering Response — controls the oscillations of the vehicle when it is on the desired path.
Cross-Track Error — adjusts how aggressively the vehicle reacts to changes in cross-track error.
Line Acquisition — determines how aggressively the system steers onto the desired steering path. The
ideal setting allows the system to take the shortest route without excessively sharp or sudden
movements of the vehicle.
Minimum Motor Output — defines the minimum power needed for the MDU to turn the steering wheel.
The Steering Adjust screen enables you to improve your vehicle AutoSteering performance. You can
change the response rate of the selected item with the screen slide bar:
• The turtle icon indicates slower (smooth) response.
• The rabbit icon indicates faster (aggressive) response.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
143
ONTRAC2+
5. When the vehicle's draw bar reaches the flag, stop the vehicle, place it in park, turn off the AutoSteer
system, and exit the vehicle.
www.4qte.com
STEERING COMPONENTS
Steering
Components
Vehicle
Press: Vehicle button > Steering Components
This screen enables you to adjust steering components. The list of components displayed varies
depending on your individual installation.
OnTrac2 ECU
The OnTrac2 ECU is the box that connects the AutoSteer controller to all AutoSteer sensors and actuators.
The OnTrac2 ECU screen provides indicators showing the ECU firmware version, engaged status, MDU
power status, and communication status.
Manual Steering Override
This setting determines how much force is required to disengage AutoSteering by manually turning the
steering wheel. Try the factory default limit first. If the Manual Steering Override limit is set too low, the
system disengages AutoSteering under normal AutoSteering conditions. If it is set too high, the wheel
requires excessive force before the system disengages.
To adjust the Manual Steering Override:
1. Press the START button and attempt to turn the steering wheel left or right with the factory default
Manual Steering Override value. If the default value works satisfactorily, proceed to Step 3. If you need to
set a new value, proceed to Step 2.
2. If the system does not disengage, press the minus button to lower the Manual Steering Override limit.
If the system disengages too easily, press the plus button to raise the Manual Steering Override limit. Turn
the steering wheel left or right with the new setting until the system disengages properly.
3. Once you are satisfied with the setting, press the Save Limit button to save the Manual Steering
Override limit. The successful save dialog box appears. Press the checkmark button, and then press the
Back button.
Remote Engage Switch
The Remote Engage screen provides an indicator showing whether or not the Remote Engage Switch (if
installed) is working properly. To test the Remote Engage Switch, press the remote engage switch once.
The indicator light should turn green.
MDU
The MDU screen provides a diagnostic test to verify that your MDU (Mechanical Drive Unit) is operating
correctly.
WARNING: Before performing this test, ensure people and objects are clear of the vehicle. When
pressing the command buttons, the wheels move quickly from side to side. Press the STOP button
to halt the wheels.
To test the MDU:
1. From the Steering Components screen, select MDU.
2. Read the warning carefully, and then press the Continue button.
144
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
GUIDANCE
Note: The command buttons control the rate at which the wheels turn left/right.
• Hard Left button — turns wheel left at 100%
• Percent Left button — turns wheels left at amount specified in slider bar
• Zero Percent button — stops wheels from turning
• Percent Right button — turns wheels right the amount specified in the slider bar
• Hard Right button — turns the wheel right at 100%
• Stop button — terminates the Steering Diagnostics procedure
• Steering Left/Right Percentage — changes turning speed (the higher percentage turning faster)
SYSTEM MENU
System
Press: System button
The system menu features the following functions:
monitor system parameters and performance
System Health
save, delete, or reset information in system database and log files
Manage
activate or deactivate optional sensors
Accessories
password protected for use by qualified service technicians only.
Technician
Software
Upgrade
upgrade system with the latest software available.
SYSTEM HEALTH
System Health
System
Press: System button > System Health button
The System Health screen provides diagnostic and status information for various aspects of steering
system. The overview screen displays the status of the components. Select an item for which you want a
detailed status.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
145
ONTRAC2+
3. Use the Steering Command buttons to send the various commands to the MDU. Observe that the
steering wheel behaves according to the specified command.
www.4qte.com
MANAGE SETTINGS
System
Manage
Settings
Press: System button > Manage Settings button
The Manage Settings screen enables you to:
• Save or delete the current log files.
• Save the current database or import a database.
• Reset all the current settings to the default factory settings.
Log Files
The log files contain system data that can be used for diagnostic and troubleshooting purposes.
To copy log files:
1. Insert USB drive into display.
2. Press “Manage Settings” button.
3. Select Log Files.
4. Press “Copy to Display” button.
The log files are saved to the USB drive.
To delete log files:
1. Press the “Manage Settings” button.
2. Select Log Files.
3. Press “Delete” button.
4. Press checkmark button on the Delete Log Files confirmation prompt.
Log files are deleted.
146
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
GUIDANCE
The database contains all the vehicle and system parameter data required for system operation. A
backup of the database can be used to restore existing settings or copy them to a new system.
Note: Backup and restore of the database should not be used to copy vehicle profiles from one unit
to another.
To back up database:
1. Insert USB drive into display.
2. Press “Manage Settings” button.
3. Select database.
4. Press “Backup to Display” button.
The database is saved to the USB drive.
To restore database:
Note: Restoring the database from a USB drive will overwrite the existing database in the AutoSteer
system, replacing all existing information.
1. Insert a USB drive (containing the database you want to restore) into display.
2. Press “Manage Settings” button.
3. Select Database
4. Press “Restore from Display” button.
5. Select database to restore and press checkmark button.
The database is restored on the system.
Reset Factory Default
Note: If this option is selected, all settings will be reset and you will need to create, calibrate, and
tune a new vehicle. Before resetting to defaults, performing a database backup is strongly
recommended.
Reset Factory Default enables you to reset settings and profiles back to the default factory settings
except for the Feature Codes. To reset the settings:
1. Press the “Manage Settings” button.
2. Select Reset Factory Default.
3. Press the “Reset” button.
4. Press the checkmark button.
Current settings set to the default factory settings.
ACCESSORIES
Accessories
System
Press: System button > Accessories button
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
147
ONTRAC2+
Database
www.4qte.com
The Accessories menu is used to activate or deactivate optional sensors. Currently only the remote
engaged switch is available. These options are always displayed when available. Once activated, the
system is aware that the sensor is installed and functional. When options are functional diagnostic
information is gathered and any malfunction of the sensor is reported through the diagnostic manager. If
the sensor is removed warnings and errors are reported until the sensor is deactivated in the system.
Note: The Remote Engage Switch is an optional device that allows AutoSteer to be engaged from
a device such as a foot switch or push button instead of pushing the Engage button on the display.
A Remote Engage Switch must be activated in the Accessories menu.
Remote Engage Switch
Press the Enable button to activate the Remote Engage Switch. The Remote Engage Switch enabled
screen appears. To disable the Remote Engage Switch at a later time, return to the screen and press the
Disable button.
TECHNICIAN
Technician
System
Press: System button > Technician button
The Technician screen is password protected for use by qualified service technicians only.
SOFTWARE UPGRADE
Software
Upgrade
System
Press: System button > Software Upgrade button
The Software Upgrade screen enables you to upgrade your system with the latest application software:
1. Insert a USB drive (containing software upgrade) into Display.
2. Press Software Upgrade button.
3. Press Choose File button.
4. Select the desired software from list and press checkmark.
The upgrade process goes through a series of steps and reboots the AutoSteer system after a successful
upgrade.
5. Press checkmark button after the upgrade is complete.
The AutoSteer system is now ready for normal operation.
GPS DIAGNOSTICS
GPS
Diagnostics
GPS
Press: GPS button > GPS Diagnostics button
The GPS Diagnostics screen displays the following operational parameters:
148
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
GUIDANCE
• PDOP (Positional Dilution of Precision) — measure of the strength of the satellite configuration. When
visible GPS satellites are close together in the sky, the geometry is weak and the DOP value is high;
when far apart, the geometry is strong and the DOP value is low. Thus a low DOP value represents a
better GPS positional accuracy.
• Heading — heading of the vehicle in degrees
• Height — vehicle’s altitude above sea level
• # of satellites — number of satellites being tracked by the receiver
• Vehicle Position — latitude and longitude of the vehicle
DETAILS
Details
My Account
Press: My Account button > Details button
The Details button gives access to information about components installed on the system. Select the
item for which you want to view details and the information about the selected item appears.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
149
ONTRAC2+
• GPS Mode parameter — current GPS mode of the receiver.
www.4qte.com
150
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
TILLAGE
TILLAGE
TILLAGE
CREATE TILLAGE CONFIGURATION
Tillage
Configuration
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > Configuration (tractor) button > Configuration tab > Add
(+) button > Tillage button
1. Select Vehicle
Use drop-down menu to choose a vehicle, or press
continue.
to enter a new vehicle. Press
to
2. Select Implement
Select an implement from the drop-down list menu, or press
to create a new implement. Press
to continue.
3. Select Speed Source
Use drop-down menu to select Primary Source, set Backup Source, and Auxiliary Channel. Press
Calibrate Speed Sensor to launch the Speed Sensor Calibration Wizard.
4. Enter Configuration Name
A suggested name for the configuration appears. If desired, press
your configuration. Press
to enter a different name for
when complete.
Your Operating Configuration will then be viewable when you start a new Field Operation with the Field
Operation Wizard.
CONFIGURATION SETUP
Configuration
Select Your Specific
Configuration
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > Configuration (tractor) button > Configuration tab > select
your specific configuration > Setup (wrench) button
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
151
www.4qte.com
The Configuration Setup screen appears. The
appearance of this screen will vary depending upon
your particular operating configuration.
Configuration Setup
Vehicle
Massey Ferguson
1
Massey Ferguson, Tillage
Vehicle
Offsets
Implement: Tillage
Controller: None
30 ft
Full Swath:
1
Sections:
Speed
Input
Auxiliary
Input
Equipment
Settings
Offsets
Depending upon your particular configuration, this process may include the following tasks:
1. Equipment Settings
Adjust Implement Switch Settings (if using an implement switch). For more information, see “Equipment
Settings” on page 71.
2. Speed Input Setup
For more information, see “Speed Input Settings” on page 72.
3. Calibrate Distance
For more information, see “Calibrate Distance” on page 73.
4. GPS Offsets
For more information, see “Vehicle Offsets” on page 77.
5. Swath Section Offsets
For more information, see “Swath Section Offsets” on page 78.
LOAD CONFIGURATION
Press: Select Event button.
Select Event
Select a Season, Grower, Farm, and
Field on the Management Selection
screen.
For more information, see “Setup Event” on page 45.
RUN CONFIGURATION
Once a configuration has been completed, the Map View button appears at the bottom of the
Home screen. Press the Map View button to see the Map screen.
152
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
TILLAGE
• (A) GPS Status
No Product
0.11 ac
5.0 mph
Coverage
• (B) Total Field Acres
Coverage
Overlap
• (C) Ground Speed
• (D) Diagnostics button
• (E) Map Legend
• (F) Logging Status button
• (G) AutoSwath
• (H) Map View button
• (I) Home button
Once a configuration has been completed, the Map View button appears at the bottom of the Home
screen. Press the Map View button, and the map screen appears.
Note: Pressing the Map View button will cycle between the available map screen views, and the appearance
of the Map View button changes. For additional information on Map screen items, see “Run screens” on
page 47.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
153
www.4qte.com
154
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
PLANTING
CREATE PLANTING
CONFIGURATION
Most of the functionality of the display is not available until the basic setup process is completed.
You must complete these initial configuration steps for the Map screen to be active:
1. Create and Setup an Equipment Configuration
2. Product setup
3. Grower, Farm, and Field management
4. Select Event
CREATE EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION
Configuration
Planting
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > Configuration (tractor) button > Configuration tab > Add
(+) button > Planting button
A wizard will then guide you through the process of creating a configuration using the following steps:
1. Select Vehicle
Select an existing Vehicle from the drop-down menu, or press
Vehicle Setup Wizard. Press
and create a new vehicle with the
to continue.
2. Select Implement
Press
to create a new implement.
3. Select Implement Type
From the top drop-down menu, select the Planter/Seeder Type setting. Press
to continue.
4. Enter Make and Model
Press
to enter implement make and model.
5. Select Attachment Type
Choose Rear Drawbar or Rear Lift Arms from drop-down menu.
6. Enter Distance from Hitch to Application Point
Press
to enter the distance from the implement hitch to the application point (from front to back).
When finished, press
to continue.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
155
CREATE PLANTING CONFIGURATION
PLANTING
PLANTING
www.4qte.com
7. Select Implement Options
• Split Rows Enabled
Check this box to enable the display to log data from the planter’s Split Row units. (For split row-enabled
planters, you will need to create separate implement configurations for Split Row and non-Split Row
operations).
• Planter Section Clutch Control
Check the Planter Section Clutch Control check box if you are using Row Shutoff module.
8. Rate Controller
Select an existing rate controller from the drop-down menu, or press
with the Controller Setup Wizard. Press
and create a new controller
to continue.
Controller Wizard:
Select Device: Seed Command
Select Device Type:
- Hydraulic Controller
- Stepper Controller
- Granular Strip Till Controller
Enter Number of drives
Enter Controller Name
9. Enter Number of Rows and Spacing.
Use
continue.
/
to enter the number of rows. Press
and enter spacing. Press
to
10. (AutoSwath Only) Number of Implement Sections
Enter the number of swath sections that can be independently turned on and off.
Note: The Clutch Module Configuration must match the actual number of row sections on the planter.
Otherwise, if you try to load a Field Operation at the Field Operation Wizard, you will see a message stating
that “The number of detected module outputs does not equal the number of planter sections.”
11. (AutoSwath Only) Enter Section Widths from Left to Right
Enter how many rows are in each swath section from left to right screen appears. This screen shows the
number of sections and number of rows in your configuration. From here you can:
- Press
to continue., or
- Highlight the section number, and use
to continue.
to change the section row numbers; then press
Note: The implement is divided up into equal section sizes by default. To modify the sections, press the
keypad button for each section that needs to be changed.
12. Add Liquid or Granular Application
13. Enter Implement Name
Press
to enter an Implement Name, Press
to complete Implement Wizard.
You will now be returned to the Operation Configuration Wizard.
156
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
PLANTING
15. Select Planting Method
16. Select Speed Source
Use drop-down menu to select Primary Source, set Backup Source, and configure Auxiliary Channel.
Press Calibrate Speed Sensor to launch the Speed Sensor Calibration Wizard.
17. Enter Configuration Name
A suggested name for the configuration appears. If desired, Press
your configuration. Press
to enter a different name for
when complete.
The complete configuration should now appear on the Configuration Setup screen and is now able to be
selected when starting a new Field Operation.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
157
CREATE PLANTING CONFIGURATION
14. Select Implement
Select Implement from drop-down menu.
www.4qte.com
158
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
PLANTING
AUTOSWATH
ROW SHUTOFF
Create an Implement configuration with Row Shutoff by following the procedure in “Create Planting
Configuration” on page 155. By configuring your display with Row Shutoff, you can start and stop seed flow
and control planter sections row-by-row, allowing AutoSwath Control to automatically turn planter row
units on and off based on your planting map.
See “Map Options” on page 51 for more information on using reference maps for AutoSwath.
CONFIGURATION SETUP
Once the configuration is created and it appears on the Configuration Setup screen, AutoSwath should
be configured correctly. However, if you cannot get the configuration to load on the Field Operation
Wizard, or if your vehicle does not appear on the Map screen, you may wish to check if the row clutches
have been correctly set up in Implement Setup. Use the following procedure to enable Seed Row Shutoff
and/or configure the Clutch Module.
Configuration
Select Your Specific
Configuration
Row Shutoff
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > Configuration (tractor) button > Configuration tab > your
specific configuration > Setup (wrench) button > Row Shutoff button
The Row Shutoff Module Configuration screen appears. This screen shows the number of Row Shutoff
Modules and the sections that each module controls.
ROW SHUTOFF LOOK-AHEAD NUMBERS
This table references the Turn-On Look-Ahead and Turn-Off Look-Ahead numbers for both Electric
Clutch and Air Row Shutoff Modules.
Planter Unit Seed Meter Type
On/Off
Electric Clutch
Air Clutch
Turn On
0.9
1.1
Turn Off
0.3
0.3
Turn On
0.9
1.1
Turn Off
0.4
0.4
Finger Units
Vacuum
Note: Using the above settings should produce good field results. However, always take the time to check for
proper seed placement in the field and make system setting adjustments as needed. Do not rely solely upon
the appearance of the On-Screen map. The on screen map will not show gaps and overlaps caused by
incorrect GPS Offsets or AutoSwath Look-Ahead settings.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
159
AUTOSWATH
PLANTING
www.4qte.com
AUTOMATIC AUTOSWATH CONTROL
Select Your Specific
Configuration
Configuration
Automatic
Swath Control
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > Configuration (tractor) button > Configuration tab > select
your specific configuration > Setup (wrench) button > Automatic Swath Control button
The Automatic Swath Control feature turns sections
off and on automatically based upon the following
conditions:
• Entering and exiting internal and outer field
boundaries.
Automatic Swath Control
Planting
Outside Boundary Option
Coverage Option
Look-Ahead
Settings
Keep Unchanged
Minimize Skip
Turn Section Off
Minimize Overlap
• Entering and exiting previously-applied areas
within a field.
User Defined
100 %
• Outside Boundary Option
Select one of the two options to determine system behavior when a section exits a field boundary.
• Coverage Option
In the Coverage Option area, you must choose between three options:
- The Minimize Skip option turns off the implement section after the entire section is fully inside your
coverage area. This prevents the possibility of skips.
- The Minimize Overlap option turns off the implement section when that section first enters your
coverage area. This prevents the possibility of overlaps.
- The User Defined option allows you to choose what percentage of the implement section is within the
coverage area before that section turns off. For example, if you choose 50%, then the section will
switch off when half of it is within your coverage area.
Look-Ahead Settings
AutoSwath Control settings are saved per controller per configuration. There can be different look-ahead
settings saved for equipment of the same operation. The Look-Ahead Settings screen will contain every
controller’s look-aheads.
On the AutoSwath Control screen, press the Look-Ahead button.
160
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
PLANTING
Look Ahead Settings
Planting
Row Shutoff
Turn-On
1.1 s
Turn-Off
0.4 s
• Turn-Off
This setting determines how far ahead the system
looks to turn the sections off. This setting
compensates for delay in the product control system
when the sections are turned off.
Note: To use AutoSwath for planting operations, you are required to use a 5 Hz or higher GPS output rate.
AutoSwath control will not allow sections to be turned on until the master and planting section switches are
on. If you have less than a 5 Hz GPS output rate and you select AutoSwath, a warning appears, telling you
that AutoSwath Control is not available at less than 5 Hz.
CHECKING AUTOSWATH PERFORMANCE FOR ROW SHUTOFF
The settings given in the above AutoSwath look-ahead table shown previously have been tested with
each clutch and seed meter combination to work for your planter. However, always take the time to
check for proper seed placement in the field and make system setting adjustments as needed. Do not
rely solely upon the appearance of the On-Screen map. The on screen map will not show gaps and
overlaps caused by incorrect GPS Offsets or AutoSwath Look-Ahead settings. Verify settings with the
following procedure:
1. Stop the planter within 20 feet of the planted headland.
2. Select one row unit from each planter swath section to observe.
3. Remove the down pressure from the closing wheel of each selected row unit.
4. Hold the closing wheels off the ground by attaching a chain or strap from the hopper support panel to
the closing wheel arm. (This prevents the closing wheels from closing the seed trench).
Securing these closing wheels up allows you to observe the planted seed in the trench so that you can
observe when the AutoSwath is turned off and on during the seed application.
5. Resume planting in your normal fashion, then stop when you are 20 feet out of the headland of the
next pass.
6. Stop the planter and observe the AutoSwath shutting off and turning on to see if the results are
acceptable.
• If the results are correct, then return the closing wheels to their previous operational state. Close the seed
trench on the observed rows and return to planting.
• If you suspect the results are incorrect, then adjust the appropriate look-ahead setting one-tenth (.1)
second per trial. When making changes to the look-ahead settings, make sure to adjust these settings
only one-tenth (.1) second per trial. Larger adjustments can cause unintentional large changes in the
AutoSwath’s performance. When adjusting the look-ahead numbers from the suggested settings, it is
recommended that you observe multiple trials to confirm the operations’ accuracy.
• If you encounter overplanting or underplanting problems, see “Fixing Overplanting and Underplanting in
AutoSwath” on page 162.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
161
AUTOSWATH
• Turn-On
This setting determines how far ahead the system
looks to turn the sections back on. This setting
compensates for delay in the planting control
system when the implement sections are turned on.
www.4qte.com
FIXING OVERPLANTING AND UNDERPLANTING IN AUTOSWATH
AutoSwath Function — Turn Off Look Ahead
Problem — Underplanting
Recommended Action — Decrease look-ahead number
Result — The AutoSwath anticipates headlands later and turns the planter off later.
Problem — Overplanting
Recommended Action — Increase look-ahead number
Result — The AutoSwath anticipates headlands sooner and turns the planter off sooner.
AutoSwath Function — Turn On Look Ahead
Problem — Underplanting
Recommended Action — Increase look-ahead number
Result — The AutoSwath anticipates headlands sooner and turns the planter on sooner.
Problem — Overplanting
Recommended Action — Decrease look-ahead number
Result — The AutoSwath anticipates headlands later and turns the planter on later.
162
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
PLANTING
RATE CONTROL
HYDRAULIC SEED RATE CONTROL
The Hydraulic Seed Control Module allows operators to control up to three hydraulic motor drives with
the display. Configure the Hydraulic Seed Rate Control module in the following order.
1. Configure Hydraulic Seed Rate Control module
See “Create Planting Configuration” on page 155.
2. Enter Controller Settings
Include the Max Meter Speed, Gear Ratio and Minimum Allowable Ground Speed. See “Controller Settings
for Hydraulic Seed Rate Motor Drives” on page 163.
3. Prime the Hydraulic Seed Meter
Fill seed meter with seed to avoid skips. See “Priming Seed Rate Meters” on page 173.
4. Meter Calibration
- a. Enter Meter Calibration Number. This number, representing seeds per revolution, is set according to
the number of seed dropped per one revolution of the seed meter. For more information, “Calibrating
Seed Rate Meters” on page 173.
- b. Perform a Seed Meter Calibration. A new calibration should be performed if as-applied seed rate
does not match actual population planted. See, “Calibrating Seed Rate Meters” on page 173.
CONTROLLER SETTINGS FOR HYDRAULIC SEED RATE MOTOR
DRIVES
After creating an Operating Configuration for the Hydraulic Seed Meter Controller, make settings
changes in the Controller Settings screen, which shows valve settings for hydraulic flow and pulses per
revolution.
Configuration
Select Your Specific
Configuration
Controller
Settings
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > Configuration (tractor) button > Configuration tab > your
specific configuration > Setup (wrench) button > Controller Settings button
The Controller Settings screen consists of at least two tabs: the Channel Tabs, shown for each channel
being controlled; and the Auxiliary Tab.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
163
RATE CONTROL
PLANTING
www.4qte.com
Channel Tab settings
• Gear Ratio
Ratio of the revolutions of the hydraulic drive as
compared to one revolution of the seed meter.
• Shaft Speed Calibration
Calibration number representing the pulses that
equal one revolution of the hydraulic motor.
• Maximum Meter Speed
Setting determines the maximum RPM of the seed
meter.
Controller Settings
Channel 1
Channel 2
Auxiliary
Gear Ratio
1.533
Allowable
Error
Shaft Speed
Calibration
360 pls/rev
Control Valve
Settings
2%
Maximum
Meter Speed
150 rpm
• Allowable Error
Determines the percent of error that is allowed prior
to the product control system making any flow rate
changes.
• Control Valve Settings
This button summons the Control Valve Settings screen. The appearance of the Control Valve Settings
screen varies, depending upon whether planter’s control valves are PWM Valves or Servo Valves.
Control Valve Settings - PWM
• PWM Frequency
The frequency at which the PWM control valve is
pulsed. Settings can be found from the
manufacturer of the valve.
• PWM Gain
Determines how aggressively the control valve
responds when making rate change adjustments.
The higher the value the more aggressive the
system response.
Controller Valve Settings
Control Valve PWM
PWM Frequency
200
PWM Gain
130
Zero Flow Offset
33
• Zero Flow Offset
Represents the maximum duty cycle that is sent to
the control valve without producing any hydraulic
flow from the PWM valve. Using too high of a Zero
Flow Offset value can cause the product control system to not properly control flow rates at low rates. See
the PWM valve manufacturer’s information for recommended settings.
164
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
PLANTING
RATE CONTROL
Control Valve Settings - Servo
Controller Valve Settings
• Valve Response 1
Determines the speed of the servo valve when
product control error exceeds the Response
Threshold setting.
Control Valve Servo
Valve
Response 1
Valve
Response 2
Response Threshold
15
• Valve Response 2
Determines the speed of the servo valve when
product control error is less than the Response
Threshold setting.
40 %
8%
• Response Threshold
Determines the system responsiveness to rate
change.
Auxiliary Tab settings
• Minimum Ground Speed
The display will simulate this specific ground speed
when either the jump start switch is pressed or the
motion detection sensor disengages. This fixed
ground speed setting compensates for delays in
acquiring an initial ground speed when starting from
a stand still. The setting determines the target seed
meter RPM when the setting is active.
Controller Settings
Channel 1
Auxiliary
Minimum Ground Speed
Rate Not
Responding Time
2 mph
4s
Rate Not Responding
Threshold
30 %
• Rate Not Responding Threshold
The percentage of seed rate error that triggers the alarms.
• Rate Not Responding Time
The amount of time that the error occurs before the alarm sounds.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
165
www.4qte.com
HYDRAULIC SEED CONTROLLER SETTINGS FOR SPECIFIC
PLANTERS
Pulses/Rev.
Gear Ratio
Zero Flow Offset
PWM Gain
PWM Frequency
Planter brand
Control Valve Configuration
Note: The settings, provided below, should be a good starting point for controller settings. However, always
take the time to calibrate the seed meters, check for proper seed placement in the field, and make system
setting adjustments as needed. Do not rely solely upon the appearance of the On-Screen map. The on screen
map will not show gaps and overlaps caused by incorrect GPS Offsets or AutoSwath Look-Ahead settings.
2.374 (chain)
John Deere Planters
PWM
175
110
40
2.417
(ProShaft)
360
White Planters
PWM
200
90
30
5.5
360
Case IH Planters
PWM
100
90
40
6.803
360
166
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
PLANTING
Prior to calibrating the Hydraulic Seed Meter, the numbers that appear in the Meter Calibration box in the
Planter Control window should be similar to the numbers that appear below. If they are not, the seed
meter may be working incorrectly, or the Gear Ratio may be incorrect. Contact Technical Support for
further assistance.
Note: Check the operator’s manual for more specific information on other seed disk options.
Corn
Soybeans
Cotton
Standard
Rate
Sorghum
Vacuum: Standard
30
108
64
45
Vacuum: ProMAX™
40
Vacuum: Precision Planting eSet®
30
Vacuum: VenHuizen AccuVac Kit
40
Mechanical: Finger
12
80
80
Planter brand and type
John Deere
Mechanical: Brush Meter
56
Case IH
Vacuum
48
130
Cyclo®
36
240
EdgeVac®
39
60
54
60
Mechanical: Finger
12
60
30
60
30
60
Mechanical: Standard
12
110
120
102
Mechanical: Twin Row
6
100
KINZE
White
Great Plains
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
135
167
RATE CONTROL
HYDRAULIC SEED METER CALIBRATION NUMBERS
www.4qte.com
STEPPER SEED RATE CONTROL
The Stepper Seed Control module allows Rawson ACCU-RATE Variable Rate Controller to control up to
three hydraulic motor drives via the display. Configure the Stepper Seed Rate Control module in the
following order.
1. Configure Stepper Seed Rate Control module
See “Create Planting Configuration” on page 155.
2. Enter Controller Settings
Included the Max Meter Speed, Gear Ratio and Minimum Allowable Ground Speed.
See “Controller Settings for Stepper Seed Rate Motor Drives” on page 168.
3. Prime the Stepper Seed Meter
This fills the seed meter with seed to avoid skips.
See “Priming Seed Rate Meters” on page 173.
4. Meter Calibration
- a. Enter Meter Calibration Number. This number, representing seeds per revolution, is set according to
the number of seeds dropped per one revolution of the seed meter. See “Calibrating Seed Rate
Meters” on page 173.
- b. Perform a Seed Meter Calibration. A new calibration should be performed if the as-applied seed rate
does not match the actual population planted. See “Calibrating Seed Rate Meters” on page 173.
CONTROLLER SETTINGS FOR STEPPER SEED RATE MOTOR DRIVES
Stepper Controller Settings should be set before entering a meter calibration number or performing field
operations.
Configuration
Select Your Specific
Configuration
Controller
Settings
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > Configuration (tractor) button > Configuration tab > your
specific configuration > Setup (wrench) button > Controller Settings button
Each channel is displayed with its own tab. Auxiliary Tab allows adjustment of the Minimum Allowable
Ground Speed.
168
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
PLANTING
RATE CONTROL
Channel Tabs
Controller Settings
• Max Meter Speed
This number represents the maximum
recommended RPM of the seed meter, and is
specified by the manufacturer. A warning appears if
this threshold is exceeded.
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Auxiliary
Max Meter Speed
150 rpm
Gear Ratio
2
• Gear Ratio
The ratio of the revolutions of the hydraulic drive to
turn the seed meter one revolution.
Auxiliary Tab
Controller Settings
• Minimum Allowable Ground Speed
The display will simulate this specific ground speed
when either the jump start switch is pressed or the
motion detection sensor engages. This fixed ground
speed setting compensates for delays in acquiring
an initial ground speed when starting from a stand
still. The setting determines the target seed meter
RPM when the setting is active.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Auxiliary
Minimum Allowable
Ground Speed
2 mph
169
www.4qte.com
GEAR RATIO CALCULATIONS FOR SEED RATE MOTORS
The Gear Ratio is a setting that appears on the Controller Tab for the Stepper Seed Meter Motor Drive.
It is the ratio of the revolutions of the hydraulic drive as compared to one revolution of the seed meter.
This setting is used to determine how fast the Stepper Seed Rate Motor should operate to achieve the
proper RPM of the seed meter during planting operations.
To manually enter a Gear Ratio in the Controller Settings window, calculate the Gear Ratio based on
information provided below and on the following pages. The Gear Ratio number is calculated by
multiplying all the gear ratio combinations, from the Seed Rate Drive Motor to the Seed Meter.
Note: Gear Ratio number is the number of revolutions of the motor to turn the seed meter one revolution.
Gear Ratio Drawing - For Single Motor Drive
Seed Rate Drive Setting (Calculating drive gear ratio)
• (A) Seed Rate Motor (Drive) 18 Tooth Sprocket
• (B) Planter Drive Shaft Sprocket (Driven) 29 Tooth Sprocket
# of Teeth on the Driven Sprocket
= Gear Ratio
# of Teeth on the Drive Sprocket
*Each drive combination (Driven/Drive) from Seed Rate Motor Drive to Seed Meter shaft sprocket
needs to be factored for the Total Gear Ratio.
170
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
PLANTING
Seed Rate Drive Setting
RATE CONTROL
Gear Ratio Drawing - For Multiple Drive Combinations
(Calculating a Gear Ration for Multiple Drive Combinations)
Planter Drive Shaft
Sprocket (Drive)
(19 Tooth Sprocket)
Planter Drive Shaft
Sprocket (Driven)
(28 Tooth Sprocket)
Seed Rate Motor (Drive)
(18 Tooth Sprocket)
Drive Ratio 2
Drive
Ratio 1
Planter Drive Shaft
Sprocket (Driven)
(29 Tooth Sprocket)
29
28
X
18
19
Driven/Drive 1
X
Planter Drive
Sprocket
X
= 2.3743
342
Driven/Drive 2
= Gear Ratio
Seed Meter Shaft
Seed Rate Motor
Driven/Drive 1
812
=
= Gear Ratio
Planter Drive Shaft
X
Driven/Drive 2
Carry the Decimal place to the nearest 0.001 for accurate results.
Seed Ratio Calculation Example Procedure
The example outlined below assumes a single planter drive motor. Step 5 notes that this process has
multiple steps for more than one Stepper Seed Motor Drives.
1. Beginning with the Seed Rate Motor, count the number of teeth on the drive sprocket. Then count the
number of teeth on the driven sprocket.
2. Divide the number of teeth on the driven sprocket by the number of teeth on the drive sprocket. This
is the ratio of the Seed Rate motor.
3. Repeat the process for each sprocket combination in the drive system back to the meter.
4. Take the ratio of the Seed Rate Motor and multiply it by the ratio of the other sprocket combinations.
5. Repeat this process for multiple hydraulic drives. Enter the gear ratio for each motor under the
appropriate tab.
Note: Enter the number into the other channels for additional motor drives if they have the same total gear
ratio.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
171
www.4qte.com
Gear Ratio Drawing Shaft Drives
Seed Rate Drive Setting.
Table: Shaft Ratio 2
Planter Brand
Driven
Drive
Case IH Planters
2
2
John Deere Planters
3
2
White Planters
11
5
Note: These values are for the shaft only. Drive/Driven value
between the Seed Rate Motor and Planter Drive Sprocket must
still be determined.
Seed Rate Motor (Drive)
(18 Tooth Sprocket)
Planter Drive Shaft
Sprocket (Drive)
(19 Tooth Sprocket)
Planter Drive Shaft
Sprocket (Driven)
(28 Tooth Sprocket)
Planter Drive
Shaft
Sprocket
(Driven)
(29 Tooth
Sprocket)
29
28
X
18
Driven/Drive 1
X
Planter Drive
Sprocket
X
Gear
Ratio
2.374
rpm
= 2.3743
342
= Gear Ratio
Seed Meter Shaft
Seed Rate Motor
Driven/Drive 1
Driven/Drive 2
150
812
=
19
Max Meter
Speed
= Gear Ratio
Planter Drive Shaft
X
Driven/Drive 2
Carry the Decimal place to the nearest 0.001 for accurate results.
If determining shaft ratios for any shaft not listed in the table above, rotate input shaft (driver) 10 times.
Count how many times the output (driven) shaft turns. Divide the number of turns of the input shaft by
the number of turns of the output shaft.
172
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
PLANTING
This example assumes a single drive motor. Step 5 notes that this process has multiple steps for more
than one hydraulic drive.
1. Beginning with the Seed Rate Motor, count the number of teeth on the drive sprocket. Then count the
number of teeth on the driven sprocket.
2. Divide the number of teeth on the driven sprocket by the number of teeth on the drive sprocket. This
is the ratio of the Seed Rate motor.
3. Repeat the process for each sprocket combination in the drive system back to the meter. See “Table:
Shaft Ratio 2” on page 172.
4. Take the ratio of the Seed Rate Motor and multiply it by the ratio of the other sprocket combinations.
5. Repeat this process for multiple hydraulic drives. Enter gear ratio for each motor under the appropriate
tab.
Note: Enter the number into the other channels for additional motor drives if they have the same total gear
ratio.
PLANTER OPTIONS SCREEN
Planter Drives (rpm)
1
70
Planter Drives
Press: Map button > Meter RPM button > Planter Drives tab
PRIMING SEED RATE METERS
The Seed Meter Prime is used to charge the seed meter when filling with seed.
Planter Drives (rpm)
1
70
Planter Drives
Press: Map button > Meter RPM button > Planter Drives > Prime Seed Meter button
A message displays, stating “Seed Meter Prime in Progress.” While this message displays, the seed
meter will turn one (and only one) revolution automatically. When complete, return to the Seed Rate
Planter Control screen.
CALIBRATING SEED RATE METERS
The Meter Calibration number allows the seed meter to communicate the correct seed population to the
display. Assuming the Controller Settings are correct for the seed rate, this Meter Calibration number,
which is based on the number of cells on the seed meter, should not need to be adjusted. However, you
may wish to recalibrate after changing seed types and treatments.
Notes:
• The seed rate meter calibration does not recalibrate any previously-logged planting data.
• This recalibration number applies to a specific crop type, i.e., corn. Normally, there is no need to
recalibrate when switching varieties within the same crop type.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
173
RATE CONTROL
Seed Ratio Calculation Example Procedure for Shaft Drives
www.4qte.com
• Make sure seed meter is primed. For more information, See “Priming Seed Rate Meters” above.
Planter Drives (rpm)
1
70
Calibrate
Planter Drives
Press: Map button > Meter RPM button > Planter Drives > Calibrate button
1. Acknowledge the Warning
Acknowledge this warning by pressing
.
2. Select Drive to Calibrate
The Meter Calibration Wizard appears. Select the drive to calibrate. Press
to continue.
3. Enter Simulated Ground Speed
Enter the simulated ground speed for the calibration procedure. Press
to continue.
4. Enter Simulated Target Rate
Enter the simulated target rate of the calibration procedure. Press
to continue.
5. Press Start
Press the green-colored Start button to begin dispensing the seed.
6. Dispensing Seed
The seed meter turns for five revolutions. As the seed meter dispenses seed, the button will change its color
to red, and a message displays that the seed dispensation is in process.
7. Seed Dispensing Complete
When the meter is finished dispensing seed, the button will change back to its original green color, and will
once again display the word Start. Press
to continue.
8. Enter Number of Dispensed Seeds
Press
to enter the number of dispensed seeds. Press
to continue.
Note: The meter calibration will be calculated from the actual seed amount dispensed.
RATE CONTROL: MAP SCREEN
Corn
The map screen displays a twosection SeedCommand
configuration running a Variable Rate Control configuration
that includes three Hydraulic Seed drives, and also Row
Shutoff with AutoSwath. Because the configuration is for a
split-planting operation with three varieties, these three
varieties are shown with different colors on the map.
38.4 ac
92B12
C1966
C1291
sds/ac
32000
30000
Varieties
S46R1
sds/ac
2
30000
30000
30000
Flow:
40 ft 0 in
Planter Drives (rpm)
2
1
110
104
174
1
32000
40 ft 0 in
5280 sds/min
100%
100%
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
PLANTING
PRODUCT CONTROL TOOLBOX
During SeedCommand Run Time operations, the Product Tabs are
shown in the upper right-hand side of the Map screen. Press the
Product Tabs, and an extended view shows the Rate buttons, Manual
Valve Control button, Prescription button, Rate increase and decrease
arrows
/
described below.
, and the Rate Setup button, all of which are
92B12
sds/ac
32000
32000
30000
S46R1
• (A) Variety
The Product Control Toolbox can show rates for multiple varieties,
depending upon the particular planting configuration. Press the area of
the box that shows a particular variety, and a green bar highlights that
variety. The Rate 1 and Rate 2 are then shown on the Rate buttons.
30000
sds/ac
30000
30000
Flow:
5280 sds/min
Applied:
501644.0 sds
Area:
19.17 ac
• (B) Target Rate
• (C) Actual Rate
Two items, Target Rate and Actual Rate, appear on each Product Tab shown in the Product Control
Toolbox. The Target Rate is the desired planting rate. The Actual Rate is communicated by the shaft
rotation sensor.
Note: In some conditions, the Actual Rate may increment slower than the Target Rate, or its numeric values
may vary before matching the Target Rate.
• (D) Manual Valve Control
The Manual Valve Control button allows operators to specify the position of the control
valve. Operators use this option to clean out equipment at the end of the day.
• (E) Prescription button
For more information, see “Loading Prescriptions” on page 176.
• (F) Rate 1 button
• (G) Rate 2 button
These only appear on Hydraulic Drive or Stepper Seed Meter configurations. The
Rate 1 and Rate 2 settings represent preset planting rates that allow operators to quickly change
between desired planting rates for each individual product. The active rate button appears with a gray
background behind it. In the example above, Rate 1 is active.
• (H) Rate Increase arrow
• (I) Rate Decrease arrow
Pressing once on
/
Control Settings screen.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
increments the rate according to the user-defined amount on the Rate
175
RATE CONTROL
Note: The Rate buttons in the Product Control Toolbox at top right are explained in “Product Control Toolbox”
on page 175.
www.4qte.com
• (J) Rate Setup button
The Rate Setup button opens the Rate Control Settings screen, described at “Rate Control
Settings” on page 176.
RATE CONTROL SETTINGS
Press to adjust the Rate 1 and Rate 2 settings shown at the Product Control Toolbox on the
Map screen, as well as import planting prescriptions. To access the Rate Control Settings
screen, press the Rate Setup button on the Product Control Toolbox.
The Rate Control Settings screen appears.
• The top drop-down menu selects a specific variety
for rate control. This drop-down menu shows all
of the varieties that entered in Product Setup. For
more information, see “Product tab” on page 22.
Rate Control Settings
Rate Control
1222 (sds)
Rate 1:
Rate 2:
33000
Increment:
Minimum Flow
Rx
0 sds/min
1000
32000
1222 (sds)
• The Rate 1 and Rate 2 settings represent preset
application rates that allow operators to quickly
change between desired target rates for each
Rate 1:
Rate 2:
33000
Minimum Flow
Rx
0 sds/min
1000
1222 (sds)
Rate 1:
individual product. Press
desired amount.
Increment:
32000
to enter the
Rate 2:
33000
Increment:
Minimum Flow
Rx
0 sds/min
1000
32000
• The Increment button allows operators to specify
the increase or decrease amounts for a specified
rate when using
/
on the Product
Control Toolbox. Press
to enter the desired increment.
• To load a map-based prescription file, press the Prescription button.
LOADING PRESCRIPTIONS
Press: Map button > Rate Setup button in the Product Control Toolbox > Load Prescription button
The Rate Control Settings screen appears.
1. Press the Load Prescription button.
2. The File Selection screen appears.
3. Highlight the correct .AGSETUP (prescription) or
File Selection
Name
irx multi product
.shp (shape) file and press
.
4. Return to the Rate Control Settings screen, the
Prescription rate is now shown on the screen. The
Load Prescription button has disappeared and in its
place is the Remove Prescription button, which
resembles a minus sign. Press the Remove
Prescription button to remove the prescription from the
field.
176
irx single product
Demo dry DAP 175default.i
No Preview
Demo dry K 0default.irx
Demo dry N 100default.irx
Demo dry NH3 0 default.irx
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
PLANTING
On the Map screen’s Mapping Toolbox, press the Legend Setup (wrench) tool and the Legend
Select screen appears. Notice that the Rx (prescription) button appears at this screen.
1. Press the Rx button to show a legend of the
prescription rate.
Legend Select
S46R1
Varieties
Rate
Rx
Clear Map
Load
References
2. After pressing the Rx button, the prescription rate appears on the Legend. This legend is not editable.
TROUBLESHOOTING
The Troubleshooting Section consists of the following pages:
• “Fixing Overplanting and Underplanting in AutoSwath” on page 162.
• “Hydraulic Seed Control: Zero Flow Offset Variation” on page 177.
• “Stepper Seed Control Meter Alarms” on page 178.
• “Alarms on KINZE Planter Monitor” on page 217.
HYDRAULIC SEED CONTROL: ZERO FLOW OFFSET VARIATION
Zero flow offset is an operator-entered setting. Zero Flow Offset represents the maximum duty cycle that
is sent to the control valve without producing any hydraulic flow from the PWM valve. Using too high of a
Zero Flow Offset value can cause the product control system to not properly control low rates. Zero flow
offset may vary somewhat by system and by operating conditions. On the tables on the following pages,
problems and causes relating to Zero Flow Offset are listed. Use the Confirmation Techniques to
determine if this is a problem; and then follow the appropriate solution.
Error Message: Drive is slow to begin turning.
Possible Cause: Zero Flow Offset is set too low.
Confirmation Technique:
a. Turn the Master Switch off. Enter a manual ground speed and enter a new region.
b. From the Run screen, open the product application rate window, and highlight the appropriate
product. Select Manual control mode.
c. Switch the Master Switch on.
d. Press the up button one time. Now press the down button one time. If the drive is not turning, the
Zero Flow Offset is likely to be too low.
Solution:
a. Turn the Master Switch off. Enter a manual ground speed and create a new region.
b. Increase Zero Flow Offset by 2.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
177
RATE CONTROL
SHOWING PRESCRIPTIONS ON THE MAP SCREEN
www.4qte.com
c. From the Run screen, open the product application rate window, and highlight the appropriate
product. Select Manual control mode.
d. Switch the Master Switch on.
e. Press the up button one time. Now press the down button one time. The drive should be turning. If
not, repeat this procedure starting with Step b.
HYDRAULIC SEED CONTROL: ZERO FLOW OFFSET VARIATION
Error Message: Hydraulic drive not shutting off properly, or minimum controllable speed is greater than
specified.
Possible Cause: Zero Flow Offset is set too high.
Confirmation Technique:
a. Turn the Master Switch off. Enter a manual ground speed and create a new region.
b. From the Run screen, open the product application rate window, and highlight the appropriate
product. Select Manual control mode.
c. Switch the Master Switch on.
d. Press the up button one time. Now press the down button three times. If the drive is still turning, the
zero flow offset is likely to be too high.
Solution:
a. Turn the Master Switch off. Enter a manual ground speed and enter a new region.
b. Reduce Zero Flow Offset by 2.
c. From the Run screen, open the product application rate window, and highlight the appropriate
product. Select Manual control mode.
d. Switch the Master Switch on.
e. Press the up button one time. Now press the down button three times. The drive should not be
turning. If it is, repeat this procedure, starting with step b.
Note: Zero Flow Offset should never be less than 25. If 25 still seems as if this number is too high, there must
be some other problem. Contact Technical Support for further assistance.
STEPPER SEED CONTROL METER ALARMS
Error Message: “Drive Out of Synch Error Drive #”
Possible Cause: Not enough hydraulic fluid is flowing to the seed meter.
Solution: Examine the stepper seed drive’s hydraulic components for restrictions. Make
sure the tractor’s hydraulic outlet is turned on. Make sure the hydraulic flow settings are
correct.
Error Message: “Drive Stalled Drive #”
Possible Cause: The hydraulic drive motor has stopped rotating.
Solution: Check the stepper seed motor to see if it is restricted from turning, and that the
hydraulic drive is working.
Error Message: “Meter Not Moving - Drive #”
Possible Cause: Either the Seed Meter Calibration failed, or the Seed Meter Prime failed
Solution: Make sure that the tractor’s hydraulic outlet is turned on.
Error Message: “Seed Drive at Maximum RPM Drive #”
Possible Cause: Starting the priming routine when the hydraulic motor is not on
Solution: - Slow the planter unit’s ground speed. - Reduce the Planting Target Rate.
178
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
PLANTING
PLANTING
PLANTING MAP SCREEN - ZOOM TO EXTENT
• (A) GPS Status
No Product
38.4 ac
5.0 mph
C1209
Coverage
• (B) Total Field Acres
Coverage
• (C) On-screen Lightbar
• (D) Ground Speed
• (E) Diagnostics button
• (F) Productivity tab (Variety)
• (G) Master Switch indicator
• (H) AutoSwath
• (I) Map View button
• (J) Home button
• (K) Map Legend (Varieties)
Notes:
• Pressing the Map View button will cycle between the available map screen views, and the appearance of
the Map View button changes.
• At the Zoom to Extent map view, the Map Legend shows varieties.
PLANTING MAP SCREEN - ZOOM DETAIL
• (A) GPS Status
No Product
38.4 ac
5.0 mph
C1209
Coverage
• (B) Total Field Acres
Coverage
Overlap
• (C) On-screen Lightbar
• (D) Ground Speed
• (E) Diagnostics button
• (F) Productivity tab (Variety)
• (G) Logging Status button
• (H) AutoSwath
• (I) Map View button
• (J) Home button
• (K) Map Legend (Coverage)
When the Map screen is shown in Zoom Detail, the Vehicle Icon appears as a gold triangle, rather than
an arrow.
LEGEND SETUP
During Planting operations, the Map screen displays two types of items in the Legend: Coverage and
Varieties. The Variety Legend is only accessible in the Zoom to Extent view.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
179
www.4qte.com
Pressing the area under the seed varieties on the Map Legend Tab of the Mapping Toolbox opens the
Legend Setup screen.
A list of the varieties shown on the Run screen map
appears on the left-hand side of the Legend Setup
screen. To change the color of one of these
varieties, highlight that variety and then press a color
on the color palette at right. Press
finished.
when
Legend Setup
C1966
C1291
For SeedCommand (rate control) configuration,
press Rate to show the Rate Legend in the Mapping
Toolbox. The rate map displays the actual rate being
applied. This legend is editable. For more
information, see “Legend Settings” on page 52.
180
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
APPLICATION
LIQUID RATE CONTROL
DirectCommand allows the variable rate application of single or multiple liquid products. Follow the
procedure below to create an operating configuration.
CREATE CONFIGURATION
Application
Configuration
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > Configuration (tractor) button > Configuration tab > Add
(+) button > Application button
1. Select Vehicle
Use drop-down menu to choose a vehicle, or press
continue.
to enter a new vehicle. Press
to
Note: If selecting Self-Propelled Sprayer from the drop-down menu skip steps 2 and 4.
2. Select Implement
Select an implement from the drop-down list menu, or press
to create a new implement. Press
to continue.
3. Enter Implement Make and Model
Press
to enter Make and Model name. Press
to continue.
4. Select Implement Attachment Type
Use the drop-down list to select an implement attachment method. Press
to continue.
5. Enter Hitch to Implement Axle Distance
Press
to enter the hitch to implement axle distance. Press
to accept.
6. Add Sprayer Functionality
Press
Liquid
Application
to add sprayer functionality to the implement.
7. Select Controller
Use the drop-down menu to select a controller or press
continue.
to add a controller. Press
to
8. Assign Container Name
Container names default to Main Tank. Press
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
to enter a new name if desired.
181
LIQUID RATE CONTROL
APPLICATION
APPLICATION
www.4qte.com
9. Assign Container Capacity
Press
to enter the container capacity. Press
to accept.
10. Enter Container Units
Use the drop-down menu to select the container units.
Once container has been configured press
to continue.
11. Enter Swath Width
Press
to enter swath width.
12. Enter Number of Boom Sections
Press
/
to enter number of boom sections.
13. Enter Boom Section Widths
Highlight specific boom section and press
sections must equal swath width.
to enter boom width. The total width of all boom
14. Enter Application Point Offset
Press
to enter distance from hitch to application point (front to back). Press
value on offset screen. Press
to accept
to accept value for the application point.
Note: If setting up a Self-Propelled Applicator, enter the distance from rear axle to application point.
Use drop-down menu to select distance Behind or In Front.
Note: At this point additional functionality can be added to the implement, such as direct injection.
If no additional functionality is being added, press
to continue.
15. Add Additional Devices (optional)
Press
Norac UC5
to add boom control functionality.
16. Enter Hitch Point Offsets
Press check box if implement provides a hitch point. Press
menu to enter “to the left” or “to the right”. Press
to enter distance and drop-down
to enter distance Forward or Backward. Press
to continue.
17. Enter Implement Name
Press
to enter a name for the implement. Press
to continue.
18. Select Implement.
Press
to continue.
19. Select Second Implement.
Use drop-down menu to select Implement or press
182
to add second implement.
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
APPLICATION
21. Enter Configuration Name
A suggested name for the configuration appears. If desired, Press
Press
to enter a different name.
when complete.
The complete configuration should now appear under the Application heading located on the
Configuration tab of the Configuration Setup screen.
The Operating Configuration is now able to be selected when starting a new Field Operation with the
Field Operation Wizard. For more information, see “Setup Event” on page 45.
IMPLEMENT OFFSETS
Configuration
Select Your Specific
Configuration
Offsets
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > Configuration (tractor) button > Configuration tab > your
specific configuration > Setup (wrench) button >Offsets button
Implement Offsets screen appears, with each
channel’s settings shown on its own tab.
Defaults to the value entered during Configuration
Wizard
Boom sections can independently be offset forward
or back (application only)
Press
to access Swath Section
Offsets screen.
Select Swath section to edit and press Edit button.
Enter Offset for that specific section and
Forward/Backward from rear axle.
Press
to enter change.
Setup will indicate which offset is entered
Global (All sections have the
same offset)
Individual (At least one section
has a different offset)
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
183
LIQUID RATE CONTROL
20. Select Speed Source
Use drop-down menu to select Primary Source, set Backup Source, and configure Auxiliary Channel.
Press Calibrate Speed Sensor to launch the Speed Sensor Calibration Wizard.
www.4qte.com
Runscreen reflects section offsets
CONTROLLER SETTINGS
Configuration
Select Your Specific
Configuration
Controller Settings
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > Configuration (tractor) button > Configuration tab > your
specific configuration > Setup (wrench) button >Controller Settings button
Controller Settings screen appears, with each channel’s settings shown on its own tab.
Note: Use the Manage Equipment button to view a list of specific vehicles and implements.
CREATING PRODUCTS
Creating application products and product templates can be completed during initial setup or from the
Product Selection screen of the Field Operation Wizard when starting a field operation.
CREATING SINGLE PRODUCTS
To create a single product, to be added to a product template or to be applied by itself, use the onscreen wizard described in the following steps.
Product
Application
Product
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > Configuration (tractor) button > Product tab > Add (+)
button > Application Product button
1. Select Product Type
Use drop-down menu to select Product Type.
Press
to continue.
2. Select Product Units
184
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
APPLICATION
LIQUID RATE CONTROL
Press
to continue.
3. Enter EPA Product Number (Optional)
Check box if product is a Restricted Use Pesticide
Press
to continue.
4. Enter Manufacturer name if applicable.
- Manufacturer name can be added to the drop-down menu by pressing
5. Press
Press
to enter a unique name for the product.
to complete the process of setting up the product or press
to return to
Configuration Setup screen without adding a product.
Created product should appear under the Application heading located on the Product tab of the
Configuration Setup screen.
CREATING PRODUCT TEMPLATE
Product Templates are set up by using the on-screen wizard described in the following steps.
Note: Prior to making a new product template, it is recommended to add the individual products to the list
in the units recommended by the chemical label.
It is recommended to create product templates that contain the products applied for a crop type or time
of the season.
Examples are:
• Pre-Emerge Burndown
• Post-Emerge Corn
• Post-Emerge Beans
• Insecticide
• Fungicide
In each template the products can be checked on/off for the mix when loaded at the run screen.
Note: Prior to making a new product template, it is recommended to add the individual products to the list in
the units recommended by the chemical label.
It is recommended to create product templates that contain the products applied for a crop type or time of the
season. Examples are:
- Pre-Emerge Burndown
- Post-Emerge Corn
- Post-Emerge Beans
- Insecticide
- Fungicide
In each template the products can be checked on/off for the mix when loaded at the run screen.
Product
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
Mix / Blend
185
www.4qte.com
1. Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > Configuration (tractor) button > Product tab > Add (+)
button > Mix/Blend button
2. From the Type drop-down menu select Tank Mix
From the Define By drop-down menu select:
• Total amounts - mix/blend defined by amounts added to the tank (total of each product in tank)
• Rate/acre - mix/blend defined by the amounts applied per acre (rate of each product applied/area)
Press
to continue.
3. Set Base Amount or Rate by pressing
to enter amount.
4. Enter a Base Amount and Units.
- Total Amounts - Tank/Bin Size
- Rate/Acre - For Rate Applied per Acre
Press
to continue.
5. Select Carrier from drop-down menu.
Press
to create a new carrier.
6. Press
mix.
by the Add Mix/Blend Contents box to start the process of adding components to the
7. Select the desired component from the drop-down menu.
More than 7 products can be part of a template but 7 or fewer can be active at the same time.
A new product can be set up at this time by pressing
Press
and following the Product Setup Wizard.
to add selected product or press
to return to Add Mix/Blend screen without adding
a product.
8. Press
to add an additional component.
9. When all components have been added press
.
10. Enter Manufacturer name if applicable.
- Manufacturer name can be added to the drop-down menu by pressing
11. Press
Press
to enter a unique name for the mix/blend.
to complete the process of setting up the mix/blend or press
to return to
Configuration Setup screen without adding a mix.
The product mix/blend should appear under the Application heading located on the Product tab of the
Configuration Setup screen.
Represents Product Templates
186
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
APPLICATION
LOAD CONFIGURATION
1. Press: Select Event button.
Select Event
Select a Season, Grower, Farm, and
Field on the Management Selection
screen. For more information, see
“Setup Event” on page 45.
2. Product Selection
Select product from the drop-down list or press
to create a new one.
3. Configure Product Mix
When using a product template, the mix contents
and amounts are defined at the map screen by:
-a.activating or de-activating products
-b.changing rate or total amount of a product
-c.changing total amount of the product or overall rate of
product application
These values can be changed on the Configure
Product Mix screen which is available in the event
setup wizard or by pressing a product line on the
home screen.
A product can not be active with a rate of zero.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
187
LIQUID RATE CONTROL
Represents Product Mixes prior to firmware version 5.4 and mixes exported from SMS
www.4qte.com
Product Selection
DC COM10K
DL1
Crop Sensor
Boom Control
Active
Active
28% UAN
Select Product
Active
If a configuration is loaded with undetected modules,
the Product Selection screen may show some
grayed out (unavailable) options. The example to the
left shows that the Direct Command module is active
but Direct Injection, Crop Sensor, and Boom Control
modules are grayed out and not functional.
Active
When all product mixes have been configured press
.
4. Select Region and Controlling Product
Select Region from drop-down menu or use press
keyboard button to name region.
Select Controlling Product for the Mix/Blend.
Press
to complete the process of setting up
the dry blend or press
to return to Home screen
without setting up an event.
MIX CALCULATOR
When a product template is setup using rate/area, the mix calculator can be used to show how much of
each product to put in the tank when the user enters the desired amount to fill.
188
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
APPLICATION
C12
0.0 lb/ac
0.0 lb
0.0 ac
Corn Post
0.0 lb/ac
0.0 lb
0.0 ac
Select a product for each channel.
Press
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
to continue.
189
LIQUID RATE CONTROL
Press in the product information section
of the home screen.
www.4qte.com
For product templates, select which
products to make active within the
template.
Press calculator to access the Mix
Calculator screen.
Press the Volume to Calculate button
and input the total volume.
Table will give user the amount of each
product to put in the tank.
CONFIGURATION SETUP
Configuration
Select Your Specific
Configuration
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > Configuration (tractor) button > Configuration tab > your
specific configuration > Setup (wrench) button
190
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
APPLICATION
Vehicle
1
JD 4630
Vehicle
Offsets
2
Controller: DirectLiquid
Implement: JD 4630
80 ft
Full Swath:
Sections:
5
Serial Number: 2003750001
DirectCommand
Device:
Type:
Liquid
Flow Meter Cal (pls/gal)
inf
Speed
Input
Auxiliary
Input
Automatic
Swath Control
Equipment
Settings
Crop
Sensor
Norac
UC5
Calibrate
Pressure
Offsets
Controller
Settings
Configuration Settings:
• Adjust Implement Switch Settings (for area logging)
If using an implement switch in a area logging planting operation, adjust the Implement Switch Settings. For
more information, see “Equipment Settings” on page 71.
• Adjust Equipment Settings (for Rate Control)
DirectCommand configurations should adjust settings at the Equipment Configuration Settings screen. For
more information, see “Equipment Settings” on page 71.
• Speed Input Setup
For more information, see “Speed Input Settings”
on page 72.
• Calibrate Distance
For more information, see “Calibrate Distance” on page 73.
• AutoSwath settings (if using AutoSwath)
For more information, see “AutoSwath” on page 76.
• GPS Offsets
Adjust GPS offsets for the Antenna Tab and the Hitch Tab. For more information, see “Vehicle Offsets” on
page 77.
• Swath Section Offsets
For more information, see “Swath Section Offsets” on page 78.
HARDI SAFE TRACK
Configuration
Select Your Specific
Configuration
Offsets
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > Configuration (tractor) button > Configuration tab > your
specific configuration > Setup (wrench) button > Offsets button
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
191
LIQUID RATE CONTROL
The Configuration Setup screen appears. Screen
will vary depending on configuration. Process may
include the following tasks:
Configuration Setup
www.4qte.com
When using Hardi ISOBUS, Implement Modeling
can be set to Hardi SafeTrack. This allows display to
accurately calculate path of sprayer.
Implement Offsets: Hardi CM6000
Implement
Liquid with Hardi ISOBUS
Implement Modeling
Hitch to Axle
Distance
Implement Type
Heading
Aggressiveness
20 ft
Hardi SafeTrack
2
Hardi SafeTrack Modeling is utilized by the display
with SafeTrack is engaged on the machine.
Implement Rear Hitch
Implement Provides a Rear Hitch
Lateral Offset from Centerline
Front Hitch to Rear Hitch
0 ft
0 ft
Left
LIQUID APPLICATION CONTROLLER SETTINGS
Configuration
Select Your Specific
Configuration
Controller Settings
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > Configuration (tractor) button > Configuration tab > your
specific configuration > Setup (wrench) button > Controller Settings button
Controller Settings
Flow Meter Calibration
120 pls/gal
Flow Control Delay
0s
Rate Off
Rate Error Alarm
Flow Control Valve
Threshold
Hole
Auxiliary Valve 1
Close
30 %
T
h
e
Controller Settings screen appears.
Timeout
5s
Auxiliary Valve 2
Control Valve
Settings
Close
Make the following adjustments:
• Flow Meter Calibration
Calibration value representing the number of pulses that equal one-gallon of product flow through the
controlling system.
• Flow Control Delay
Setting that specifies a period of time from master switch on and the start of product application to the first
flow control correction. This setting can be used to eliminate unwanted correction of flow control at the start
of each pass. Typical setting values are 1 –2 seconds for liquid application control.
192
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
APPLICATION
• Close Flow Control Valve When Rate Off
When this is selected, the controlling system shuts down when there is either a zero rate in the field or when
entering an already-applied area. When unchecked, the controlling system remains in the last known state
when the sections are shut off.
• Auxiliary Valve 1 & 2
When all boom sections are off, this setting closes or opens an auxiliary valve. Choose settings for up to
two auxiliary valves.
• Allowable Error
Determines the percent of error that is allowed prior to the product control system making any flow rate
changes.
• Threshhold
The user-defined percentage of actual rate error allowed before an alarm sounds.
• Timeout
The number of seconds that an actual rate falls out of the error threshold before an alarm sounds.
Control Valve Settings - PWM
Control Valve Settings
Control Valve:
PWM 12 volt
PWM Frequency
PWM Gain
PWM Standby
Zero Flow Offset
100
800
Allowable
Error
• PWM Frequency
The frequency that the PWM control valve is
pulsed at. Settings can be found from the
manufacturer of the valve. Typical settings
range from 100-125 Hz.
2%
50
30
Note: See PWM valve manufacturer information for recommended settings.
• PWM Gain
Determines how aggressively the control valve responds when making rate change adjustments. The
higher the value the more aggressive the system response is.
• Zero Flow Offset
Represents the maximum duty cycle that is sent to the control valve without producing any hydraulic flow
from the PWM valve. Using too high of a Zero Flow Offset value can cause the product control system to
not properly control low rates. See the PWM valve manufacturer information for recommended settings.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
193
LIQUID RATE CONTROL
• Control Valve Settings
Opens the Control Valve Settings screen, which displays control valve settings for PWM, Servo, Calibrated
Reflow and Ramsey Valve Controls. For more information, see below or for more settings see “Control Valve
Settings - Servo, Calibrated Reflow and Ramsey Valve” on page 194.
www.4qte.com
• PWM Standby
This is a user-defined setting that determines the percent duty cycle the system uses when the booms are
all off. The setting must be greater than the Zero Flow Offset.
Note: The current PWM Duty Cycle can be viewed at the Liquid Diagnostics screen. For more information,
see “Liquid Application Diagnostics” on page 203
Control Valve Settings - Servo, Calibrated Reflow and Ramsey Valve
Control Valve Settings
Control Valve:
Inline Servo
Valve
Response 1
Valve
Response 2
24
100
Allowable
Error
2%
• Valve Response 1
Determines the speed of the servo valve when
product control error exceeds the Response
Threshold setting. The default for this setting is
100%. Decreasing the value will cause the servo
valve to run slower. Valve Response 1
represents the fast speed of the servo valve.
Response Threshold
• Valve Response 2
Determines the speed of the servo valve when
product control error is less than the Response
Threshold setting. The default for this setting is
24%. Decreasing the value will cause the servo
valve to run slower. Valve Response 2
represents the slow speed of the servo valve.
3 gal/min
• Response Threshold
Determines where the control channel switches between using Valve Response 1 and Valve Response 2
speed settings. The default setting is 3. Leaving all other valve control settings at the default value and
making a small adjustment to this setting is usually all that is required to fine-tune system performance.
- Decreasing this value will have the overall effect of speeding up servo valve response.
- Increasing this value will have the overall effect of slowing servo valve response.
Calibrate Pressure
Configuration
Select Your Specific
Configuration
Calibrate Pressure
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > Configuration (tractor) button > Configuration tab > select
your specific configuration > Setup (wrench) button > Calibrate Pressure button
Choose Main, Agitation or Aux from drop-down box. Press
to continue.
Press
continue.
to enter pressure value as a set point or press Reset to Default button. Press
Press
to enter voltage/pressure ratio. Press
Press
to finish process.
194
to
to continue.
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
APPLICATION
Control fence row nozzles through the DirectCommand system by mapping the switches in Auxiliary
Input Settings. Fence row nozzles can be mapped to any switch.
Configuration
Left Fence Row
or
Select Your Specific
Configuration
Auxiliary Input
Right Fence Row
Assign
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > Configuration (tractor) button > Configuration tab > select
your specific configuration > Setup (wrench) button > Auxiliary Input button > Assign button > Left Fence
Row or Right Fence Row. For more information on Auxiliary Input Settings, see “Auxiliary Input” on
page 74.
38.4 ac
5.0 mph
Valmax
fl oz/ac
20
20
After specifying Fence Row Nozzle settings at the
Auxiliary Input Assignment screen, the Fence Row
Nozzle Indicators (A), which are shaped like
triangles, appear on either side of the sections behind
the vehicle icon.
Pressure (PSI)
Main
41
Auxiliary
43
Agitation
47
Notes:
If a switch is selected as a Left or Right Fence Row Nozzle, the system sends power out of Boom Pin 11
for the left fence row, and Boom Pin 12 for the right fence row.
The boom sections next to the fence row nozzles must be turned on before the fence row nozzle can be
turned on.
LOAD CONFIGURATION
Press: Select Event button.
Select Event
Select a Season, Grower, Farm, and
Field on the Management Selection
screen.
For more information, see “Setup Event” on page 45.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
195
LIQUID RATE CONTROL
FENCE ROW NOZZLE INDICATORS
www.4qte.com
RUN CONFIGURATION
Once a configuration has been completed, the Map View button appears at the bottom of the
Home screen. Press the Map View button to see the Map screen. The map below is displayed
in Zoom to Detail view.
APPLICATION MAP SCREEN - ZOOM TO DETAIL
38.4 ac
5.0 mph
f
20
20
• (A) GPS Status
• (B) Ground Covered
• (C) Ground Speed
• (D) Diagnostics button
• (E) Product tab
• (F) Master Switch
Pressure (PSI)
Main
Auxiliary
41
43
Agitation
• (G) AutoSwath
• (H) Map View button
• (I) Home button
• (J) Display Legend
LEGEND
SELECT
Press: Home button > Legend tab (of the Mapping Toolbox) > Setup (wrench) button
During Area Logging Application operations, the Map screen displays coverage in the Legend.
Legend Select
NH3
Coverage
Clear Map
Load
Reference
Use the drop-down menu at the top to select your
product. Other items at this screen include:
• Press Coverage to show the area where you have
already applied a product.
• If using a DirectCommand or rate logging configuration,
press Rate to show the Rate Legend in the Mapping
Toolbox. The rate map displays the actual rate being
applied. This legend is editable. For more information,
see “Legend Settings” on page 52.
• Press Clear Map to permanently remove all map data
from the active field operation.
• Press Load Reference to load a map from a previous operation performed in that field to view as a
background map.
196
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
APPLICATION
NH3
During DirectCommand Run Time operations, the Product
Tabs are shown in the upper right-hand side of the Map screen.
Press the Product Tabs, and an extended view shows the Rate
buttons, Manual Valve Control button, Prescription button, Rate
1
150
150.00
150.00
2
135
ExTran
Increase and Rate Decrease arrows
/
, and the
Rate Setup button, all of which are described below.
75.00
75.00
• (A) Product
Flow:
99.6 lb/min
Applied:
43.1 lb
Area:
0.29 ac
Container:
160 ft3
• (B) Target Rate
• (C) Actual Rate
• (D) Rate 1 button
• (E) Rate 2 button
• (F) Manual Valve Control
• (G) Prescription button
• (H) Rate Increase arrow
• (I) Rate Decrease arrow
• (J) Rate Setup button
• Target Rate
The Target Rate is desired application rate.
Note: In some conditions, the Target Rate may increment more quickly than the Actual Rate.
• Actual Rate
The Flow Sensor returns the actual rate being applied.
Note: In some conditions, the Actual Rate may increment slower than the Target Rate, or its numeric values
may vary before matching the Target Rate.
• Container Level
The Container Level shows the amount of product in the container. For more information, see “Container
Level Settings” on page 199.
• Rate 1 and Rate 2 buttons
The Rate 1 and Rate 2 settings represent preset application rates that allow operators to
quickly change between desired target rates for each individual product.
• Manual Valve Control button
The Manual Valve Control button allows operators to specify the position of the control
valve. Operators use this option to prime the system before application or clean out the
equipment at the end of the day.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
197
LIQUID RATE CONTROL
RATE CONTROL: PRODUCT CONTROL TOOLBOX
www.4qte.com
• Rate Increase and Decrease Arrows
allow Product Application Rate to be changed according to the Target Rate Increment. In
/
using manual valve control, the increase and decrease buttons allow the position of the control valve to be
defined by the operator.
• Prescription button
For more information, see “Loading Prescriptions” on page 200.
• Rate Setup button
For more information, see “Rate Control Settings” on page 198.
RATE CONTROL SETTINGS
Adjust the Rate 1 and Rate 2 settings shown at the Product Control Toolbox on the Map
screen, as well as import application product prescriptions. To access the Rate Control Settings
screen, press the Rate Setup button on the Product Control Toolbox. The Rate Control Settings
screen appears.
Rate Control Settings
Rate Control
Rx
• Rate 1 and Rate 2
The Rate 1 and Rate 2 settings represent preset
application rates that allow operators to quickly change
between desired target rates for each individual product.
Rx
Press
Rx
• Increment
The Increment button allows operators to specify the
increase or decrease amounts for a specified rate by
Containers
Product 1
Rate 1
0.00
Rate 2
0.00
Increment
0.00
Minimum Flow
0.00
Product 2
Rate 1
0.00
Rate 2
0.00
Increment
0.00
Minimum Flow
Product 3
Rate 1
0.00
Rate 2
0.00
Increment
0.00
to enter the desired amount.
0.00
Minimum Flow
0.00
using
Press
/
on the Product Control Toolbox.
to enter the desired increment.
• Prescription
To load a map-based prescription file, press the
Prescription button. For more information, see “Loading
Prescriptions” on page 200.
• Minimum Flow
(Used for DirectCommand Liquid Applications only).
This setting is used to maintain a consistent spray
pattern. The display will not allow flow to drop below the
entered setting. Set to flow at the lowest operating
pressure for the selected spray tips with all sections on.
When spraying with one or more boom sections off, the
system automatically reduces the minimum flow setting
according to the reduced spray width. To adjust this
setting, press
value.
198
and enter the desired numeric
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
APPLICATION
Rate Control Settings
Rate Control
Containers
Tank 1 - Product 1
Full:
800
Current:
700
80
10 %
When filling or emptying container, use the
Container Level portion of the Rate Control Settings
screen to update the amount of product in the
containers.
Container Level screen - (Partially Full)
Tank 2 - Product 2
Full:
400
Current:
400
40
10 %
Tank 3 - Product 3
Full:
200
Current:
200
20
10 %
Tank Fill
The Tank Fill button increases the container level logged in the display to the user-defined
maximum volume (specified in the Container Setup Wizard).
Tank Empty
The Tank Empty button decreases the container level logged in the display to zero.
Tank Partial Fill
The Tank Partial Fill button increases the container level logged in the display to specific
amount that you specify by pressing
Adjust Container Amount screen.
. Pressing the Partial Fill button summons the
Adjust Container Amount
Adjust Container Amount
Add
Add product to the container
Remove
Remove product from the container
Set
Set the product level in the container
• Add
Adds product to the container. Press
the amount.
to enter
• Remove
Removes product from the container. Press
enter the amount.
to
• Set
Sets the product level in the container. This button
summons the
, where you can set a certain
amount. Choose an amount that is below your maximum
container level.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
199
LIQUID RATE CONTROL
CONTAINER LEVEL SETTINGS
www.4qte.com
Tank Alarms
The Container Alarm button, which appears at the bottom of the Container Level portion of
the Rate screen, displays the capacity of your tank as well as the percentage at which the
Low Container Level warning will sound. To adjust these settings, press the button and the Container
Alarm screen appears.
100 gal
10 %
Container Alarm
Capacity
1000 gal
%
10
gal
If you wish to adjust your container level warnings,
use the following buttons on the right-hand side of
the Container Alarm screen to make these
adjustments.
Clear
7
8
9
4
5
6
1
2
3
0
.
+/-
• The percentage (%) button sets the warning threshold
according to the percentage of solution left in the tank.
In the example above, the threshold is set at 10 percent.
• The units of measurement icon sets the warning threshold according to the amount of solution left in the
tank. This icon is named according to the container’s units of measurement you specified during the
Controller configuration procedure.
• The Disable Low Container Level button, which appears as a bell with a red slash across
it, disables the Low Container Level warning.
LOADING PRESCRIPTIONS
To load a map-based prescription file, press the Rate Setup button on the Product Control
Toolbox.
The Rate Control Settings screen appears.
Rate Control Settings
Rate Control
Containers
Product 1
Rate 1
0.00
Rate 2
0.00
Increment
0.00
Minimum Flow
Rx
0.00
Product 2
Rate 1
0.00
Rate 2
0.00
Increment
0.00
Minimum Flow
Rx
0.00
Product 3
Rate 2
0.00
0.00
Increment
0.00
Minimum Flow
Rx
0.00
1. Press the Load Prescription button.
200
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
APPLICATION
Name
Field:
Product 1:
Product 2:
Product 3:
Product 4:
Product 5:
Autopilot_dry.irx
demo_2_liquid.irx
demo_2_liquid_3_dry.irx
demo_3_liquid,irx
demo_3dry_1liq.irx
Demo Field
Planting
Application
SW 1/4
32% UAN
Balance Flexx
Roundup
-
3. Highlight the correct .AGSETUP (prescription) or
.shp (shape) file and press
.
4. When you return to the Rate Control Settings
screen, the prescription rate is now shown on the
screen. The Load Prescription button has
disappeared and in its place is the Remove
Prescription button, which resembles a minus sign.
Press the Remove Prescription button if you wish to
remove the prescription from the field.
5. When you return to the Map screen, the prescription is now shown on the map.
SHOWING PRESCRIPTIONS ON THE MAP SCREEN
On the Map screen’s Mapping Toolbox, press the Legend Setup (wrench) tool and the
Legend Select screen appears. Notice that the Rx (prescription) button appears at this
screen.
Legend Select
Glyphosate
1. Press the Rx button to show a legend of the prescription
rate.
Rate
Rx
Clear Map
Load
Reference
2. After pressing the Rx button, when you return to the Map screen, the prescription rate appears on the
Prescription Rate Legend. This legend is not editable.
SHAPE FILE CONVERSION
What is commonly called a shape file is actually a collection of three different files. All three of the files
are required and must be present on the USB drive for the system to use shape file groups for variable
rate product application. A single "shape file" can contain recommendation rates for multiple products.
To begin, press the Rate Setup button on the Product Control Toolbox.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
201
LIQUID RATE CONTROL
2. The File Selection screen appears.
File Selection
www.4qte.com
The Rate Control Settings screen appears.
Rate Control Settings
ExTran
Rate 1:
10.00
Rate 2:
8.00
Increment:
1.00
Full:
800 gal
Current:
770 gal
Prescription:
MInimum Flow:
80 gal
0
10 %
1. Open File Selection screen.
Press the Load Prescription button.
2. The File Selection screen appears. Highlight your
File Selection
Name
Field:
Product 1:
Product 2:
Product 3:
Product 4:
Product 5:
Autopilot_dry.irx
demo_2_liquid.irx
3 mi
32% UAN
Balance Flexx
Roundup
desired .shp file and press
.
-
demo_2_liquid_3_dry.irx
demo_3_liquid,irx
demo_3dry_1liq.irx
Demo Field
Planting
Application
Note: Select the product and units that the shape file prescription was made for.
Select Prescription
Product: NH3
Column Preview
Column
NH3
140
Units
135
gallons
130
Default Rate
125
50
202
3. Select Data From Shape File
Select the column that contains the product
recommendation rate. The list on the right side of the
dialog shows sample data from the selected column.
120
4. Select Units
Select the controlling units for product application.
5. Default Rate Setting
The system assigns a default rate. Use the on-screen
keypad to edit the value if desired.
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
APPLICATION
Note: The only time the default rate is used by the system during product application is if the Rate Outside of
Field selection is set to " Rx default". This setting is located in the equipment configuration settings portion of
configuration setup. If the Rate Outside of Field selection is set to "Rx default", the default target rate will be
used when the vehicle exits the area covered in the prescription map.
LIQUID APPLICATION DIAGNOSTICS
To go to the Liquid Diagnostics screen, press on the Device Information button. At the
Devices screen, highlight the item marked DC Liquid then press the Diagnostics button.
Liquid Diagnostics
DirectLiquid
Controller Name
Serial Number
2003750001
Main Pressure (kPa)
Agitation Pressure (kPa)
Auxiliary Pressure (kPa)
PWM Duty Cycle (%)
Flow Meter Signal Frequency (Hz)
Fow Meter Pulse Count
738
662
655
2.55
0
0
The Liquid Diagnostics screen includes
the Active Controller Name and the
Serial Number of the module. Other
information provided includes the Main
Pressure, Agitation Pressure, and
Auxiliary Pressure. These raw sensor
readings are shown in kilopascals (kPa).
Note: If you selected PWM as the Control Valve then the current PWM Duty Cycle is shown as a percentage
number, in the PWM Duty Cycle (%) item on the Liquid Diagnostic screen.
• Flow Meter Signal Frequency (Hz)
View the frequency generated by the flow meter during product application. Use this to make sure the flow
meter is providing continuous feedback.
• Flow Meter Pulse Count
provides a rolling count of pulses generated from the flow meter during product application. This diagnostic
item can be used to easily check that the flow meter is providing feedback to the system and also provides
a way to check flow meter cabling without changing settings within the system setup.
TROUBLESHOOTING DIRECTCOMMAND LIQUID APPLICATIONS
Problem: Boom indicators on the run screen of the display do not turn green.
Solution:
1. Make sure ground speed is registering a value greater than zero on the display.
2. Verify a target rate greater than zero is entered into the display.
3. Check the switch status found on the Run screen under System and Input Diagnostics. As the
boom switches are turned on and off, the Input Diagnostics window should change from black
to green (if they do not, then refer to the installation instructions to verify boom switch
connections).
4. Check high current connection into the Liquid Control Module.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
203
LIQUID RATE CONTROL
CAUTION: Selection of the wrong data column or unit will result in misapplication of product.
www.4qte.com
5. Make sure the implement cable is plugged in. If plugged in, then test for 12 volts on pins A and
B.
Problem: Boom indicators on the Run screen of the display turn green, but the booms do not
open.
Solution:
1. Check wiring connections for all of the boom valves.
2. Verify that the cabling is providing 12 volts to the boom valve on the signal pin.
Note: You can also check for 12 volts on pins 1-10 on the boom connection of the liquid module.
Problem: Boom valves pause up to 5 seconds before turning on by manual control.
Solution:
1. Verify that the display and Liquid Control Module are both updated to the latest available
firmware.
2. The boom switch cable may be wired incorrectly. For details, refer to the installation instructions.
Note: This issue should only occur on John Deere sprayers. Make sure the black wires in the switch cable
are connected.
Problem: Booms will not turn on when the foot pedal is on.
Solution: Make sure the Master Switch Input is set to “External 2” under the Auxiliary Input
Settings.
Problem: AutoSwath turns on the boom too fast or too slow.
Solution:
1. Check GPS offsets in the vehicle setup to verify all the measurements are correct.
2. Verify the boom offsets are appropriate for the sprayer.
Note: Boom offsets are measured from the center of the vehicle to the center of the boom section.
3. Adjust the turn on look-ahead and turn off look-ahead to fine-tune Automatic Swath Control
performance.
4. Verify the boom offsets are appropriate for the sprayer.
Problem: No “As Applied” rate
Solution:
1. Check cabling from the channel connection of the Liquid Control Module to the flow meter.
2. Check flow meter for product buildup and proper operation.
Problem: Rate is erratic
Solution:
1. Verify that the rate display smoothing option is check marked in the setup of the configuration.
2. Check the controller settings of the active configuration. Verify that the valve setting for your
particular type of control valve agree with the settings given in the Quick Reference Guide.
3. Use manual valve control to see if the rate stays constant.
Problem: Erratic behavior from the flow meter and boom valves.
Solution: Verify that the display firmware and module firmware are both current.
204
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
APPLICATION
Problem: AutoSwath checked on, but booms will not turn on.
Solution:
1. Make sure the ground speed is registering a value greater than zero on the display and not in
the covered area.
2. Make sure there is a target rate greater than 0.
3. Make sure the applicator is inside of the field boundary.
Problem: Booms turn off in the middle of the pass.
Solution:
1. Check the display firmware and module firmware to see if they are the latest version released.
2. Make sure the ground speed does not go to 0.
3. Make sure the GPS is not losing the differential source.
Problem: Rate not responding (error flashing)
Solution:
1. Make sure the flow meter calibration number matches the tag on the flow meter.
Note: For Raven flow meters, divide the calibration number by 10.
2. Make sure that the flow being applied is not greater than the pump can produce.
3. Use manual valve control to see if the control valve will open or close.
4. Check the tip manufacturer’s charts to make sure they are in the operating range of the
application.
5. Check for any product buildup in the flow meter.
6. Check product filter for debris.
Problem: Booms turn on when outside of the boundary.
Solution:
1. Make sure the Rate Outside of Field option is set to zero under the active configuration settings.
2. Make sure the Outside Boundary Option is set to Turn Section Off under the Automatic Swath
Control options.
3. Make sure there is not a gap between the boundary and the first pass of the headlands.
Note: For best results, run a new boundary when spraying the first pass of the headlands.
Problem: Booms turn on briefly (less than a second) in the headlands
Solution:
1. Make sure that the turn on look-ahead is greater than the turn off look-ahead.
2. Make sure GPS offsets are correct.
3. Make sure look aheads are less than three seconds each.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
205
LIQUID RATE CONTROL
Problem: No boom pressure at the start of the field.
Solution: Before product application begins, use manual valve control to build boom
pressure. Select either Rate 1 or Rate 2 once pressure is set to desired level. Enter the
pass and allow automatic control to take over once the sections are turned on.
www.4qte.com
JOHN DEERE SPECIFIC INSTRUCTIONS
Here are some tips to remember when operating the display in conjunction with a SprayStar1 control
system. Refer to the quick reference sheet and other sections of the operators manual for specific setup
and operation instructions.
Master Switch Input
After setting up a configuration in the display make sure to change the master switch input setting from
standard to optional. This will tell the display to read the foot pedal for the master switch input status.
Master Switch Usage
When manually shutting off all boom sections in the field, use the foot pedal switch. Leave the OEM
master switch on the hydro handle ON during field use. Using the hydro handle switch may lead to
improper field coverage, poor AutoSwath performance, and inaccurate spray records. Only use the John
Deere master switch when completely shutting down the sprayer to transport or service the machine.
Target Rate
The display must have a non-zero target rate entered in the display before the boom valves will open for
product application. Ensure that the target rate entered into the display and SprayStar match to avoid
any unwarranted alarms or warnings on the display.
Data Collection
The display will create a coverage map of all product application while logging actual application rate
from the product control system flow meter.
AutoSwath Boom Section Control
The display will automatically control the boom section on/off status based upon previously applied area,
field boundary, and internal boundaries.
SprayStar Application Rate
The display will not control the rate based upon the target rate value entered into the system.
Application rate is controlled exclusively by the SprayStar display.
SprayStar Rinse Cycle
When using the rinse cycle feature on the SprayStar, the display must have the boom sections on to
allow the SprayStar to properly run the rinse routine. To ensure that boom sections are on:
1. Enter a target rate into the display.
2. Turn the foot pedal master switch on.
3. Turn all boom switches on.
4. Boom indicators on the Run screen must be blue showing that boom valves are on.
1. SprayStar is a trademark of Deere & Company.
206
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
APPLICATION
Liquid Product Control Valve Configuration Options
• Inline Servo
Rate control is achieved through actuating a butterfly or ball valve found in the solution hose that goes to
the booms. When the valve opens, the flow increases and when the valve closes, the flow decreases.
• Bypass Servo
Rate control is achieved through actuating a butterfly or ball valve found in the return line to the solution
tank. When the valve opens, the flow decreases and when the valve closes the flow increases.
• PWM 12 volt
Rate control is achieved through speed changes to the solution pump. The PWM 12 Volt setting is
programmed to pulse the power to an electric solenoid valve used to adjust the hydraulic flow to the solution
pump.
• Pump Servo
Rate control is achieved through speed changes to the solution pump. The pump servo setting is
programmed to control an electric motor used to actuate a hydraulic valve to adjust the hydraulic flow to the
solution pump.
• PWM Ground
Rate control is achieved through speed changes to the solution pump. The PWM Ground setting is
programmed to pulse the ground to an electric solenoid valve used to adjust the hydraulic flow to the
solution pump.
• Calibrated Reflow
Three-way boom valves are used to return product back to the tank in the off state. The returned flow is
calibrated with adjustment at each valve. Calibration is required any time the nozzles are changed.
• Ramsey Valve
A pneumatically-operated bypass valve. When air is supplied to the valve the rate increases; when air is
released from the valve the rate decreases.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
207
LIQUID RATE CONTROL
CONTROL VALVE SETTINGS
www.4qte.com
SERVO CONTROL VALVE SETTINGS (BY MANUFACTURER)
Flow Control Valve
Control Valve
Configuration
Raven Accu-Flow, 20
GPM Single Valve System
(Fast Close Valve)
In-line servo
40%
10%
5
Raven Accu-Flow, 10
GPM Dual Valve System
(Standard Valve)
In-line servo
100%
24%
5
Raven Accu-Flow, 30
GPM Single Valve System
(Fast Close Valve
In-line servo
40%
10%
5
Raven Accu-Flow, 30
GPM Dual Valve System
(Standard Valve)
In-line servo
100%
24%
5
Raven Flow Control Valve,
3/4" (Standard Valve)
In-line or Bypass
Servo
100%
24%
1
Raven Flow Control Valve,
3/4" (Fast)
In-line or Bypass
Servo
40%
10%
5
Raven Flow Control Valve,
1" (Standard)
In-line or Bypass
Servo
100%
24%
2
Raven Flow Control Valve,
1" (Fast)
In-line or Bypass
Servo
40%
10%
5
Raven Flow Control Valve,
1 1/2" (Standard)
In-line or Bypass
Servo
100%
24%
3
Raven Flow Control Valve,
2" (Standard)
In-line or Bypass
Servo
100%
24%
8
Raven Flow Control Valve,
2" (Fast)
In-line or Bypass
Servo
40%
10%
15
Raven Flow Control Valve,
3" (Standard)
In-line or Bypass
Servo
100%
24%
15
Mid-Tech, 3/4”
In-line or Bypass
Servo
40%
10%
5
Mid-Tech, 1”
In-line or Bypass
Servo
40%
10%
8
Mid-Tech, 1 1/2”
In-line or Bypass
Servo
40%
10%
11
Mid-Tech, 2”
In-line or Bypass
Servo
40%
10%
15
208
Valve Response Valve Response
1
2
Response
Threshold
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
APPLICATION
40%
Response
Threshold
8
Valve Response
2
2%
100%
24%
All Case IH
sprayers when
using AIM
Command
2%
100%
24%
3
AIM Command Inline servo
Non-AIM
Case IH Surveyor Command Mode
with A-post
PWM 
12-volt
122
**700900
35
2%
Non-AIM
Command Mode
PWM
12-volt
122
**700900
35
2%
Non-AIM
Case IH 4420 with Command Mode
A-post
PWM
12-volt
122
**700900
35
2%
Case IH 3320
See note below.
Control System
Use a starting value of 5.
Valve Response
1
Apache 510/710/
1010/1210 (2006 In-line Servo
and up)
Flow Control Valve
or Sprayer Model
(and year if
applicable)
Zero Offset
Allowable Error
10%
Response Threshold
In-line Servo
Valve Response Valve Response
1
2
Typical Gain Range
Dickey-john NH3 Heat
Exchanger
PWM Frequency
Control Valve
Configuration
Non-AIM
Command Mode
By-Pass Servo
2%
40%
10%
5
Non-AIM
Case IH 4260 with
Command Mode
Raven valve
By-Pass Servo
2%
100%
24%
3
Case IH 3200
(KZKCO Valve)
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
209
LIQUID RATE CONTROL
Flow Control Valve
Valve Response
1
Valve Response
2
Response Threshold
40%
10%
5
Non-AIM
Case IH 3150 with
Command Mode
Raven valve
In-Line Servo
2%
100%
24%
3
Case 3185 with
Raven valve
Non-AIM
Command Mode
In-Line Servo
2%
100%
24%
3
Case IH 3310
Non-AIM
Command Mode
PWM 12-Volt
122
**700900
30
2%
Case IH 4410
Non-AIM
Command PWM
12-Volt
122
**700900
30
2%
GVM Prowler
(2007)
Pump Servo
2%
100
24
10
GVM Predator
Servo
2%
100%
24%
**See
note
below
Hagie 284, 284XP,
Pump Servo
DTS-8
2%
100%
24%
3
Hagie 2100, 2101,
Pump Servo
DTS-10
2%
100%
24%
3
Hagie STS 10, 12,
Pump Servo
(2000 to 2005)
2%
100%
24%
20
2%
100%
40%
2
2%
100%
24%
20
Hagie STS 10, 12,
14, 16 (2006 and PWM 12-volt
up)
Hagie 39-pin
Spray II switch box Calibrated Reflow
(2006 and 2007)
122
**350600
Zero Offset
2%
Control System
Typical Gain Range
Non-AIM
Case IH 4260 with
Command Mode
KZKCO valve
By-Pass Servo
Flow Control Valve
or Sprayer Model
(and year if
applicable)
PWM Frequency
Allowable Error
www.4qte.com
20
2%
John Deere 4700, No rate control
47X0, 49X0
provided
Miller Nitro N1 and
Pump Servo
N2
210
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
Montana Paruda
Calibrated Reflow
RoGator 864, 874,
PWM Ground
1064, 1074
Valve Response
1
Valve Response
2
Response Threshold
Zero Offset
Typical Gain Range
Pump Servo
Allowable Error
Miller Nitro N4
Control System
2%
100%
24%
12
2%
122
**500700
30
100%
40%
2
(Imperia
l) or
11.4
(Metric)
2%
RoGator 1054
Pump Servo
2%
100%
24%
3
RoGator 1254
Pump Servo
2%
100%
24%
3
100%
24%
3
RoGator 1264,
PWM Ground
1274 (up to 2006)
122
**500700
30
2%
RoGator 1274,
1286, and SS
PWM Ground
Series (2007 and
up)
122
**500700
30
2%
Spra-Coupe 3X40,
In-Line Servo
3X50, 4X40, 4X50
2%
Spra-Coupe 7000
with factory pump PWM Ground
switch
122
**500700
30
2%
Spra-Coupe
without factory
pump switch
122
**500700
30
2%
PWM Ground
TerraGator XX03,
In-Line Servo
XX04, XX44
2%
40%
10%
15
Tyler Patriot,
Check for In-Line
Patriot II, XL, 150, Servo or By-Pass
150XL and WT
Servo Control
2%
100%
24%
3
Walker
2%
100%
24%
3
Pump Servo
*Adjust this number to fit your particular configuration.
**If you are using a PWM control valve, some adjustment may need to be made to achieve optimal pump
response to the PWM gain value. Increase the Gain value to make the system more responsive;
decrease the Gain value to smooth the system response.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
211
LIQUID RATE CONTROL
Flow Control Valve
or Sprayer Model
(and year if
applicable)
PWM Frequency
APPLICATION
www.4qte.com
LIQUID SERVO SETTINGS DESCRIPTION
• Valve Response 1
Default Value: 100%
Determines the speed of the servo valve when product control error exceeds the Response Threshold
setting.
Decreasing the value will cause the servo valve to run slower.
• Valve Response 2
Default Value: 24%
Determines the speed of the servo valve when product control error is less than the Response Threshold
setting.
Decreasing the value will cause the servo valve to run slower.
• Allowable Error
Default Value: 2%
Determines the percent of error that is allowed prior to the product control system making any flow rate
corrections.
2% - 3% is the normal dead band setting range.
- Too low of a setting value can cause the product control system to continually hunt for the target
application rate.
- Too high of a setting will cause excessive product application error.
• Response Threshold
Default Value: 3
Determines where the control system switches between using Valve Response 1 or Valve Response 2
speed setting.
Leaving all other valve control settings at the default value and making a small adjustment to this setting is
usually all that is required to fine tune system performance.
- Decreasing this value will have the overall effect of speeding up servo valve response.
- Increasing this value will have the overall effect of slowing servo valve response.
LIQUID PWM CONTROL VALVE SETTINGS DESCRIPTION
• PWM Frequency
Default Value: 100
The frequency that the PWM control valve is pulsed at. Typical settings range from 100 - 125. See PWM
valve manufacturer information for recommended settings.
• Gain
Default Value: 800
This setting determines how aggressively the control valve responds when making rate change
adjustments. The higher the value the more aggressive the system response is.
• Zero Offset
Default Value: 30
This setting represents the maximum duty cycle that is sent to the control valve without producing any
hydraulic flow from the PWM valve. Using too high of a Zero Offset value can cause the product control
system to not properly shut off. See PWM valve manufacturer information for recommended settings.
212
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
APPLICATION
2% - 3% is the normal dead band setting range.
- Too low of a setting value can cause the product control system to continually hunt for the target
application rate.
- Too high of a setting will cause excessive product application error.
DICKEY-JOHN NH3 CONVERSIONS
Conversion Formulas
The following formulas can be used to convert the Dickey John flow sensor constant to a value that
represents pulses/gallon of anhydrous ammonia for use by the display.
Conversion Formula
Formula for flow meter calibration for Dickey John reading pounds of anhydrous
Flow sensor constant (pulses/in3) X 1728 (in3/ft3) X 5.11 (lbs of anhydrous/gal)
Solution: Density (lbs. of anhydrous/ft3)
Formula for flow meter calibration for Dickey John reading pounds of Nitrogen
Flow sensor constant (pulses/in3) X 1728 (in3/ft3) X 4.22 (lbs of N/gal)
Density (lbs. of N/ft3)
Note: The flow sensor constant is tagged on the Dickey-John flow meter. The density setting comes from a
chart in the Dickey-John documentation and is not provided in this manual.
TROUBLESHOOTING SERIAL CONTROL APPLICATIONS
Problem: Rate changes on the display, but not on the controlled console.
Solution:
1. Verify the current firmware is running on the display and Application Rate module.
2. Check the settings specific to your controlled console. (For more information, refer to the Quick
Reference Guide).
3. Check cabling and all connections.
4. Disconnect the serial connection and determine if the controller is functioning properly without
the display.
Problem: The display rate and serial-controlled rate do not match.
Solution:
1. Verify the current firmware is running on the display and the Application Rate Module.
2. Check the percent rate change. (Refer to the Quick Reference Guide for more information).
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
213
LIQUID RATE CONTROL
• Allowable Error
Default Value: 2%
www.4qte.com
MISCELLANEOUS
GLOSSARY OF APPLICATION SETTINGS
Configuration Settings
• Rate Outside of Field
Rate that will be used outside of the field boundary. Zero stops product application. Last Good uses the
previous rate before exiting the boundary. Rx Default uses the default rate written in the prescription file
loaded.
• Rate Display Smoothing
Determines how the feedback from the control channel’s rate sensor will be displayed on the run screen.
When checked, the system will display the target rate when the application rate is within 10% of the target
rate setting. When unchecked the system will display the raw feedback from the rate sensor.
• Minimum Flow
This setting is used to maintain a consistent spray pattern. The display will not allow flow to drop below the
entered setting. Set to flow at the lowest operating pressure for the selected spray tips with all sections on.
When spraying with one or more boom sections off, the system automatically reduces the minimum flow
setting according to the reduced spray width. To adjust this setting, Press
numeric value.
and enter the desired
• Controller Time Delay
Compensates for any delay in the control system when changing between different product flow rates
during variable rate application.
Speed Input Settings
• Primary Speed Source
Main speed input source used by the display.
• Backup Speed Source
If the primary speed source fails, the display will use the backup if one is available.
• Manual Speed
If both of the speed input sources are unavailable, manual speed can be used in order for the control
channel to provide application. Manual speed setting is for use during static machine testing or by the
control system in the absence of primary and backup speed signals.
Automatic Swath Control Settings
• Turn-On Look-Ahead
Determines how far ahead the system looks to turn the swath sections back on. This setting compensates
for any delay in the product control system when the sections are turned on.
• Turn-Off Look-Ahead
Determines how far ahead the system looks to turn the swath sections off. This setting compensates for
delay in the product control system when the boom sections are turned off.
• Outside Boundary Option
Determines the behavior of the sections when exiting the field boundary or prescription-mapped area.
214
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
APPLICATION
Auxiliary Input Settings
• Master Switch
Switch that performs global master control of all rate control channels.
• F1-F11
Settings determine the switch(es) that will operate the controlling channel specified from the configuration
setup. Single switches can be used to control multiple channels and swath sections.
Controller Settings
• Flow Meter Cal
Calibration value representing the number of pulses that equal one-gallon of product flow through the
controlling system.
• Control Valve Configuration
Setting specifies the type of control valve being used for the rate control functions of the controlling system.
• Response Threshold
Determines where the control channel switches between using Valve Response 1 and Valve Response 2
speed setting.
• Valve Response 1
Determines the speed of the servo valve when product control error exceeds the Response Threshold
setting. Valve Response 1 represents the fast speed of the servo valve.
• Valve Response 2
Determines the speed of the servo valve when product control error is less than the Response Threshold
setting. Valve Response 2 represents the slow speed of the servo valve.
• Allowable Error
Determines the percent of error that is allowed prior to the product control system making any flow rate
changes.
• Flow Control Delay
Setting for period of time from master switch on and the start of product application to the first flow control
correction. This setting can be used to eliminate unwanted correction of flow control at the start of each
pass. Typical setting values are zero for granular and 1 –2 seconds for liquid application control.
• Close Flow Control Valve When Rate Off
When selected the controlling system will shut down when there is either a zero rate in the field or entering
an already applied area. When unchecked the controlling system will stay in the last known state when the
sections are shut off.
• PWM Frequency
The frequency that the PWM control valve is pulsed at. Settings can be found from the manufacturer of the
valve. Typical settings range from 100-125 Hz.
• PWM Gain
Determines how aggressively the control valve responds when making rate change adjustments. The
higher the value the more aggressive the system response is.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
215
LIQUID RATE CONTROL
• Coverage Option
Based on the coverage option selected, this setting determines the behavior of the swath section when
entering/exiting an already applied area or field boundary. Options available include: Minimize Skip,
Minimize Overlap, and User Defined Percentage.
www.4qte.com
• Zero Flow Offset
Represents the maximum duty cycle that is sent to the control valve without producing any hydraulic flow
from the PWM valve. Using too high of a Zero Flow Offset value can cause the product control system to
not properly control low rates. See the PWM valve manufacturer information for recommended settings.
• Shaft Speed Cal
Calibration number representing the pulses that equal one revolution of the rate control metering system.
• Max Conveyor Speed
Setting determines the maximum RPM of the conveyor that controls product distribution to the application
point. This setting is used when controlling a spinner spreader applicator.
• Fan Speed Cal
Number of pulses that are generated by the sensor during one revolution of the blower fan shaft.
• Max Metering Speed
Setting determines the maximum RPM of the metering shaft that controls product distribution to the
application point. This setting is used when controlling a granular strip-till toolbar.
• Min Speed
Setting represents the desired minimum speed of the blower fan. An alarm will sound if the blower fan
speed falls below this value.
• Max Speed
Setting represents the desired maximum speed of the blower fan. An alarm will sound if the blower fan
speed exceeds this value.
• Low Fan Speed Shutoff
When selected, granular product application of a strip-till toolbar will be shut off if fan speed drops below
the Min Speed setting.
• Rate Threshold
Percentage difference between the Actual Rate and the Target Rate when the Rate Not Responding
Message is displayed on the Run screen.
216
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
APPLICATION
Material
Type
Abbreviated
name for
display and
predefined
name for
SMS
Percentage (in terms of lbs.100 lbs.)
Density
N
P (P2O5)
K (K2O)
NH3
82
0
0
5.14 lbs./gal.
(at 60°F)
Anhydrous
Ammonia
Liquid under
pressure
28% UAN
Liquid
28% UAN
28
0
0
10.67
30% UAN
Liquid
30% UAN
30
0
0
10.86 lbs./gal.
32% UAN
Liquid
32% UAN
32
0
0
11.06 lbs./gal.
Ammonium
polyphosphat
e
10
34
0
11.73 lbs./gal.
Ammonium
polyphosphat Liquid
e (starter)
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
217
LIQUID RATE CONTROL
FERTILIZER DEFAULT PRODUCT SETTINGS
www.4qte.com
218
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
APPLICATION
ISOBUS SERIAL APPLICATION
RATE CONTROL
ENABLE VIRTUAL TERMINAL AND TASK
CONTROLLER
To enable the Virtual Terminal:
ISOBUS Settings
Enable Virtual Terminal
and
Enable Task Controller
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > Display button > ISOBUS Settings > Enable Virtual
Terminal checkbox and Task Controller checkbox
Once a Virtual Terminal has been enabled
ISOBUS Settings
Virtual Terminal
Task Controller
Enable Virtual Terminal
will appear in the task bar.
Enable Task Controller
Broadcast Display Speed
(ISO GBSD)
Function Instance
Auxiliary Module Support
0
Toggle between the Virtual Terminal run screen and
other display functions by pressing the VT button.
Use 480 Mask Size
Function Instance
0
Note: The user will have to setup a configuration for the Task Controller also. See “Task Controller”
on page 85 for more information on setting up Task Controller configuration.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
219
ISOBUS SERIAL APPLICATION RATE CONTROL
APPLICATION
www.4qte.com
SETUP
Use drop-down menu to select the
System Type
• Sprayer
• Spreader
Use drop-down menu to select Controller
Make and Model
Hardi - 5500 (with JobCom)
Bogballe - Calibrator Uniq (Zurf, Uniq,
ICON, 2003)
UNIA Group - BREZG
Reco/Sulky - Vision-X
KUHN - Quantron
LH Agro - LH5000
RDS Pro
220
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
APPLICATION
Use keypad to input the number of
sections
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
221
ISOBUS SERIAL APPLICATION RATE CONTROL
Use keyboard to enter the Configuration
Name
www.4qte.com
STATUS SCREEN
The status screen provides the user with
readout of the connected controller’s
target rate, actual rate, section status,
and connection status.
Note: The target rate is not available for edit from the VT screen. Target rate can only be adjusted
from the Run Screen.
Serial Connection Status – Indicates if the ISOBUS Serial Application Rate
module is communicating with the connected controller.
Target Rate Status – Indicates the target rate sent to the connected controller.
Actual Rate Status – Indicates the actual rate received from the connected
controller.
Boom Section Status – Indicates the on/off status of the
boom sections sent to the connected controller.
222
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
APPLICATION
MANAGE CONFIGURATIONS
Press Manage Configurations button to edit system
configurations.
A user can add, remove, edit, or select an active
configuration. The module will save up to 4
configurations.
ALARM SETTINGS
Press Alarm Settings button to edit alarm thresholds.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
223
ISOBUS SERIAL APPLICATION RATE CONTROL
SETTINGS SCREEN
www.4qte.com
Warning Enabled – With this setting enabled, the user
will get a “Rate Not Responding” alarm when the
actual rate does not fall within the threshold and
timeout settings. The user will not receive an alarm if
this setting is disabled.
Rate Not Responding Threshold – This setting
defines the percent value the actual rate can be off
from the target rate and not trigger the “Rate Not
Responding Alarm” alarm.
Rate Not Responding Timeout – This setting defines
the amount of time the actual rate can fall outside the
Rate Not Responding Threshold without triggering the
“Rate Not Responding Alarm” alarm.
DIAGNOSTICS
Press Diagnostics button.
Module Diagnostics – Contains module
diagnostic information to assist in troubleshooting.
Alarms – Contains any active alarms from the
module.
224
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
APPLICATION
INJECTION
DirectCommand interfaces with the Raven SCS Sidekick™ for complete control over chemical injection
applications. The display can support up to four Raven SCS Sidekick™ injection pumps plus a liquid
carrier.
CREATE CONFIGURATION
Application
Configuration
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > Configuration (tractor) button > Configuration tab > Add
(+) button > Application button
A wizard will guide you through the process of selecting or creating a vehicle, implement and controllers.
Your Operating Configuration will then be viewable when you start a new Field Operation with the Field
Operation Wizard. For more information see “Create Configuration” on page 181.
SETUP CONFIGURATION
Configuration
Select Your Specific
Configuration
Controller Settings
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > Configuration (tractor) button > Configuration tab > your
specific configuration > Setup (wrench) button > 2 tab >Controller Settings button
The Controller Settings screen appears.
Pump Calibration
Controller Settings
Pump Calibration
Active Calibration
Factory
Calibration
Rate Response Warning
Error
Threshold
Error Delay
11 pls/fl oz
Perform
Calibration
11 pls/fl oz
Flow Monitor Warning
30 %
Error
Threshold
25 %
5s
Enable Warning
• Factory Calibration
This number is found on the tag of the Digital Pump
Speed Sensor. This tag number represents pulses per
10 fluid ounces. Divide the tag number by 10 and enter
this number. Once entered, this number should not be
changed.
• Perform Calibration
Press the Perform Calibration button to begin the
calibration procedure for the Direct Injection pump. The
pump will not run until this calibration has been
performed. For more information, see “Calibrating an
Injection Pump” on page 226.
Rate Response Warning
• Error Threshold
The user-defined percentage of actual rate error allowed before an alarm sounds.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
225
INJECTION
APPLICATION
www.4qte.com
• Error Delay
The number of seconds that the actual rate falls out of the error threshold before an alarm sounds.
Flow Monitor Warning
• Error Threshold
The percentage of perceived application error, based on the discharge flow sensor.
• Enable Warning
The Enable Warning check box allows you the option of displaying the Flow Monitor Warning.
Calibrating an Injection Pump
Calibrate the injection pump at the beginning of each season and any time repairs are made.
Configuration
Select Your Specific
Configuration
Controller Settings
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > Configuration (tractor) button > Configuration tab > your
specific configuration > Setup (wrench) button > 2 tab >Controller Settings button
1. Enter Factory Calibration
Before entering a Direct Injection Calibration, a Factory Calibration must be entered. If you have not already
done so, enter the Factory Calibration Number by pressing the Factory Calibration button. This number is
found on the tag of the Digital Pump Speed Sensor. This tag number represents pulses per 10 fluid ounces.
Divide the tag number by 10 and enter this number. Once entered, this number should not be changed.
2. Press Perform Calibration
Underneath Pump Calibration, press the Perform Calibration button.
3. Prime the Direct Injection Pump
The Pump Calibration Wizard appears. Before beginning this calibration procedure, it is recommended that
you first prime the Direct Injection pump. Press the Prime button and continue along with the priming
procedure as described in “Priming an Injection Pump”, beginning with Step 3 on page 227. After the priming
procedure is finished, you will return to this Pump Calibration Wizard window. Press
to continue.
4. Enter the Dispense Amount
Enter the amount that you want dispensed. Press
to continue.
5. Acknowledge the Warning
Prepare to catch any product dispensed in an appropriate container. Press
to continue.
6. Start Calibration
Press the green-colored START button to begin the calibration procedure. The Pump Calibration Wizard
automatically counts up to the amount that you specified in Step 4. The button will turn red and displays
STOP while the product is being dispensed. When the procedure is finished, the button will again turn
green. Press
to continue.
Note: You may press the Reset button if you wish to start the calibration procedure over.
226
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
APPLICATION
Enter in the actual amount of the product that was dispensed. Press
to continue.
8. Calibration Complete
The Pump Calibration number appears. The New Injection Pump Calibration Number now appears in the
Pump Calibration screen. From this point, you may either:
• Repeat the calibration by pressing the Repeat Calibration button.
• Press
to complete the calibration and exit the Pump Calibration Wizard.
Controller Settings
Pump Calibration
Active Calibration
Factory
Calibration
11 pls/fl oz
Error Delay
11 pls/fl oz
Flow Monitor Warning
Rate Response Warning
Error
Threshold
Perform
Calibration
9. Calibration Displayed on Controller Settings
screen.
The new Injection Pump Calibration Number (A) now
appears in the Pump Calibration screen.
30 %
Error
Threshold
25 %
5s
Enable Warning
Priming an Injection Pump
If you are using a Direct Injection configuration, you must prime the Injection Pump each time you flush
or refill a tank, or change products. This ensures that air is not in the product lines.
CAUTION: Failure to perform this priming procedure before beginning a Direct Injection application could
result in skips at the start of field operations.
Injection
1
1. Press Injection Control button
To prime the Injection Pump, first go to the Map screen. Press the Injection button. The Injection
button is located at the left-hand side of the Equipment Tab. The Injection Controls screen
appears.
Injection Controls
Injection
Prime
2. Press the Prime button
At the Injection Controls screen, press the Prime button.
Agitate
• You may agitate the Direct Injection tank by pressing
the Agitate button. Once pressed, this Agitate setting
will continue even after the Priming process is finished,
until you press
a second time. To determine if a
product should be agitated, check the product
specifications.
• In order for a Direct Injection tank to agitate the
product, you must set the agitator motor switch on Run
(which agitates the product continuously) or Pulse
(which agitates the product intermittently).
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
227
INJECTION
7. Enter Actual Dispense Amount
www.4qte.com
3. Acknowledge the Warning
A warning appears, stating that you must circulate the product back to the Direct Injection tank.
Acknowledge the warning by pressing
.
Injection Pump Prime
Use increase/decrease arrows to start pump and set to desired speed.
4. Start Pump and Set Desired Speed
The Injection Pump Prime screen appears. The
countdown time remaining is shown in the black box.
The bar underneath turns green when the pump is
/
operating. Use
decrease the pump speed.
Time Remaining
to manually increase or
Note: The recommended priming time is three minutes (3:00), but the routine can be ended at any time by
pressing
.
5. Acknowledge the Warning. A warning appears, stating that you must return chemical injection
plumbing to a field-ready state. Acknowledge the warning by pressing
.
LOAD CONFIGURATION
Press: Select Event button.
Select Event
Select a Season, Grower, Farm, and
Field on the Management Selection
screen.
For more information, see “Setup Event” on page 45.
RUN CONFIGURATION
Once a configuration has been completed, the Map View button appears at the bottom of the
Home screen. Press the Map View button to see the Map screen. The map below is displayed
in Zoom to Detail view.
228
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
APPLICATION
Valmax
6.0 mph
fl oz/ac
30.00
30.00
Bytris
fl oz/ac
1
25.00
• (A) Mapping Toolbox
2
20.00
• (B) Product Control Toolbox
• (C) Injection Controls button
25.00
25.00
Flow:
Container:
0.8 fl oz/min
400 fl oz
0 ft 0 in
0%
1
• (E) Section Indicators
• (F) NORAC UC5 Engage button
Pressure (PSI)
Injection
• (D) NORAC UC5 Boom Height Control Options
button
Main
Auxiliary
Agitation
41
43
47
• (G) AutoSwath
• (H) Master Switch Status (on)
• Injection Controls button (C)
The number of direct injection controllers appear within the Injection Control button. This button displays
green for each injection module when detecting flow. Press the Injection Controls button to Prime or Agitate
the Injection pump.
INJECTION DIAGNOSTICS
The Injection Diagnostics screen provides raw values from sensors verifying that the
pump’s output is working. To go to the Injection Diagnostics screen, press on the Device
Information button. At the Devices screen, highlight the item marked AL Direct Inject then
press the Diagnostics button. The Injection Diagnostics screen appears. In addition to the Controller’s
Name and Serial Number, it provides the following information:
Injection Diagnostics
Controller Name
Serial Number
Digital Pump Speed (Hz)
Analog Pump Speed (V)
Discharge Flow Monitor (Hz)
Flow/Speed Sensor Ratio
Di
2008850060
67.0
7.2
9.9
0.0
• Digital Pump Speed
Displays volume information, shown in Hz.
• Analog Pump Speed
Displays varying voltage as pump speed is increased or
decreased.
• Discharge Flow Monitor
Displays information showing that flow is being
discharged for every piston stroke.
• Flow/Speed Sensor Ratio
The ratio that the system derived for calibration.
TROUBLESHOOTING DIRECT INJECTION CONFIGURATIONS
When controlling a chemical injection pump using the Injection Module PN: 4000896, the configuration
requires the use of a Liquid Module PN: 4000394. The injection control is based off of the vehicle that
has been configured for the liquid DirectCommand control channel. Once configured, the Injection pump
uses the same switch inputs and ground speed input that has been configured for the liquid system.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
229
INJECTION
0.24 ac
www.4qte.com
Direct Injection: Pump Doesn’t Run
Boom indicators
turn blue on run
No
See “Boom sections
not turning blue” in
manual
Yes
Verify a value is
entered for the
active calibration
No
Power can be checked at multiple
locations. First is the connection at the
Injection module where the battery
power cable plugs in. The second
location is the output connection found
on the injection module. The third is
found at the 2 pin weather-pak tower
found on the injection cable PN:
4000851-3. See table below.
Refer to “calibrating
injection pump”
Yes
Verify a target rate is
entered for the injection
control channel
Check power connections
from the battery to the
injection pump
230
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
APPLICATION
2 Pin Deutsch
Receptacle
2 Pin Deutsch Plug
INJECTION
BATTERY POWER PIN OUTS
2 Pin WP Tower
Power 12V
1
1
A
Ground
2
2
B
Direct Injection: Pump Runs Full Speed
Display receiving
actual rate
No
Check injection
diagnostics to see if
Digital Pump Speed Sensor The injection pump’s digital
pump speed sensor is used to
provide actual rate feedback
to the display. If the display is
not receiving an actual rate
the pump will run full speed
and provide a “Rate Not
Responding” warning
message. See Digital Pump
Speed Pin out table below for
pin locations. With the section
valves on the cabling can be
tested by pulsing the signal
and ground pins to verify the
total applied increases, it is
always best to pulse the pins
at least 10 times to make sure
the total applied will increase
by a noticeable amount.
Refer to
manufacture
Yes
Check injection
diagnostics to see if
anolog pump speed is
Refer to injection
pump manual to
DIGITAL PUMP SPEED PIN OUTS
Module Auxiliary Connection
12-Pin Socket
3-Pin Conxall
Power (5V)
12
2
Signal (5V)
3
3
Ground
6
1
Analog Pump Speed Sensor – The injection pump’s analog speed sensor is used in conjunction with the
digital pump speed sensor to provide accurate rate feedback. The sensor is a generator that produces a
varying voltage dependent on the speed of the pump. The injection module will only get feedback from
this sensor when the pump is rotating. If the analog sensor is not providing a feedback to the module, the
pump will run full speed and will not change speeds manually.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
231
www.4qte.com
ANALOG SPEED PIN OUTS
Module Auxiliary Connection
12-Pin Socket
Signal
A
Ground
B
3-Pin Conxall
>9V at max pump speed
Direct Injection: Application Error
Verify factory calibration
number is pump cal/10
The injection module requires that a pump calibration be performed before
actual application can occur. The calibration number found on the tag of the
injection pump’s digital speed sensor needs to be divided by a factor of 10
before entering it as the factory calibration number. If the factory cal
number is entered wrong, the pump calibration routine will not finish due to
a high application error.
Notes:
Refer to injection
calibration routine
• The pump calibration will fail if error is >10% from the factory calibration
number.
• If the calibration fails check pump and plumbing for physical damage or excess
wear.
Direct Injection: Discharge Flow Sensor Error
Status light on run
screen showing green
No
Check injection
diagnostics to see if
No
Refer to manufacturer
documentation to test
Yes
LED light on the
injection pump flashing
The discharge flow sensor is used as a system
check to see if product is actually exiting the
output of the pump. The sensor is a shuttle
valve that allows feedback for every stroke of
the pump. If Flow Monitor Warning is enabled,
the display will provide a message if the
discharge flow sensor falls out of its calibrated
value. See table below for pin locations.
Yes
Check error threshold
found in the controller
232
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
APPLICATION
Module Auxiliary Connection 12Pin Socket
INJECTION
DISCHARGE FLOW SENSOR PIN OUTS
3-Pin WP Shroud
Power (12V)
11
A
Signal
9
B
Ground
8
C
Direct Injection: Inlet Restriction
Make sure 3 way
valve is in operate
Check for plugged
strainer on the inlet of
The injection pump has a vacuum switch that is used to warn operators of any
restriction at the inlet of the pump. The sensor is a normally closed switch that
opens if a restriction is encountered in the injection system. A warning will be
displayed for the operator if the vacuum switch opens due to restriction. See
table below for pin locations. The operator can test the system by unplugging
the sensor, which will trigger the warning. If the operator jumps pins A and C,
the warning will end.
Refer to injection pump
manual to test vacuum
VACUUM SWITCH PIN OUTS
Module Auxiliary Connection 12Pin Socket
3-Pin WP Shroud
Power (12V)
2
C
Signal
10
A
Controller Settings: Direct Injection Pump Calibration
Pump Calibration Setting
• Factory Calibration
The Factory Calibration Number is found on the tag of the Digital Pump Speed Sensor. This tag number
represents pulses per 10 fluid ounces. Divide the tag number by 10 and enter this number. Once entered,
this number should not be changed.
• Perform Calibration
Press the Perform Calibration button to begin the calibration procedure for the Direct Injection pump. The
pump will not run until this calibration has been performed.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
233
www.4qte.com
Rate Response Warning
• Error Threshold
The user-defined percentage of actual rate error allowed before an alarm sounds.
• Error Delay
The number of seconds that an actual rate falls out of the error threshold before an alarm sounds.
Flow Monitor Warning
• Error Threshold
The percentage of perceived application error based on the discharge flow sensor.
• Enable Warning
The Enable Warning check box allows you the option of displaying the Flow Monitor Warning.
Field Notes
Setting Name and Description
• Auto Generate Application Report
When checked, this option will automatically generate the Smart Report each time product application is
completed and the Field button is selected.
• Prompt for Field Notes
When checked, this option will automatically launch the region summary data collection dialog each time a
new region is created at the Run screen during application rate control.
• Report Map Appearance
- Multi-Color Rate – Select this option to have the Smart Report display the application maps using the
rate legend as displayed on the run screen.
- Single Color Coverage – Select this option to have the Smart Report display single color product
coverage maps.
Run Screen
• AutoSwath
Use to enable/disable automatic control of boom section on/off state based upon field boundaries,
prescription files, and previously applied areas.
234
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
APPLICATION
NORAC UC5
APPLICATION
NORAC UC5
NORAC UNLOCK
Features
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > Display button > Features tab
Console Setup
General
Display
Features
Advanced
Feature
Status
Automatic Swath Control
Enabled
Multiple Product
Enabled
Norac UC5 Interface
Enabled
Fan Frame - Feed Gate Control
Enabled
ISOBUS Virtual Terminal
Enabled
HARDI Sprayer
Enabled
Feature Description:
The Features Tab is where you can enter unlock
codes. Unlock codes are unique to the serial number
of each display and the feature registration number.
You must supply these numbers to your dealer when
purchasing any unlock codes. Press
the unlock code and press
feature.
to enter
to enable the
Unlock
Norac UC5 can be used with or without an unlock but how you setup and run the system differs
depending on whether the system is locked or unlocked and using CAN A or CAN B.
CAN A
Locked
UnLocked
No Functionality
Setup using Ag Leader Menus
Operate using Ag Leader Run Screens
CAN B
Setup using Virtual Terminal Screens
Setup using Virtual Terminal Screens
Operate using Virtual Terminal Screens
Operate using Ag Leader Screens
See “Virtual Terminal” on page 81 for more information on using Virtual Terminal.
CREATE CONFIGURATION
Configuration
Application
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > Configuration (tractor) button > Configuration tab > Add
(+) button > Application button
A wizard will guide you through the process of selecting or creating a vehicle, implement and controllers.
Your Operating Configuration will then be viewable when you start a new Field Operation with the Field
Operation Wizard. For more information see “Create Configuration” on page 181.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
235
www.4qte.com
SETUP CONFIGURATION
Configuration
Select Your Specific
Configuration
NORAC UC5
Press: Home > Setup (wrench) button > Configuration (tractor) button > Configuration tab > (your
particular Operating Configuration) > Setup (wrench) button > NORAC UC5 button
The NORAC UC5 Setup screen appears.
Norac UC5
Automatic
Setup
Sensors and
Valve Drivers
Boom Control
Module
Advanced
Settings
Controller #300
Firmware Version
Hardware Revision
Sprayer Configuration
Unknown
Unknown
Sprayer Model 1
• (A) Norac Devices drop-down menu
The drop down menu shows the devices communicating
on the NORAC UC5 CAN Bus along with the serial
number of each device. The Firmware Version and
Hardware Revisions of your NORAC UC5 devices are
shown underneath.
Retune
• Automatic Setup
Automatic Setup walks through a series of steps that configures the NORAC UC5 electronics to the
sprayer hydraulic functions. You must perform an Automatic Setup routine after the NORAC UC5
system is installed. The following items are configured during an Automatic Setup routine:
• Sprayer Make and Model
• Input module wiring and configuration
• Number of sensors and location
• Sensor zero point
• Valve deadzone and gain values.
Note: For detailed Automatic Setup information, see the NORAC UC5 manual.
• Sensors and Valve Drivers
Opens the Sensor and Valve Driver Settings screen.
236
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
APPLICATION
General
Sensor
Valve
Minimum Height Mode includes three selections:
Switch
Minimum Height Mode
Minimum Height
Soil Mode
Disable
• Absolute
no sensors are allowed to move closer to the target than
the minimum height setting.
24 in.
Crop Mode
24 in.
• Relative
no sensors are allowed to move closer to the target than
the distance of the target height minus the minimum
height setting.
• Disabled
Disables the minimum height mode.
Note: “Target” refers to the ground in Soil Mode, and the crop canopy in Crop Mode.
• Minimum Height. If desired, press
to adjust the following settings.
- Soil Mode - The minimum height setting when operating in Soil Mode.
Crop Mode - The minimum height setting when operating in Crop Mode. Also, consult the NORAC UC5
manual for more information.
• Advanced Settings
For use by a technician.
• Retune
From time to time it may be necessary to recalibrate (Retune) the UC5 electronics to your sprayer’s
hydraulics. Examples of such times are:
• When a hydraulic solenoid valve is changed.
• When the hydraulic pump is changed or adjusted.
• When the normal working temperature of the hydraulic oil has shifted significantly from when the system
was previously calibrated.
If you are running a pull type sprayer and use different tractors to operate the sprayer, you should run
the Retune procedure each time the tractor is changed. If you have a flow control for the boom
hydraulics, set it prior to tuning. If you change the flow setting by more than 20 percent, you should
Retune.
LOAD CONFIGURATION
Press: Select Event button.
Select Event
Select a Season, Grower, Farm, and
Field on the Management Selection
screen.
For more information, see “Setup Event” on page 45.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
237
NORAC UC5
The following settings appear on the General Tab.
Norac UC5 Setup
www.4qte.com
RUN CONFIGURATION
Once a configuration has been completed, the Map View button appears at the bottom of the
Home screen. Press the Map View button to see the Map screen.
Engage button
If the NORAC UC5 Boom Height Control is included in your Operating Configuration, then
the NORAC Engage button appears on the display’s Task Bar. The Engage button enables
boom height control. This button is green when the NORAC UC5 system is engaged; and
grey when disengaged. Press on this button to engage and disengage the NORAC UC5
Boom Height Control.
This button can be used to toggle back and forth between Automatic Mode and Manual Mode.
• When you enable Automatic Mode, this button turns green and the display beeps three times.
• When you disable Automatic Mode on any part of the boom and the display switches to Manual Mode,
this button turns white and the display beeps twice. If less than the full boom remains in Manual Mode,
the display will continue beeping twice every three seconds.
Boom Height Control Options Button
Mode: Crop
Sensitivity: 5
Target Height: 12 in
15.9
8.4
8.4
At the center of the Map screen’s
Equipment Tab, the Boom Height
Control Options button displays data on
NORAC UC5 Run Time performance.
50 F
• The Boom Icon appears as blue when in Automatic Mode; and black when in Manual Mode. The right, left
and center sections appear independently on this icon. Press the Boom Height Control Options button
to open the Boom Height Control Options screen. For more information, see “Boom Height Control
Options Screen” on page 239.
• The white arrows indicate the direction that the boom section is being commanded to move. The arrows
shown around the boom appear either 1) In Automatic Mode, or 2) When the boom is in Manual Mode
and the boom is moved by the operator.
• Mode
Indicates whether the Boom is in Crop Mode or Soil Mode. For further explanation, see “Boom Height
Control Options Screen” on page 239.
• Target Height
The desired boom height above the ground (for Soil Mode), or the crop canopy (for Crop Mode).
• Sensitivity
Adjusts the boom response. Higher values make the height control more responsive.
• Distance Between Boom and Target
The numbers that appear below the Boom Icon show the distance between the boom section and the target.
• Temperature
Shows the measurement of the outside ambient air temperature.
238
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
APPLICATION
Mode: Crop
Sensitivity: 5
Target Height: 12 in
8.4
8.4
15.9
50 F
Boom Height Control Options
• Mode
The drop-down menu is where you can choose
one of two modes:
Crop Mode
Sensitivity
- In Soil Mode, the UC5 controls boom height
relative to the distance from the soil.
- In Crop Mode, the UC5 controls boom height
relative to distance from the crop canopy.
Target Height
• Sensitivity
Adjusts the boom response. Higher values
make the height control more responsive;
settings range from 0-10.
12
5
Pressing the Boom Height Control
Options button (A) opens the Boom
Height Control Options screen (B). At
this screen, you can adjust the boom’s
Mode, Sensitivity and Target Height.
• Target Height
User-defined boom height in relation to the
selected control mode.
BOOM HEIGHT DIAGNOSTICS
The Boom Height Diagnostics screen shows all data for individual sensors, including Height, Roll and
Temperature.
To go to the Boom Height Diagnostics screen, press on the Device Information button. At
the Devices screen, highlight the item marked NORAC UC5 then press the Diagnostics
button.
The NORAC UC5 Diagnostics screen
appears.
Boom Height Diagnostics
General
Boom Control State
Crop
Control Mode
30.4
Target Height (cm)
Remote Switch
-
Location
Left
Automatic
Center
Automatic
Right
Automatic
Roll
Automatic
Height / Roll
Serial
Temperature
1 Left Outer
100
91 cm
21.1 C
2 Left Inner
103
89 cm
21.1 C
3 Main Lift
101
102 cm
21.1 C
4 Right Inner
104
84 cm
21.1 C
5 Right Outer
102
81 cm
21.1 C
6 Boom Frame
105
8.0
N/A
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
239
NORAC UC5
Boom Height Control Options Screen
www.4qte.com
240
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
APPLICATION
SPREADER
DirectCommand for spinner spreaders is capable of controlling the product conveyor, spinner speed,
monitoring bin level, and providing multiple prescription rate control for up to three granular products.
The control modules support PWM, motorized servo, Mark IV.2, Mark IV.4, and Mark V hydraulic control
valves. DirectCommand granular application system also supports application control of multiple bin
spreaders.
CREATE CONFIGURATION
Application
Configuration
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > Configuration (tractor) button > Configuration tab > Add
(+) button > Application button
1. Select Vehicle
Use drop-down menu to choose a vehicle, or press
to enter a new vehicle.
2. Self-Propeller Applicator
Press
to create a new vehicle
Use drop-down to choose Vehicle Type and Select Self-Propelled Applicator
If applicable, Select All Wheel Steer. Press
Press
to continue.
to enter Make and Model name. Press
to continue.
3. Drawn Spreader
Select an implement from the drop-down list menu, or press
to create a new implement. Press
to continue.
Enter Implement Make and Model
- Press
to enter Make and Model name. Press
to continue.
Select Attachment Point
- Use the drop-down list to select an implement attachment method. Press
to continue.
Enter Hitch to Implement Axle Distance (Rear Drawbar Only)
- Press
to enter the hitch to implement axle distance. Press
to accept.
4. Add Granular Functionality
Press
Granular
Application
then
Spinner
Spreader
to add Spinner Spreader functionality to the implement.
5. Select Controller
Use the drop-down menu to select a controller or press
continue.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
to add a controller. Press
to
241
SPREADER
APPLICATION
www.4qte.com
6. Select Controller Device
Select DirectCommand from the Device drop-down menu. Select either, Spinner Spreader Control 3CH,
5CH, or Stepper Spreader Control from the Direct Type drop-down menu. Press
to continue.
7. Enter Controller Name
Controller name defaults to DirectSpreader. Press
name if desired. Press
to accept, or press
to enter a new
to continue.
8. Container Setup
Press the desired channel button to enable or disable controller channel. A check mark will appear in the
box when the container is ready to be configured.
Note: System supports a maximum of three active product channels.
9. Assign Container Name
Container names default to “Bin 1-5”depending on which granular control module is being used. Press
to enter a new name if desired.
10. Assign Container Capacity
Press
to enter the container capacity. Press
to accept.
11. Enter Container Units
Use the drop-down menu to select the container units.
Once container has been configured press
to continue.
Note: Follow steps 9-12 for each control channel.
12. Enter Application Point Offset
Press
to enter distance from hitch to application point (front to back). Press
value on offset screen. Press
to accept
to accept value for the application point.
Note: If setting up a Self-Propelled Applicator, enter the distance from rear axle to application point.
Use drop-down menu to select distance Behind or In Front.
Note: At this point additional functionality can be added to the implement. If no additional
functionality is being added, press
to continue.
13. Enter Hitch Point Information
Enter if implement provides a rear hitch and offset measurements.
14. Self-Propeller Spreader
Enter Vehicle Name (a suggested name appears)
242
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
APPLICATION
to enter a different name for your vehicle. Press
when complete.
15. Drawn Spreader
Enter Implement Name (a suggested name appears)
- If desired, press
to enter a different name for your implement. Press
when complete.
Select Second Implement.
- Use drop-down menu to select Implement or press
- Press
if there is no second implement.
- Press
if a second implement is being used.
to add second implement.
16. Select Speed Source
Use drop-down menu to select Primary Source, set Backup Source, and configure Auxiliary Device
Channel. Press Calibrate Distance to launch the Speed Sensor Calibration Wizard.
17. Enter Configuration Name
A suggested name for the configuration appears. If desired, Press
your configuration. Press
to enter a different name for
when complete.
The completed configuration should now appear under the Application heading located on the
Configuration tab of the Configuration Setup screen.
CONTROLLER SETTINGS
Select Your Specific
Configuration
Configuration
Controller Settings
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > Configuration (tractor) button > Configuration tab > select
your specific configuration > Setup (wrench) button >Controller Settings button
Controller Settings screen appears, with each channel’s settings shown on its own tab.
The settings shown at this screen vary, depending upon whether your spreader uses a PWM Control
Valve or a Servo Control Valve. Use the Control Valve Configuration drop-down menu to choose the
appropriate configuration for your machine.
Settings for a PWM Control Valve are described below.
Settings for a Servo Valve are described at “Spreader Control: Servo Control Valve” on page 244.
The Spinner Tab appears behind the channel tabs. The Spinner Tab is where Fan Speed settings are
shown. The Spinner Tab and Fan Speed settings are described at “Spreader Control: Spinner Tab” on
page 245.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
243
SPREADER
- If desired, press
www.4qte.com
Spreader Control: PWM Control Valve
Spreader Control
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Spinner
Control Valve Configuration
PWM
Allowable
Error
PWM Frequency
Shaft Speed
Calibration
180 pls/rev
Max Speed
PWM Gain
60 rpm
Zero Flow Offset
• PWM Frequency
The frequency that the PWM control valve is pulsed at.
Settings can be found from the manufacturer of the
valve. Typical settings range from 100-125 Hz. The
default setting is 100.
• PWM Gain
Determines how aggressively the control valve
responds when making rate adjustments. The higher the
value the more aggressive the system response is. The
default setting is 100.
• Zero Flow Offset
Represents the maximum duty cycle that is sent to the
control valve without producing any hydraulic flow from
the PWM valve. Using too high of a Zero RPM Offset
value can cause the conveyor to not properly shut off.
See the PWM valve manufacturer information for
recommended settings. The default setting is 30.
• Allowable Error
Determines the percent of error that is allowed prior to the product control system making any flow rate
changes. 2% - 3% is the normal dead band setting range.
- Too low of a setting value can cause the product control system to continually hunt for the target
application rate.
- Too high of a setting will cause excessive product application error.
• Shaft Speed Calibration
Calibration number representing the pulses that equal one revolution of the rate control metering system.
• Max Speed
The Maximum Conveyor Speed Setting determines the maximum RPM of the conveyor that controls
product distribution to the application point.
Spreader Control: Servo Control Valve
Spreader Control
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Spinner
Control Valve Configuration
Servo
Valve
Response 1
Valve
Response 2
Response
Threshold
Allowable
Error
Shaft Speed
Calibration
15
40 %
8%
2%
180 pls/rev
Max Speed
60 rpm
244
• Valve Response 1
Determines the speed of the servo valve when product
control error exceeds the Response Threshold setting.
Represents the fast speed of the servo valve.
Decreasing the value will cause the servo valve to run
slower. The default setting is 40%.
• Valve Response 2
Determines the speed of the servo valve when product
control error is less than the Response Threshold
setting. Represents the slow speed of the servo valve.
Decreasing the value will cause the servo valve to run
slower. The default setting is 8%.
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
APPLICATION
- Decreasing this value will have the overall effect of speeding up servo valve response.
- Increasing this value will have the overall effect of slowing servo valve response.
• Allowable Error
Determines the percent of error that is allowed prior to the product control system making any flow rate
changes. 2% - 3% is the normal dead band setting range.
- Too low of a setting value can cause the product control system to continually hunt for the target
application rate.
- Too high of a setting will cause excessive product application error.
• Shaft Speed Calibration
Calibration number representing the pulses that equal one revolution of the rate control metering system.
• Max Speed
The Maximum Conveyor Speed setting determines the maximum RPM of the conveyor that controls
product distribution to the application point.
Spreader Control: Spinner Tab
To view Fan Speed Calibration settings, press the Spinner Tab. Operators with Spinner Spreaders that
use PWM valves will see additional active settings.
Spreader Control
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Spinner
Fan Speed
Calibration
4 pls/rev
PWM
Gain
PWM
Frequency
20
100 Hz
Zero RPM
Offset
30
Automatic
Control
• Fan Speed Calibration
The number of pulses that are generated by the sensor
during one revolution of the spinner dish. The default
setting is 4.
• PWM Gain
Determines how aggressively the control valve
responds when making spinner speed adjustments. The
higher the value the more aggressive the system
response is. The default setting is 20.
• PWM Frequency
The frequency that the PWM control valve is pulsed at.
Settings can be found from the manufacturer of the
valve. Typical settings range from 100-125 Hz. The
default setting is 100.
• Zero RPM Offset
Represents the maximum duty cycle that is sent to the
control valve without producing any hydraulic flow from
the PWM valve. Using too high of a Zero RPM Offset
value can cause the spinner system to not properly shut
off. The default setting is 30.
Note: See the PWM valve manufacturer information for recommended settings.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
245
SPREADER
• Response Threshold
Determines where the control channel switches between using Valve Response 1 and Valve Response 2
speed setting. Leaving all other valve control settings at the default value and making a small adjustment
to this setting is usually all that is required to fine-tune system performance. The default setting is 15.
www.4qte.com
• Automatic Control
Checking this box enables closed loop spinner control.
Beginning with the 5.4 display firmware upgrade, checking the Automatic Control
check box exposes a Spinner Icon in the Task Bar that allows user to turn on/off
spinners from the Map Screen. Automatic Control default setting is unchecked.
CREATING PRODUCTS
Creating application products including dry fertilizer blends can be completed upon initial setup or from
the Product Selection screen of the Field Operation Wizard when starting a field operation.
CREATING SINGLE PRODUCTS
To create a single product, to be added to a blend or to be applied by itself, use the on-screen wizard
described in the following steps.
Application
Product
Product
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > Configuration (tractor) button > Product tab > Add (+)
button > Application Product button
1. Select Product Type
Use drop-down menu to select Product.
Press
to continue.
2. Select Product Units
When selecting the following fertilizers, use drop-down menu to select the product units:
- Ag Lime
- Pell Lime
- User Defined Lime
- User Defined N-P-K
- User Defined Micronutrient
- Other
Press
to continue.
3. Enter Product Name
Default product name appears. Press
Press
to enter a new name.
to complete product setup or press
to return to Configuration Setup screen without
making a change.
Created product should appear under the Application heading located on the Product tab of the
Configuration Setup screen.
CREATING DRY FERTLIZER BLENDS
Dry fertilizer blends are set up using the on-screen wizard described in the following steps.
246
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
APPLICATION
1. Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > Configuration (tractor) button > Product tab > Add (+)
button > Mix/Blend button
2. From the Type drop-down menu select Dry Blend
From the Define By drop-down menu select:
• Total amounts - to define blend by amounts going into the bin
• Rate/acre - to define blend by the amounts going on an acre
Press
to continue.
3. From drop-drown menu select base units.
Press
to continue.
4. Press
to start the process of adding components to the blend.
Note: Any liquid herbicides set up within the system can be added to create an impregnated blend product.
5. Select the desired component from the drop-down menu.
More than 7 products can be put part of a Mix/Blend but only 7 or fewer can be active at the same time.
A new product can be set up at this time by pressing
Press
and following the Product Setup Wizard.
to add selected product or press
to return to Add Mix/Blend screen without adding
a product.
6. Press
to add an additional component.
7. When all components have been added press
.
8. Enter Manufacturer name if applicable.
- Manufacturer name can be added to the drop-down menu by pressing
9. Press
Press
to enter a unique name for the blend.
to complete the process of setting up the dry blend or press
to return to
Configuration Setup screen without adding a mix.
Created blend should appear under the Application heading located on the Product tab of the Configuration
Setup screen.
Represents Dry Blend prior to display firmware version 5.4 and mixes exported from SMS. Cannot be edited by user.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
247
SPREADER
Mix / Blend
Product
www.4qte.com
New Dry Blend/Product Template created beginning with display firmware 5.4. Can be edited by user.
LOAD CONFIGURATION
1. Press: Select Event button.
Select a Season, Grower, Farm, and
Field on the Management Selection
screen. For more information, see
“Setup Event” on page 45.
Select Event
2. Product Selection
Select product from the drop-down list or press
to create a new one.
More than 7 products can be part of a Mix/Blend but 7 or fewer can be active at the same time.
Press
to continue.
3. Configure Product Mix
Product Blends can be adjusted after they are
created by:
-a.activating or de-activating products
-b.changing rate or total amount of a product
-c.changing total amount of the product or overall rate of
product application
These values can be changed on the Configure
Product Mix screen which is available in the event
setup wizard or by pressing a product line on the
home screen.
A product can not be active with a rate of zero.
When all product mixes have been configured press
248
.
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
APPLICATION
Select Region from drop-down menu or use press
keyboard button to name region.
Select Controlling Product for the Mix/Blend.
Press
to complete the process of setting up
the dry blend or press
to return to Home screen
without setting up an event.
RUN CONFIGURATION
Once a configuration has been completed, the Map View button appears at the bottom of the
Home screen. Press the Map View button to see the Map screen. The map below is displayed
in Zoom to Extent view.
Below is an example of a Spinner Spreader Granular Product Control applying two products.
DAP
4.09 ac
DAP
lb/ac
1
200.00
200.00
Rate
205 +
185 - 205
165 - 185
145 - 165
0 -145
Potash
lb/ac
1
200
• (A) Mapping Toolbox
2
175
• (B) Product Control Toolbox
• (C) Conveyor Indicator
150.00
150.00
• (D) Settings button (Spreader Control)
Flow:
Container:
60 ft 0 in
Fan Frame
3.5
Feed Gate
2.0
1
2
RPM
700 rpm
25
181.6 lb/min
93 ft3
• (E) Spinner On/Off
• (F) AutoSwath
• (G) Master Switch Status (on)
25
AUTOMATIC SPINNER CONTROL
To turn Automatic Control functionality On/Off in the configuration setup see “Automatic Control” on
page 246.
Turn Spinners on/off by pressing the Spinner Icon located in the Task Bar. After
pressing the Spinner Icon, a warning will appear alerting user the spinners will turn
on and to remain clear of equipment.
Press
to turn spinners on and clear warning dialog. Press
and clear warning dialog.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
to keep spinners from running
249
SPREADER
4. Select Region and Controlling Product
www.4qte.com
SPINNER SPREADER, WITH TWO-BIN
CONFIGURATION
• Settings button (Spreader Control)
Press the Settings button to display the Spreader Control screen and settings. These settings include
Spread Width, Spinner Speed (if enabled), Product Density, Feed Gate Opening, Conveyor Rate, and Fan
Frame (if applicable). For more information, see section beginning at “Spreader Control screen” on page 250.
• Conveyor Indicator
The Conveyor Indicator is shown at the bottom of the Product Control toolbox when the Map screen is
shown in Zoom to Extent. When the Map screen is shown in the Zoom to Details view or Perspective View,
the conveyor indicator is shown as a bar that appears behind the vehicle icon.
RUN TIME OPERATIONS
1
During Run Time Operations, Spinner Spreader operators can press the Settings
button to open the Spreader Control screen. At this screen, you can adjust Spread
Width, Spinner Speed, Product Density and other settings.
2
• Each of these settings described below must be set for each individual Product Channel (bin).
• Changed settings do not take effect until verified. However, if your machine is equipped with Fan Frame
& Feed Gate Actuators, and you have also purchased a New Leader Linear Actuator unlock code, the
settings on the spinner bed will change automatically.
• The Spread Width, Spinner Speed, Product Density, Feed Gate 1 Opening and the Conveyor 1 Rate
are all stored with each combination of product and control channel.
Spreader Control screen
Spreader Control
Spread Width
Channel 1
• Spread Width
Channel 2
Press
60 ft
DAP
Spinner Speed
700 rpm
Product
Density
Feed Gate 1
Opening
58 lb/ft3
2 in
Conveyor 1
Rate
0.256 ft3/rev
Chain
Oiler
Static
Calibration
In-Field
Calibration
Fan Frame
3.5 in
Fan Frame
Feed Gate
to edit the value.
• Spinner Speed
The spinner speed required for accurate product
placement in relation to the spread width setting.
- The spinner speed is controlled automatically based
upon this setting when the system uses an optional PWM
spinner speed control valve.
- To accurately determine Spinner Speed settings you
should perform a spread pattern catch test. See
“Spreader Control: Static Calibration” on page 253.
• Product Density
This density value (shown in pounds per cubic foot, or
lb./ft.3), is stored with each product. Press
to edit if needed.
Note: For proper machine performance and accuracy, you should check the Product Density daily.
250
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
APPLICATION
• Conveyor 1 Rate
This setting represents the volume of product dispensed by one revolution of the conveyor drive shaft (cubic
foot per revolution, or ft3/rev.) This number is shown with the assumption that the conveyor shaft has a 1inch gate opening. This conveyor rate remains constant, regardless of the height of the feed gate opening.
CAUTION: You must either manually enter conveyor rate value or perform a CFR calibration routine for each
product and channel combination, otherwise misapplication will occur.
Conveyor Rate Look-Up
A pop-up screen will display a warning when a product is assigned to a container or bin for the first time
and has not been calibrated. The warning prompts the operator to review product density and conveyor
rate settings.
4.09 ac
DAP
DAP
lb/ac
1
200
200.00
200.00
Rate
205 +
185 - 205
165 - 185
145 - 165
0 -145
MAP
2
175
lb/ac
50.00
50.00
Conveyor rates for previously applied products can be
found by first pressing the Settings button (A) which
opens the Spreader Control screen.
1
2
Flow:
60 ft 0 in
Fan Frame
3.5
Feed Gate
2.0
1
2
25
25
RPM
700 rpm
The Spreader Control screen has a tab for each
control channel/product being applied. Select the
desired channel and press the Conveyor Rate
button.
Spreader Control
Spread Width
Channel 1
Channel 2
60 ft
DAP
Spinner Speed
700 rpm
Product
Density
Feed Gate 1
Opening
58 lb/ft3
2 in
Conveyor 1
Rate
0.256 ft3/rev
Chain
Oiler
Static
Calibration
In-Field
Calibration
Fan Frame
3.5 in
Fan Frame
Feed Gate
CAUTION: For proper machine performance and accuracy, Product Density should be measured for every
application load.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
251
SPREADER
• Feed Gate 1 Opening
Represents the Feed Gate opening for Conveyor 1. Measure the depth of product on the conveyor to
ensure accurate feed gate setting value.
www.4qte.com
The Conveyor Rate button opens a setup screen where the
conveyor rate can be inputted and a table of previously
applied products and conveyor rates is shown.
Conveyor Rate
Conveyor 1 Rate
0.256 ft3/rev
Conveyor Rates for Products Previously Applied
Product
ft3/rev
Ag Lime
0.0000
DAP
0.2560
Press the conveyor rate button and press
desired conveyor rate.
to input
Press
to accept the new conveyor rate and return to
the Spreader Control window.
Fan Frame & Feed Gate Actuator Settings
These are optional settings used by the operators using a New Leader Linear Actuator module and Fan
Frame - Feed Gate Control unlock.
• Fan Frame
Checking the Fan Frame check box enables the Fan Frame Actuator. Displays the distance between the
spinner bed and the spinner assembly. Press
to edit this value.
• Feed Gate
Checking the Feed Gate check box enables the Feed Gate Actuator.
Spreader Control: Routine Operations
The Spreader Control screen has three buttons, Chain Oiler, Static Calibration and In-Field Calibration,
which are described below and on the following pages.
Spreader Control: Chain Oiler
If you are using a Chain Oiler, you can automatically perform a chain oiling routine by pressing the Chain
Oiler button on the Spreader Control screen and following the steps below.
Note: Perform a chain oiling routine daily.
1. Press Settings button
To begin, press the Settings button to open the Spreader Control screen. At the
1
2
Spreader Control screen, press the Chain Oiler button.
2. Acknowledge the first warning
Manually disable or shut off the spinner hydraulic circuit.
3. Enter a Routine Duration
Enter the routine time that it takes to turn the conveyor one revolution.
4. Press Start
Press the Start button, and when the routine is finished press
.
5. Acknowledge the second warning.
Return the spinner hydraulic control to a field-ready condition.
252
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
APPLICATION
You must perform a conveyor discharge calibration for each granular product control channel (bin) for
the equipment configuration. This process is outlined below and on the following page. The static
calibration procedure is performed before applying in field conditions.
1. Press Settings button
To begin, press the Settings button on the Map screen. The Spreader Control screen
1
2
opens.
2. Start Calibrate Conveyor routine
Press the Static Calibration button to start the Static Conveyor Rate calibration routine.
3. Disable Spinner Hydraulic Circuit
The system will present a warning to disable the spinner hydraulic circuit. Press
circuit is disabled.
after the hydraulic
WARNING: Manually disable or shut off the spinner hydraulic circuit. If the spinner runs unexpectedly, injury
could occur.
4. Select Conveyor to Calibrate
5. Enter Dispense Amount
Enter the desired target amount of product to dispense (the recommended amount is 500 pounds or 250
kilograms). Press
to continue.
6. Start Dispensing Product
Press the Start button to begin dispensing the product.
7. Product Dispensing
The conveyor will stop when the system perceives the target amount of product has been dispensed. The
Stop button can be pressed at any time to manually shut off the conveyor.
8. Product Dispensing Stops
On the screen shown after dispensing the display’s target amount, value can be reset and the process
started again for a larger sample size, if desired. Press
to continue.
9. Enter Actual Dispense Amount
Enter the actual weight of the product dispensed. Press
to continue.
10. Finish Calibration
A screen displays, stating Calibration Complete and underneath is shown the newly-calibrated conveyor
rate.
- Press
to exit the calibration without saving the value.
- Press Repeat Calibration to begin the process again.
- Press
to save the value and exit the calibration routine.
11. Restart spinner hydraulic circuit
Restart the spinner hydraulic circuit.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
253
SPREADER
Spreader Control: Static Calibration
www.4qte.com
WARNING: Make sure the spinner is free of material before restarting the spinner hydraulic circuit.
12. A warning will appear when exiting the calibration wizard, instructing you to return the spinner control
hydraulic circuit to a field-ready condition.
Spreader Control: In-Field Calibration
The In-Field Conveyor Calibration procedure performs an automated routine to adjust the calibration
number for the selected spinner bin. This calibration is performed if there is a difference between the
amount of product logged as compared to what was actually applied.
1. Press Settings button
To begin, press the Settings button on the Map screen. The Spreader Control screen
1
2
opens. Press the In-Field Calibration button on the Spreader Control screen. The InField Conveyor Rate Calibration Wizard appears.
2. Select Conveyor to Calibrate
Select the channel to calibrate, and press
to continue.
3. Enter Actual Weight
The Accumulated Weight is shown in the top portion of the window. Press
Weight, and press
to enter the Actual
to continue.
4. Calibration Complete
A message appears, stating that your calibration is complete, and showing the CFR amount in cubic feet
per revolution. Press
to finish.
TROUBLESHOOTING DIRECTCOMMAND GRANULAR APPLICATIONS
Problem: Run screen Granular channel(s) green light spreader indicator will not turn on.
Solution:
1. Make sure ground speed is registered a value greater than zero on the display.
2. Verify a target rate greater than zero is entered into the display.
3. Check the switch status found on the Run screen under System and Auxiliary Input Diagnostics.
As the master switch is turned on and off, the Auxiliary Input Diagnostics window should
change from black to green (if they do not, then refer to the installation instructions to verify
switch connections).
4. Check high current connection into the Granular Control Module.
Problem: Master switch will not turn on when the foot pedal is on.
Solution: Make sure the Master Source Input is set to “External 2” under the Auxiliary Input
Settings.
Problem: AutoSwath turns on the booms too fast or too slow.
Solution: Check GPS offsets in the vehicle setup to verify all of the measurements are
correct.
Problem: AutoSwath feature is not shown.
Solution: The display must have the AutoSwath feature password-unlocked before the
feature is available to the operator.
254
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
APPLICATION
1. Make sure the ground speed is registering a value greater than zero on the display.
2. Make sure the applicator is inside of the field boundary.
Problem: Conveyor turns off in the middle of the pass.
Solution: Check the display firmware and module firmware to see if they are running the
latest version.
Problem: Total Applied does not match Actual Weight Applied.
Solution:
1. Make sure the shaft speed pls/rev are set correctly in the controller settings.
2. Make sure the controlling product is set to the correct units.
Problem: Rate not responding.
Solution:
1. Make sure there is a ground speed registering on the display.
2. Make sure the shaft speed pls/rev are set correctly in the controller settings.
(You must make sure to account for sprocket ratios if chain driven).
Driven Teeth
X Rate Sensor Pulses = True Pulses
Drive Teeth
3. The CFR number may need to be adjusted.
TROUBLESHOOTING SERIAL CONTROL APPLICATIONS
Problem: Rate changes on the display, but not on the controlled console.
Solution:
1. Verify the current firmware is running on the display and Application Rate module.
2. Check the settings specific to your controlled console. (For more information, refer to the Quick
Reference Guide).
3. Check cabling and all connections.
4. Disconnect the serial connection and determine if the controller is functioning properly without
the display.
Problem: The display rate and serial-controlled rate do not match.
Solution:
1. Verify the current firmware is running on the display and Application Rate Module.
2. Check to make sure the nominal rate in the display matches the nominal rate in the serialcontrolled console.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
255
SPREADER
Problem: AutoSwath is checked on, but the spreader will not turn on.
www.4qte.com
256
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
APPLICATION
STRIP TILL
DirectCommand for Strip-Till applicators monitors bin level and fan speed sensors, maintains an
accurate application rate and supports multiple product prescription rate control for up to three granular
products. The Strip Till module supports PWM and Motorized Servo valves as well as Linear Actuator
Product Control. System can be configured for Strip Till fertilizer application or Air Seeder (Planting)
control. To create an Air Seeder (Planting) configuration continue to “Create Air Seeder Configuration” on
page 259.
CREATE STRIP TILL FERTILIZER CONFIGURATION
Application
Configuration
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > Configuration (tractor) button > Configuration tab > Add
(+) button > Application button
A wizard will guide you through the process of selecting or creating a vehicle, implement and controller.
1. Select Vehicle
Use drop-down menu to choose a vehicle, or press
continue.
to enter a new vehicle. Press
to
Note: It is recommended that Vehicle Offset Information be entered before continuing with the configuration
process.
2. Select Implement
Select an implement from the drop-down list menu, or press
to create a new implement. Press
to continue.
3. Select Implement Attachment Type
Use the drop-down list to select an implement attachment method. Press
to continue.
4. Enter Hitch to Implement Axle Distance
Press
to enter the hitch to implement axle distance. Press
to accept.
5. Add Strip Till Functionality to the Implement
Press
Granular
Application
then
Strip Till
to add Strip Till functionality to the implement.
6. Select Controller
Use the drop-down menu to select controller or press
continue.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
to add a controller. Press
to
257
STRIP TILL
APPLICATION
www.4qte.com
7. Select Controller Device
Select DirectCommand from the Device drop-down menu. Select Granular Strip-Till Control from the
Device Type drop-down menu. Press
to continue.
8. Enter Controller Name
Controller name defaults to DirectStrip Till. Press
to accept, or press
name if desired. Press
again to continue.
to continue. Press
to enter a new
9. Container Setup (Equipment Setup Wizard: Container screen)
Press the desired channel button to enable or disable controller channel. A check mark will appear in the
box when the container is ready to be configured.
10. Assign Container Name
Container name defaults to “Bin 1, 2, or 3”. Press
to enter a new name if desired.
11. Assign Container Capacity
Use
to enter the container capacity. Press
to accept.
12. Enter Container Units
Use the drop-down menu to select the container units. Once container has been configured press
to continue.
Note: Follow steps 9-12 for each control channel.
13. Enter Full Swath Width
Full Swath width defaults to a value of 30 ft. Use
Press
to enter the full swath width of the implement.
to continue.
14. Enter Application Point Offset
Use
to enter distance from hitch to application point (front to back). Press
to accept.
Note: At this point additional functionality can be added to the implement. If no additional
functionality is being added, press
to continue.
15. Hitch Point Configuration
Press the Implement Provides a Hitch Point button to enter Hitch Point information. Use
to enter
Left or Right distance. Use drop-down menu to indicate distance to the left or right. Use
to enter
Forward or Backward distance. Press
to continue.
16. Enter Implement Name
A suggested name for the implement appears. Press
for the implement. Press
258
to accept or press
to enter a name
to continue.
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
APPLICATION
Press
to continue.
18. Select Second Implement
Use drop-down menu to select Implement or press
implement is desired, press
to add second implement. If no second
to continue.
19. Select Speed Source
Use drop-down menu to select Primary Source, set Backup Source, and configure Auxiliary Channel.
Press Calibrate Speed Sensor to launch the Speed Sensor Calibration Wizard. Press
continue.
to
20. Enter Configuration Name
A suggested name for the configuration appears. If desired, press
configuration. Press
to enter a different name for
when complete.
The completed configuration should now appear under the Application heading located on the
Configuration tab of the Configuration Setup screen.
The Operating Configuration will now be able to be selected when starting a new Field Operation with
the Field Operation Wizard.
CREATE AIR SEEDER CONFIGURATION
Planting
Configuration
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > Configuration (tractor) button > Configuration tab > Add
(+) button > Planting button to create a new planting operation configuration, which may also include
application equipment
A wizard will guide you through the process of selecting or creating a vehicle, implement and controller.
1. Select Vehicle
Use drop-down menu to choose a vehicle, or press
continue.
to enter a new vehicle. Press
to
Note: It is recommended that Vehicle Offset Information be entered before continuing with the configuration
process.
2. Select Implement
Select an implement from the drop-down list menu, or press
to create a new implement. Press
to continue.
3. Select Planter/Seeder Type
Use drop-down menu and select Air Seeder from the list. Press
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
to continue.
259
STRIP TILL
17. Select Implement
www.4qte.com
4. Enter Implement Information
Press
and enter implement Make and Model. Press
to continue.
5. Select Implement Attachment Type
Use the drop-down list to select an implement attachment method. Press
to continue.
6. Enter Distance Application Point Offset
Use
to enter distance from hitch to application point (Front to Back). Press
to continue.
7. Select Controller
Use the drop-down menu to select controller or press
continue.
to add a controller. Press
to
8. Select Controller Device and Device Type
Select DirectCommand from the Device drop-down menu. Select Granular Strip-Till Control from the
Device Type drop-down menu. Press
to continue.
9. Enter Controller Name
Controller name defaults to Direct Strip Till. Press
name if desired. Press
to accept, or press
to enter a new
to continue.
10. Enter Full Swath Width
Full Swath width defaults to a value of 30 ft. Use
Press
to enter the full swath width of the implement.
to continue.
11. Select Application Type from the Implement Wizard:Application Channels screen.
Press the Granular Application button.
12. Select Controller
Use the drop-down menu to select same controller as above. Press
to continue.
13. Container Setup (Equipment Setup Wizard: Container screen)
Press the desired channel button in order to enable or disable the controller channel. A check mark will
appear in the box when the container is ready to be configured.
Note: Channel 1 is automatically assigned as a seeding channel and is intentionally unavailable for
user to edit. Proceed with configuration of containers for channels 2 and 3.
14. Assign Container Name
Container name defaults to “Bin 2, or 3”. Press
to enter a new name if desired.
15. Assign Container Capacity
Use
260
to enter the container capacity. Press
to accept.
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
APPLICATION
STRIP TILL
16. Enter Container Units
Use the drop-down menu to select the container units. Once container has been configured press
to continue.
Note: Follow steps 13-16 for each control channel.
17. Enter Full Swath Width
Full Swath width defaults to a value of 30 ft. Press
Press
to enter the full swath width of the implement.
to continue.
18. Enter Application Point Offset
Use
to enter distance from hitch to application point (front to back). Press
to accept.
Note: At this point additional functionality can be added to the implement. If no additional
functionality is being added, press
to continue.
19. Enter Implement Name
A suggested name for the implement appears. Press
for the implement. Press
to accept or press
to enter a name
to continue.
20. Select Implement
Press
to continue.
21. Select Speed Source
Use drop-down menu to select Primary Source, set Backup Source, and configure Auxiliary Channel.
Press Calibrate Speed Sensor to launch the Speed Sensor Calibration Wizard. Press
continue.
to
22. Enter Configuration Name
A suggested name for the configuration appears. If desired, press
configuration. Press
to enter a different name for
when complete.
The complete configuration should now appear under the Planting heading located on the Configuration
tab of the Configuration Setup screen.
The Operating Configuration will now be able to be selected when starting a new Field Operation with
the Field Operation Wizard.
CONTROLLER SETTINGS
Configuration
Select Your Specific
Configuration
Controller Settings
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
261
www.4qte.com
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > Configuration (tractor) button > Configuration tab > select
your specific configuration > Setup (wrench) button >Controller Settings button
Controller Settings screen appears, with each channel’s settings shown on its own tab.
Controller settings viewed at the Strip Till Control window vary depending on Control Valve Configuration
type selected including PWM Control Valve, a Servo Control Valve, or a Linear Actuator configuration.
Use the Control Valve Configuration drop-down menu to choose the appropriate configuration for your
machine. Control valve configuration settings are described in the following section. The Auxiliary Tab
allows for adjusting fan settings described at “Strip Till Control: Auxiliary Tab” on page 272.
Strip Till Control: Servo Control Valve
Strip Till Control
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Auxiliary
Control Valve Configuration
Servo
Valve
Response 1
Valve
Response 2
Response
Threshold
Allowable
Error
15
40 %
8%
Shaft Speed
Calibration
180 pls/rev
• Valve Response 1
Determines the speed of the servo valve when product
control error exceeds the Response Threshold setting.
Represents the fast speed of the servo valve.
Decreasing the value will cause the servo valve to run
slower. The default setting is 40%.
2%
Max Metering
Speed
100 rpm
• Valve Response 2
Determines the speed of the servo valve when product
control error is less than the Response Threshold
setting. Represents the slow speed of the servo valve.
Decreasing the value will cause the servo valve to run
slower. The default setting is 8%.
• Response Threshold
Determines where the control channel switches between using Valve Response 1 and Valve Response 2
speed setting. Leaving all other valve control settings at the default value and making a small adjustment
to this setting is usually all that is required to fine tune system performance. The default setting is 15.
- Decreasing this value will have the overall effect of speeding up servo valve response.
- Increasing this value will have the overall effect of slowing servo valve response.
• Allowable Error
Determines the percent of error that is allowed prior to the product control system making any flow rate
changes. 2% - 3% is the normal dead band setting range.
- Too low of a setting value can cause the product control system to continually hunt for the target
application rate.
- Too high of a setting will cause excessive product application error.
• Shaft Speed Calibration
Calibration number representing the pulses that equal one revolution of the rate control metering system.
• Max Metering Speed
Setting determines the maximum RPM of the metering shaft that controls product distribution to the
application point. This setting is used when controlling a granular strip-till toolbar.
262
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
APPLICATION
Strip Till Control
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Auxiliary
Control Valve Configuration
PWM
Allowable
Error
PWM Frequency
180 pls/rev
100
PWM Gain
100
Zero Flow Offset
30
Shaft Speed
Calibration
2%
Max Metering
Speed
100 rpm
• PWM Frequency
The frequency that the PWM control valve is pulsed at.
Settings can be found from the manufacturer of the
valve. Typical settings range from 100-125 Hz. The
default setting is 100.
• PWM Gain
Determines how aggressively the control valve responds
when making rate changes. The higher the value the
more aggressive the system response is. The default
setting is 100.
• Zero Flow Offset
Represents the maximum duty cycle that is sent to the
control valve without producing any hydraulic flow from
the PWM valve. Using too high of a Zero RPM Offset value can cause the conveyor to not properly shut off.
See the PWM valve manufacturer information for recommended settings. The default setting is 30.
• Allowable Error
Determines the percent of error that is allowed prior to the product control system making any flow rate
changes. 2% - 3% is the normal dead band setting range.
- Too low of a setting value can cause the product control system to continually hunt for the target
application rate.
- Too high of a setting will cause excessive product application error.
• Shaft Speed Calibration
Calibration number representing the pulses that equal one revolution of the rate control metering system.
• Max Metering Speed
Setting determines the maximum RPM of the metering shaft that controls product distribution to the
application point. This setting is used when controlling a granular strip-till toolbar.
Linear Actuator/Clutch Settings
Note: When using Linear Actuator Control, the system requires the Control Valve Configuration on all three
channels to be set the same.
Strip Till Control
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Auxiliary
Control Valve Configuration
Single Bin Actuator
Actuator
Response 1
Actuator
Response 2
Response
Threshold
Allowable
Error
4
90 %
18 %
Shaft Speed
Calibration
180 pls/rev
• Actuator Response 1
Determines the speed of the actuator when product
control error exceeds the Response Threshold setting.
Represents the fast speed of the actuator. Decreasing
the value will cause the actuator to run slower. The
default setting is 90%.
2%
Max Metering
Speed
100 rpm
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
• Actuator Response 2
Determines the speed of the actuator when product
control error is less than the Response Threshold
setting. Represents the slow speed of the actuator.
Decreasing the value will cause the actuator to run
slower. The default setting is 18%.
263
STRIP TILL
Strip Till Control: PWM Control Valve
www.4qte.com
Strip Till Control
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Auxiliary
Control Valve Configuration
Single Bin Actuator
Allowable
Error
Servo
PWM
Shaft Speed
Calibration
180 pls/rev
2%
Single Ben Actuator
Multiple Bin Actuator, Main Only
Multiple Bin Actuator, Main + Channel
Max Metering
Speed
100 rpm
• Response Threshold
Determines where the control channel switches between
using Actuator Response 1 and Actuator Response 2
speed settings. Leaving all other actuator control
settings at the default value and making a small
adjustment to this setting is usually all that is required to
fine-tune system performance. The default setting is 4.
- Decreasing this value will have the overall effect of
speeding up actuator response.
- Increasing this value will have the overall effect of
slowing actuator response.
• Allowable Error
Determines the percent of error that is allowed prior to
the product control system making any flow rate changes. 2% - 3% is the normal dead band setting range.
- Too low of a setting value can cause the product control system to continually hunt for the target
application rate.
- Too high of a setting will cause excessive product application error.
• Shaft Speed Cal
Calibration number representing the pulses that equal one revolution of the rate control metering system.
• Max Conveyor Speed
Setting determines the maximum RPM of the conveyor that controls product distribution to the application
point.
• Actuator/Clutch Configuration
Selecting one of the three available actuator/clutch settings: [Single Bin Actuator], [Multiple Bin Actuator,
Main Only], [Multiple Bin Actuator, Main + Channel] from the Control Valve Configuration drop-down menu
(above) determines specific behavior of the actuators/clutches on zero rate.
264
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
APPLICATION
STRIP TILL
Actuator/Clutch Logic
Determines Actuator/Clutch Behavior on Zero Rate
Control Component State
Control Channel RPM
Commanded to Zero Other than
by Master Switch Off
Control Valve Configuration
Single Bin Actuator
Multiple Bin Actuator,
Main Only
Multiple Bin Actuator,
Main + Channel
Master Switch Off
Main Clutch Output = Off
Main Clutch Output = Off
Channel Clutch Output = Off
Channel Clutch Output = Off
Linear Actuator = Hold
Linear Actuator = Hold
Main Clutch Output = On
Main Clutch Output = Off
Channel Clutch Output = Off
Channel Clutch Output = Off
Linear Actuator = Close
Linear Actuator = Hold
Main Clutch Output = On
Main Clutch Output = Off
Channel Clutch Output = Off
Channel Clutch Output = Off
Linear Actuator = Hold
Linear Actuator = Hold
CREATING DRY FERTLIZER BLENDS
Dry fertilizer blends are set up using the on-screen wizard described in the following steps.
Mix / Blend
Product
1. Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > Configuration (tractor) button > Product tab > Add (+)
button > Mix/Blend button
2. From the Type drop-down menu select Dry Blend
From the Define By drop-down menu select:
• Total amounts - to define blend by amounts going into the bin
• Rate/acre - to define blend by the amounts going on an acre
Press
to continue.
3. From drop-drown menu select base units.
Press
4. Press
to continue.
to start the process of adding components to the blend.
Note: Any liquid herbicides set up within the system can be added to create an impregnated blend product.
5. Select the desired component from the drop-down menu.
More than 7 products can be put part of a Mix/Blend but only 7 or fewer can be active at the same time.
A new product can be set up at this time by pressing
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
and following the Product Setup Wizard.
265
www.4qte.com
Press
to add selected product or press
to return to Add Mix/Blend screen without adding
a product.
6. Press
to add an additional component.
7. When all components have been added press
.
8. Enter Manufacturer name if applicable.
- Manufacturer name can be added to the drop-down menu by pressing
9. Press
Press
to enter a unique name for the blend.
to complete the process of setting up the dry blend or press
to return to
Configuration Setup screen without adding a mix.
Created blend should appear under the Application heading located on the Product tab of the Configuration
Setup screen.
Represents Dry Blend prior to display firmware version 5.4 and mixes exported from SMS. Cannot be edited by user.
New Dry Blend/Product Template created beginning with display firmware 5.4. Can be edited by user.
LOAD CONFIGURATION
Press: Select Event button.
Select Event
Select a Season, Grower, Farm, and
Field on the Management Selection
screen.
For more information, see “Setup Event” on page 45.
RUN CONFIGURATION
Once a configuration has been completed, the Map View button appears at the bottom of the
Home screen. Press the Map View button to see the Map screen. The map below is displayed
in Zoom to Detail view.
266
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
APPLICATION
14.0 mph
4.09 ac
lb/ac
DAP
100.00
100.00
MAP
Meter Prime is for Hydraulic Drives ONLY.
Press the Settings button (Strip Till Control).
lb/ac
50.00
50.00
1
2
3
RPM
20
2500
15
15
Channel 2
In-Field
Calibration
2
1 2
Start
Prime
Press the Prime button to access the Air Cart Prime
screen.
Channel 3
MAP
Static
Calibration
1
The Strip Till Control screen appears.
Strip Till Control
Channel 1
STRIP TILL
Meter Prime
Product
Density
62 lb/ft3
Conveyor 1
Rate
0 ft3/rev
Prime
The Air Cart Prime screen appears with input
buttons for each channel used. The setting
determines the revolutions necessary to prime the
meter shaft. Settings are independent by channel,
Air Cart Prime
Channel 1
Revolutions
and can be entered using
0.25
Channel 2
Revolutions
0.25
1 2 3
Start
Prime
.
(A) Start Prime
(B) Channel 1 Revolutions
Channel 3
Revolutions
(C) Channel 2 Revolutions
0.25
(D) Channel 3 Revolutions
Note: Meter Prime routine is not available and remains hidden for ground driven metering configurations.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
267
www.4qte.com
Strip Till Control
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Auxiliary
Control Valve Configuration
Single Bin Actuator
Actuator
Response 1
Actuator
Response 2
Allowable
Error
Response
Threshold
4
180 pls/rev
18 %
90 %
Shaft Speed
Calibration
2%
Max Metering
Speed
100 rpm
14.0 mph
4.09 ac
lb/ac
DAP
100.00
100.00
MAP
lb/ac
50.00
50.00
1
2
3
RPM
4481
23
26
26
The Start Prime button (A) begins the meter prime
routine and each meter shaft will rotate the number of
revolutions as defined on the Air Cart Prime Screen.
1 2
Start
Prime
RUN TIME OPERATIONS
1
2
During Run Time Operations, Strip Till operators can press the Settings button to
open the Strip Till Control screen. At this screen, you can adjust Product Density,
Conveyor Rate and other settings.
• Each of these settings described below must be set for each individual Product Channel (bin).
• The Product Density, and the Conveyor 1 Rate are all stored with each combination of product and
control channel.
STRIP-TILL (THREE-BIN CONFIGURATION)
In the bottom-center portion of the Map screen, the status of the product control channel is displayed.
The Meter Shaft Speed (in RPM) is shown underneath the bin icon; the Fan Speed (also in RPM) is
shown at the bottom. When the fertilizer bin is grey no product application is taking place. When product
is being applied, the fertilizer bin icon changes color to green.
• Settings button (Strip-Till Control)
Press the Settings button to display the Strip-Till Control screen and settings. These settings include
Product Density and Conveyor 1 Rate.
268
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
APPLICATION
Strip Till Control Screen
Strip Till Control
Channel 1
Channel 2
• Product Density
This density value (shown in pounds per cubic foot, or
Channel 3
DAP
Product
Density
Conveyor
Rate
Static
Calibration
In-Field
Calibration
lb./ft.3), is stored with each product. Press
edit value.
58 lb/ft3
to
0.256 ft3/rev
Prime
Note: For proper machine performance and accuracy. Product Density should be measured for every
application load.
• Conveyor 1 Rate
This setting represents the volume of product dispensed by one revolution of the conveyor drive shaft (cubic
foot per revolution, or ft.3 /rev.) This number is shown with the assumption that the conveyor shaft has a 1inch gate opening.
CAUTION: You must either manually enter conveyor rate value or perform a CFR calibration routine for
each product and channel combination, otherwise misapplication will occur.
• Static Calibration
Press the Static Calibration button to perform an automated routine to calibrate each metering circuit. This
calibration is performed before applying in field conditions. For more information, see “Static CFR Calibration
Procedure for Hydraulic Drive systems” on page 269.
• In-Field Calibration
Press the In-Field Calibration button to perform an automated routine to adjust the calibration number for
the selected metering circuit. This calibration is performed if there is a difference between the amount of
product logged as compared to what was actually applied. For more information, see “In-Field Calibration
Procedure (Strip Till)” on page 271.
Static CFR Calibration Procedure for Hydraulic Drive systems
You must perform a calibration for each granular product control channel (bin) for the equipment
configuration before applying in field conditions. This process is outlined below and on the following
page. The Static CFR Calibration Procedure performs an automated routine to calibrate each metering
circuit.
1
2
Static
Calibration
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
269
STRIP TILL
• Metering Indicator
The Metering Indicator is shown at the bottom of the Product Control Toolbox when the Map screen is
shown in Zoom to Extent. When the Map screen is shown in the Zoom Details view or Perspective View,
the metering indicator is shown as a bar that appears behind the vehicle icon.
www.4qte.com
Press: Map button > Settings button > Static Calibration button
1. Read Static Calibration warning
A warning appears, advising to disable the blower fan circuit and prepare to catch any product dispensed
in an appropriate container. Press
to continue.
2. Select Metering Circuit to Calibrate
The CFR Calibration Wizard appears. Use the drop-down menu to choose the desired channel to calibrate.
Press
to continue.
3. Enter Dispense Amount
Press
to enter the amount of product to be dispensed into the container. Press
value. Press
to accept
to continue.
4. Enter Simulated Target Rate
Press
to enter a simulated target rate, shown in pounds per acres. Press
Press
to continue.
CFR Calibration Wizard: Step 4 of 6
lb
Reset
START
to accept value.
5. Start Target Rate Countdown
Press the start button to begin metering product. The
metering circuit will stop automatically when the system
perceives the simulated target rate has been dispersed.
As the countdown is started, the button will turn red and
state Stop. When the countdown is complete, press
to continue.
6. Enter Actual Dispense Amount
Enter the actual dispense amount, in pounds.
Press
to continue.
Note: The CFR will be calculated from the actual product amount dispensed.
7. Calibration Complete
A message appears, stating that your calibration is complete, and showing the CFR amount, in cubic feet
per revolution. Either:
- Press
to exit the calibration without saving the value.
- Press Repeat Calibration to begin the process again.
- Press
to save the value and exit the calibration routine.
Static CFR Calibration Procedure for Ground Drive Systems
The Static CFR Calibration Procedure performs an automated routine to calibrate each metering circuit.
This calibration is performed before applying in field conditions To perform the Static CFR Calibration,
press the Strip Till Control button to open the Strip Till Control screen. At the Strip Till Control screen, the
Static Calibration button.
270
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
APPLICATION
2
Static
Calibration
Press: Map button > Settings button > Static Calibration button
1. Read Static Calibration warning
A warning appears, advising to disable the blower fan circuit and prepare to catch any product dispensed
in an appropriate container. Press
to continue.
2. Select Metering Circuit to Calibrate
The CFR Calibration Wizard appears. Use the drop-down menu to choose the desired channel to calibrate.
Press
to continue.
CFR Calibration Wizard: Steps 4 of 6
Press Start before dispensing product.
Press Stop when finished dispensing.
Revs
3. Start Target Rate Countdown
Press the Start button and turn drive shaft. The system
counts revolutions of the shaft encoder.
Press Stop button in display.
START
Press
to continue.
4. Enter Actual Dispense Amount
Enter the actual dispense amount, in pounds.
Press
to continue.
Note: The CFR will be calculated from the actual product amount dispensed.
5. Calibration Complete
A message appears, stating that your calibration is complete, and showing the CFR amount, in cubic feet
per revolution. Either:
- Press
to exit the calibration without saving the value.
- Press Repeat Calibration to begin the process again.
- Press
to save the value and exit the calibration routine.
In-Field Calibration Procedure (Strip Till)
The In-Field CFR Calibration procedure performs an automated routine to adjust the calibration number
for the selected metering circuit. This calibration is performed if there is a difference between the amount
of product logged as compared to what was actually applied. To do an In-Field Calibration procedure,
press the In-Field Calibration button on the Strip-Till Control screen, and the In-Field CFR Calibration
Wizard appears.
1. Select Metering Circuit to Calibrate
Use the drop-down menu to select the channel to calibrate, and press
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
to continue.
271
STRIP TILL
1
www.4qte.com
2. Enter Actual Weight
The Accumulated Weight is shown in the top portion of the screen. Press
Weight, and press
to enter the Actual
to continue.
3. Calibration Complete
A message appears, stating that your calibration is complete, and showing the CFR amount, in cubic feet
per revolution. Press
to finish the calibration.
Strip Till Control: Auxiliary Tab
Strip Till Control
Channel 2
Channel 1
Channel 3
Auxiliary
Fan
Fan Speed Cal
Min Speed
Max Speed
4 pls/rev
0 rpm
6000 rpm
Rate Not Responding Threshold
Rate Threshold
Low Fan Speed Shutoff
30 %
• Fan Speed Cal
Number of pulses that are generated by the sensor
during one revolution of the blower fan shaft.
• Min Speed
Setting represents the desired minimum speed of the
blower fan. An alarm will sound if the blower fan speed
falls below this value.
• Max Speed
Setting represents the desired maximum speed of the
blower fan. An alarm will sound if the blower fan speed
exceeds this value.
• Rate Threshold
Percentage difference between the Actual Rate and the Target Rate when the Rate Not Responding
Message is displayed on the Run screen.
• Low Fan Speed Shutoff
When selected, granular product application of a strip-till toolbar will be shut off if fan speed drops below
the Min Speed setting.
TROUBLESHOOTING DIRECTCOMMAND GRANULAR APPLICATIONS
Problem: Run screen Granular channel(s) green light spreader indicator will not turn on
Solution:
1. Make sure ground speed is registered a value greater than zero on the display.
2. Verify a target rate greater than zero is entered into the display.
3. Check the switch status found on the Run screen under System and Input Diagnostics. As the
master switch is turned on and off, the Input Diagnostics window should change from black to
green (if they do not, then refer to the installation instructions to verify switch connections).
4. Check high current connection into the Granular Control Module.
Problem: Master switch will not turn on when the foot pedal is on.
Solution: Make sure the Master Switch Input is set to “External 2” under the Auxiliary Input
Settings.
Problem: AutoSwath turns on the booms too fast or too slow.
Solution: Check GPS offsets in the vehicle setup to verify all of the measurements are
correct.
272
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
APPLICATION
Problem: AutoSwath is checked on, but the spreader will not turn on.
1. Make sure the ground speed is registering a value greater than zero on the display.
2. Make sure the applicator is inside of the field boundary.
Problem: Conveyor turns off in the middle of the pass
Solution: Check the display firmware and module firmware to see if they are running the
latest version.
Problem: Total Applied does not match Actual Weight Applied
Solution:
1. Make sure the shaft speed pls/rev are set correctly in the controller settings.
2. Make sure the controlling product is set to the correct units.
Problem: Rate not responding
Solution:
1. Make sure there is a ground speed registering on the display.
2. Make sure the shaft speed pls/rev are set correctly in the controller settings.
(You must make sure to account for sprocket ratios if chain driven)
Driven Teeth
X Rate Sensor Pulses = True Pulses
Drive Teeth
3. Check the user-defined value found under the controller settings for Strip-Till.
4. The CFR number may need to be adjusted.
TROUBLESHOOTING SERIAL CONTROL APPLICATIONS
Problem: Rate changes on the display, but not on the controlled console.
Solution:
1. Verify the current firmware is running on the display and Application Rate module.
2. Check the settings specific to your controlled console. (For more information, refer to the Quick
Reference Guide).
3. Check cabling and all connections.
4. Disconnect the serial connection and determine if the controller is functioning properly without
the display.
Problem: The display rate and serial-controlled rate do not match
Solution:
1. Verify the current firmware is running on the display and Application Rate Module.
2. Check to make sure the nominal rate in the display matches the nominal rate in the serialcontrolled console.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
273
STRIP TILL
Problem: AutoSwath feature is not shown
Solution: The display must have the AutoSwath feature password-unlocked before the
feature is available to the operator.
www.4qte.com
FERTILIZER DEFAULT PRODUCT SETTINGS
Material
Type
Abbreviated
name for
display and
predefined
name for
SMS
Percentage (in terms of lbs.100 lbs.)
Density
N
P (P2O5)
K (K2O)
Ammonium
nitrate
Dry
Ammonium
nitrate
34
0
0
N/A
Ammonium
phosphate
Dry
Ammonium
phosphate
10
34
0
N/A
DAP
Dry
DAP
18
46
0
N/A
MAP
Dry
MAP
11
52
0
N/A
Ammonium
sulfate
Dry
Ammonium
sulfate
21
0
0
N/A
Urea
Dry
Urea
46
0
0
N/A
Potash
Dry
Potash
0
0
60
N/A
Triple
superphosph
ate
Dry
Triple
superphosph
ate
0
46
0
N/A
Ordinary
superphosph
ate
Dry
0
20
0
N/A
Potassium
nitrate
Dry
13
0
44
N/A
274
Superphosph
ate
Potassium
nitrate
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
HARVEST
HARVEST MONITORING/MAPPING
DISPLAY PREPARATION
• Create a backup of your spring information. Go to the Setup/Display menu to create a backup. Select Copy
All Files to save the spring data to the USB Flash Drive.
• Make sure your display firmware and all connected modules are up to date.
• If you have purchased a new combine or new heads, create new configurations for any setup that is
different from last fall. Remove all old configurations.
VEHICLE INSPECTION
• Check to make sure all cables are properly attached and in good condition.
• Remove flow sensor and inspect for damage.
• Check the elevator deflector and impact plate for wear. Verify you have the proper clearance at the top of
the clean grain elevator. Clearance should be between 3/8” and 5/8” (0.95 cm to 1.59 cm).
CREATE CONFIGURATION
Configuration
Harvest
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > Configuration (tractor) button > Configuration tab > Add
(+) button > Harvest button
A wizard will guide you through the process of selecting or creating a configuration that includes
Combine, Header and Crops settings.
Your Operating Configuration will then be viewable when you start a new Field Operation with the Field
Operation Wizard. For more information on Field Operation Configurations, see “Setup Event” on page 45.
Note: You can also use the Manage Equipment button to create or edit specific vehicles and implements.
CONFIGURATION SETUP
Calibration Sequence
Perform Harvest Calibrations in the following order:
1. Distance (Speed Sensor) Calibration
This calibrates the Ground Speed Sensor connected to the display. (calibrate a backup sensor even when
using GPS speed as the primary speed sensor). For more information, see “Calibrate Distance” on page 73.
2. Calibrate Header Sensor
This sets the height when the display stops recording area as the header is raised at the end of the pass.
Stop height calibration is required for each grain type.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
275
HARVEST MONITORING/MAPPING
HARVEST
HARVEST
www.4qte.com
3. Input Header Offset
For combines with offset headers, this compensates for the distance between the center of the
vehicle, and the center of the header's swath.
4. Perform a Vibration Calibration
The vibration calibration is used to compensate for the amount of force that is measured by the flow sensor
with no grain flow. For more information, see “Vibration Calibration” on page 277.
5. Calibrate Temperature
This sets the temperature offset to provide a correct moisture reading. For more information, see
“Temperature Calibration” on page 278.
6. Calibrate Moisture
This sets the moisture offset to help provide accurate moisture and yield readings. For more information,
see “Moisture Calibration” on page 278.
7. Calibrate Grain Weight
A correct Grain Weight Calibration provides accurate readings across all grain flow ranges. Calibration is
required each year and for each grain type. For more information, see “Grain Weight Calibration” on
page 279.
CALIBRATE DISTANCE
If you are not using GPS for ground speed, then after you have created a configuration you must
calibrate the ground speed input for accurate speed and area calculations. If you are using GPS, it is
recommended to calibrate distance in the event of GPS loss. Use the following procedure to calibrate
distance:
Configuration
Speed Input
Select Your Specific
Configuration
Calibrate Distance
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > Configuration (tractor) button > Configuration tab > your
specific configuration > Setup (wrench) button > Speed Input button > Calibrate Distance
Follow the instructions shown on the screen.
Note: Calibration settings can be manually adjusted if desired by pressing button above Pulses/100 ft and
making small changes to the setting.
Calibrate Header Sensor
Prior to logging harvest data, you must calibrate the header sensor. Crops must be set up within the
system to proceed with the calibration routine.
Configuration
Select Your Specific
Configuration
Calibrate Header Sensor
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > Configuration (tractor) button > Configuration tab > your
specific configuration > Setup (wrench) button > Calibrate Header Sensor button
Follow the instructions shown on the screen.
276
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
HARVEST
Input Header Offset
If the header of your vehicle is mounted offset to the vehicle's center, this can affect the accuracy of the
GPS data you are receiving. By entering a Header Offset, you can compensate for the distance between
the center of the vehicle, and the center of the header's swath.
Configuration
Select Your Specific
Configuration
Header Offset
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > Configuration (tractor) button > Configuration tab > your
specific configuration > Setup (wrench) button > Header Offset button
1. Measure distance
First, measure the distance between the GPS antenna (2) and the center
of the header's swath (1).
• (A) Center of Vehicle
• (B) Center of Swath
• (C) GPS Antenna
2. Enter the distance amount
The Header Offset screen appears. Enter the distance amount by using
.
Select to the left or to the right from drop-down menu.
Press
when finished.
VIBRATION CALIBRATION
The vibration calibration must be performed with the correct head on the combine, and repeated for each
crop harvested.
Configuration
Grain Calibration
Select Your Specific
Configuration
Perform Vibration
Calibration
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > Configuration (tractor) button > Configuration tab > your
specific configuration > Setup (wrench) button > Grain Calibration button > Setup (wrench) button >
Perform Vibration Calibration button
Note: This is prompted at the Home screen the first time a crop time is harvested.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
277
HARVEST MONITORING/MAPPING
CAUTION: If Reset All is pressed the sensor will have to be calibrated for all headers!
www.4qte.com
1. Run Separator
Start the separator and feeder house with the proper header attached. Run at full speed.
CAUTION: Do not harvest a crop during the Vibration Calibration process.
2. Press Start
With the combine separator running at full operating speed with the header engaged, press the Start button.
The display counts down 60 seconds.
3. Calibration Number Displayed
When the vibration calibration is complete, a message appears underneath the Start button stating
“Calibration Complete.” Next to this, the vibration calibration number is displayed. Press
to the Calibration Tab. You may now turn off the separator
to return
TEMPERATURE CALIBRATION
A Temperature Calibration only needs to be performed once per season. Changing this calibration will
affect harvested data collected after the calibration.
Temperature
Moisture
Press: Map button > Moisture button > Temperature tab
CAUTION: Only calibrate the temperature before harvesting begins.
1. Place Combine in Shady Spot
Leave the combine parked in a shaded area or a shed for a few hours. The temperature calibration should
not be performed if the sensor has been in direct sunlight or is sitting next to grain.
2. Take Air Temperature Reading
Take an accurate air temperature reading using a thermometer in the same shaded area.
3. Enter Outside Air Temperature.
Use
/
to enter the known outside air temperature. Make the proper adjustments until the
Calibrated Temperature shown at the top of this screen reflects the correct air temperature.
When finished, press
.
MOISTURE CALIBRATION
A moisture calibration only needs to be done once per crop, per season. Changing this calibration will
affect harvested data collected after the calibration.
Moisture
Moisture
Press: Map button > Moisture button > Temperature tab
278
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
HARVEST
2. Adjust Moisture
On the Moisture Calibration screen, use
known moisture of the sample.
When finished, press
/
to adjust the moisture so that it matches the
.
Manual Moisture Setting
Moisture
Use Manual Moisture
Moisture
Press: Map button > Moisture button > Moisture tab > Use Manual Moisture check box
If you wish to adjust moisture settings for a specific region, you can use the Use Manual Moisture
setting. Unlike the Moisture Calibration, which affects all previously-harvested data, a Manual Moisture
setting only affects data within a specified Region.
1. Check the Use Manual Moisture check box.
2. Use
/
to adjust the moisture to the desired value.
3. When finished, press
.
GRAIN WEIGHT CALIBRATION
Before the display can accurately measure harvested bushels, you must calibrate the display by entering
in actual load weights into the display for each grain type. You must obtain these actual load weights by
weighing the grain from a load on accurate scales. To obtain accurate results, you must obtain between
four and six calibration loads. You can complete a weight calibration at any time during the season;
however it is recommended that you calibrate grain weight at the beginning of the season.
Note: Start the calibration procedure with the combine stopped, the combine grain tank empty, and a hauling
vehicle empty.
1. Start New Load
Weight
New Load
Press: Map button > Weight button > New Load button
2. Calibration Load warning
Read warning, press
when finished.
3. Harvest Calibration Load
Harvest a load - ideal load weights are between 3,000 and 6,000 pounds (1,361 to 2,721 kilograms).
4. End Load
Press:
End Calibration
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
279
HARVEST MONITORING/MAPPING
1. Measure Moisture on Grain Samples
Randomly sample grain harvested into an active region, then measure moisture using an accurate moisture
tester.
www.4qte.com
5. Calibration Load warning
Read warning, press
when finished.
6. Name Load
Display will give load a default name of time and date. Use
to change the load name.
7. Empty Grain and Weigh Load
Empty the grain tank completely onto a truck or wagon, and weigh it with an accurate scale. Record each
individual load weight to be entered into the display. (No grain from any other combine should be unloaded
into this hauling vehicle).
8. Weigh and Record Load Weight
Weigh the grain on the hauling vehicle and record the actual load weight by pressing
Weight Calibration screen.
on the
• If you are using a weigh wagon to weigh the grain, make sure the wagon has been calibrated properly.
• Only use one scale during this calibration process.
• Use the same vehicle for all calibration loads.
• Do not use a semi truck, as this vehicle’s capacity is too large for a calibration load.
Weight Calibration
Calibration 3, 12/12/2011
Calibration Loads
Load Name
Weight
Actual
Error
Field Name
09:38 12/14/2011
530
600
-11.7%
Ashton
09:36 1
09:42 12/14/2011
542
525
3.2%
Ashton
09:39 1
Time
New Load
Actual
Load Name
9. Uncheck Loads With Excessive Error
Percentages
At the Grain Calibration screen, take note of any
c
a
l
i
bration loads that have excessive error percentages. In
the example at left, a load has an error percentage of
11.7 percent.
You should be able to calibrate the display for grain
weight to an average error of 1% to 3%. If the
average error is more than 3%, uncheck the load
with the maximum error.
Average Load Error: 7.4 %
Any load that is checked is automatically included in the calibration.
TURN ON/OFF AUTO CALIBRATION
Weight
AutoCal
Weight
Press: Map button > Weight button > Setup (wrench) button > AutoCal Weight check box
The display defaults to AutoCal Weigh checked. AutoCal Weight can be turned off by unchecking the
check box.
280
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
HARVEST
AutoSwath adjusts the swath width when crossing field boundaries and already-harvested areas. The
display changes the swath width being harvested, even though no mechanical change takes place.
AutoSwath is useful when harvesting point rows or where harvesting a full head width is not possible.
When performing a Harvest operation, the AutoSwath feature includes sensitivity levels, which
compensate for varying levels of GPS accuracy.
Configuration
Select Your Specific
Configuration
Automatic Swath Control
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > Configuration (tractor) button > Configuration tab > your
specific configuration > Setup (wrench) button >Automatic Swath Control button
The Automatic Swath Control screen appears.
If swath adjustments are performing inaccurately, adjust the sensitivity accordingly. Sensitivity 3 is the
default setting. Other settings include:
• Sensitivity 5
Use with RTK or DGPS sub-meter, terrain compensated GPS.
• Sensitivity 4
Use with RTK or DGPS sub-meter GPS. Terrain compensation recommended.
• Sensitivity 3
Use with sub-meter accurate GPS.
• Sensitivity 2
Use with 1+ meter accurate GPS.
• Sensitivity 1
Swath sections are all on or all off. Use with 1+ meter accurate GPS.
LOAD CONFIGURATION
Press: Select Event button.
Select Event
Select a Season, Grower, Farm, and
Field on the Management Selection
screen.
For more information, see “Setup Event” on page 45.
RUN CONFIGURATION
Once a configuration has been completed, the Map View button appears at the bottom of the
Home screen. Press the Map View button to see the Map screen.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
281
HARVEST MONITORING/MAPPING
AUTOSWATH SENSITIVITY SETTINGS
www.4qte.com
• (A) GPS Status
Corn
4.09
4.09 acac
4.0 mph
Corn
• (B) Total Field Area
Yield (Avg)
Yield
160 bu/ac
Moisture (Avg)
205 +
185 - 205
165 - 185
145 - 165
0 - 145
lb/ac
14.3 %
• (C) Ground Speed
• (D) Diagnostics button
Area
1.70 ac
• (E) Map Legend (varieties)
Wet Weight
1979 lb
• (F) Legend Select
Dry Bushels
• (G) Crop
86
Grain Calibration
0 bu/h
1
Weight
2
Moisture
1 2
Full
Swath
6
132 rpm
• (H) Status Items
• (I) Home button
• (J) Map View button
• (K) Swath Width
• (L) AutoSwath
• (M) Logging Status button
• (N) Header Height %
• (O) Swath Width
• (P) Bushels Per Hour
• (Q) Elevator Speed
Note: Pressing the Map View button will cycle between the available Map screen views, and the appearance
of the Map View button changes.
HARVEST STATUS ITEMS
Corn
Yield
145.6 bu/ac
Moisture
16.5 %
Area
12.28 ac
Wet Weight
274089 lb
Wet Bushels
4894 bu
• Yield
Displays the instantaneous yield while there is grain flow and the average yield when
grain flow is not present.
• Moisture
Displays the instantaneous moisture when there is grain flow and the average when
there is no grain flow.
• Area
Shows the area harvested for the current region.
• Wet Weight
Shows the actual weight that has been harvested for the region.
• Wet Bushels
Shows the actual bushels that have been harvested for the current region.
• Dry Bushels
Displays the actual number of bushels at the specified dry moisture percentage.
- If the actual moisture is below the set dry moisture percentage and “Expand Bushels for All Grains
Below Dry %" is not checked, it will show actual bushels.
282
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
HARVEST
Note: The Wet Bushels and Dry Bushels Status Items do not appear if you are using metric system
measurements.
HARVEST DIAGNOSTIC BUTTON ON MAP SCREEN
The Harvest Diagnostic button appears at the bottom right-hand portion of the Harvest Map screen.
Pressing this button summons the Harvest Diagnostic screen; for more information see “Grain Harvest
Diagnostics” on page 284. Other data that appears by the Harvest Diagnostic button is described below.
• (A) Swath Width
Displays current swath width that is being harvested.
Swath: 30 ft 0 in 100%
2160 bu/h
• (B) Bushels Per Hour
Displays the bushels harvested per hour (bu/hr).
20
474 rpm
• (C) Header Height
Displays percentage of header height.
• (D) Elevator Speed
Shown in Revolutions Per Minute (RPM).
MAP OPTIONS
Press: Map button > Legend tab > Setup (wrench) button
During Harvest operations, the Map screen displays
two types of items in the Legend: Yield and Moisture.
Map Options
Data
Guidance
Boundary
Reference
Rx
Grid
Marker
The Legend Setup button on the Map Legend Tab of
the Mapping Toolbox opens the Map Options
screen.
• Press Data, Guidance, Boundary, Marker, Reference,
Rx and Grid to show or remove those items on the Map
screen.
• Press Clear Map to permanently remove all map data
from the active field operation
Clear Map
Load
Reference
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
• Press Load Reference to load a map from a previous
operation performed in that field to view as a
background map.
283
HARVEST MONITORING/MAPPING
- If the actual moisture is below the set dry moisture percentage and "Expand Bushels for All Grains
Below Dry %" is checked, it will display bushels as if the moisture of the grain is at the specified dry
percentage.
www.4qte.com
MAP SCREEN: FLOW DELAY
When the Map screen is running in a Zoom Detail
view, instantaneous coverage (A) is shown
automatically. However, there is a time lag between
when grain enters the combine through the Header
and is logged by the Flow Sensor in the Clean Grain
Elevator. Because of this time lag, the instantaneous
coverage is shown on the Map screen as a lighter
color than coverage that has been logged (B) by the
display.
GRAIN HARVEST DIAGNOSTICS
When performing a Harvest operation, you can also access the Harvest Diagnostic screen
by pressing the Display Information button. Technical support may request that you look at
this screen for help in diagnosing a problem. When the Devices screen opens, press and
highlight the Moisture Module listing in the CAN Device list, then press the Diagnostics button. The Grain
Harvest Diagnostics screen appears.
Grain Harvest Diagnostics
Region Distance
Flow Rate
Flow Max
Flow Mn
Flow Offset
Sensor Force
Header Raw
Speed Pulse
18257 ft
3.21
5.12 Moisture Raw
-3.8
216 Temperature
Temperature
Raw
2.69
172
Proximity Status ON
350
Relay Status
ON
9.95 Motor Current
0.9
296
103
The Grain Harvest Diagnostics screen includes the
following information:
• Flow Rate
Grain flow rate, shown in kilograms per second.
• Flow Max, Flow Min and Flow Offset
Raw flow values used for diagnostic purposes.
• Sensor Force
Force of grain flow, shown in Newtons.
• Header Raw
Raw value of header sensor.
• Speed Pulses
Shows the number of ground speed pulses from the combine.
• Moisture Raw
Raw value of moisture sensor.
• Temperature
Air temperature, shown in Celsius.
• Temperature Raw
Raw value of temperature sensor.
• Proximity Sensor
Shows if Elevator Mount Unit sensor is covered with grain.
• Relay Status
Shows on or off.
284
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
HARVEST
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
HARVEST MONITORING/MAPPING
• Motor Current
Measure of Elevator Mount Unit (EMU) current, shown in amps.
285
www.4qte.com
286
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
HARVEST
CLAAS QUANTIMETER
The CLAAS Quantimeter Optical Sensing System includes the option of interfacing with the display. This
option is available for LEXION combines of the 670 model and above. The display communicates with a
Bridge Module. This Bridge Module receives data from the combine via the CEBIS (CLAAS Electronic
On-Board Information System) monitor which is then relayed to the display. The Bridge module can also
interface with the ParaDyme Automated Steering system.
CREATE CONFIGURATION
Harvest
Configuration
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > Configuration (tractor) button > Configuration tab > Add
(+) button > Harvest button
1. Use drop-down menu to select make and model of Lexion.
2. Press
to enter offsets. Press
to continue.
3. Select Header from the drop-down menu or press
to add a header. Press
4. Select Speed Sources and Calibrate Speed Sensor. Press
to continue.
to continue.
5. Enter Configuration Name
A suggested name for the configuration appears. If desired, press
your configuration. Press
to enter a different name for
when complete.
CONFIGURATION SETUP
Configuration
Your Specific
Configuration
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > Configuration (tractor) button > Configuration tab > your
specific configuration > Setup (wrench) button
The Configuration Setup screen appears. Screen’s
appearance differs if using a CLAAS Quantimeter
configuration.
Configuration Setup
Vehicle
1
Lexion 670
Lexion 670, 30 ft Platform
GPS
Offset
Implement: 30 ft Platform
Full Swath:
Controller: Lexion 670
30.000 feet
N/A
Rows:
Speed
Input
Grain
Calibration
Automatic
Swath Control
Equipment
Settings
Header
Offset
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
Map Delays
287
CLAAS QUANTIMETER
HARVEST
www.4qte.com
Note: Adjustment of Combine Settings and the Header Sensor Calibration is performed through the CLAAS
CEBIS monitor.
• Vehicle Offsets
For more information, see “Vehicle Offsets” on page 77.
• Speed Input
The ground speed source can be changed by pressing the Speed Input button. This opens the Speed Input
screen, where you can choose a primary speed source of GPS, Wheels or Radar. For more information,
see “Speed Input Settings” on page 72.
Note: If you are using a CLAAS Quantimeter, you do not choose a secondary speed source.
• Grain Calibration
For more information, see “Calibration Information” on page 288.
• Automatic Swath Control
For more information on AutoSwath, see “AutoSwath Sensitivity Settings” on page 281.
• Header Offset
For more information, see “Input Header Offset” on page 277.
• Map Delays
Press to change the Map Delay settings.
CAUTION: Do not change settings from the default value of 4 without specific instruction from Technical
Support!
CALIBRATION INFORMATION
Most calibration information used in a CLAAS Quantimeter configuration is calculated in the CEBIS
monitor and then relayed to the display. For CLAAS Quantimeter configurations, the CEBIS monitor
performs calibrations for the Header Sensor, Yield Monitor, Moisture and Temperature.
Note: The calibration created in the CLAAS Quantimeter is a linear calibration.
When a new calibration is started in the CEBIS monitor, a warning appears on the display, stating “A
new grain calibration has been detected. Select an operating configuration to continue.” At the same
time, the display unloads the Field Operating Configuration that was collecting data with the old
calibration. Acknowledge the New Grain Calibration warning by pressing
.
LOAD CONFIGURATION
Press: Select Event button.
Select Event
Select a Season, Grower, Farm, and
Field on the Management Selection
screen.
For more information, see “Setup Event” on page 45.
288
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
HARVEST
After you have completed the grain weight calibration and a new calibration factor has been calculated in
the CEBIS monitor, this new calibration is then sent to the display. The display then uses the new
calibration to update all data collected since the time it detected the start of the new calibration. No
further messages appear in the display.
Note: The New Grain Calibration warning does not appear for the first calibration performed during the
season. It only appears for calibrations performed thereafter.
Note: The display does not update any previously-collected data collected prior to the time it detected the
start of the new calibration.
Manual Moisture Setting
As with other calibration information, the Moisture Calibration is calculated in the CEBIS monitor and
then relayed to the display. However, you can adjust moisture settings for a specific region with the
displays Manual Moisture setting. The manual moisture setting will only be applied to the specified
region.
Configuration
Your Specific
Configuration
Grain Calibration
Press: Home button > Setup (wrench) button > Configuration (tractor) button > Configuration tab > your
specific configuration > Setup (wrench) button > Grain Calibration button
Lexion Calibration
Moisture
Calibrations
The CLAAS Calibration screen appears.
1. Check
2. Use
15.0 %
Use Manual
Moisture
/
.
to adjust the Manual
Moisture to the desired value. Press
finished.
when
Use Manual Moisture
Note: The list shown in the CLAAS Calibration screen only shows loads harvested during the current season.
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
289
CLAAS QUANTIMETER
Create a new Field Operation Configuration.
www.4qte.com
MAP SCREEN FOR CLAAS QUANTIMETER
1.06 ac
5.0 mph
Soybeans
Soybeans
Yield
Yield
118.6 bu/ac
Moisture
136 +
116 - 136
96 - 116
76 - 96
0 - 76
15.9 %
Area
1.06 ac
Wet Weight
6797 lb
Dry Bushels
111
Swath: 30 ft 0 in
Flow
Moisture
Full Swath
Header
bu
100%
2205 bu/h
25%
Engine Speed 1115 rpm
Fuel
3 gal/h
Once an operating configuration is
created for a CLAAS Quantimeter
harvest configuration, and a field
operation configuration is created at the
Home screen, you can view map screen
data.
For the most part, this map screen is
similar in appearance to the map screen
used in other Harvest configurations.
However, the Harvest Diagnostic button,
shown at the bottom right-hand side of
the Equipment Tab (A), differs in
appearance from that shown on other
Harvest configuration map screens. This
Harvest Diagnostic button does not
display a picture of a combine.
The top of the Harvest Diagnostic button displays the following information:
• For configurations using a Platform Head or Pickup Head - Swath Width, shown both in units of
measurement and as a percentage total.
• For configurations using a Row Head - Number of active rows.
The Harvest Diagnostic button also displays this information for all CLAAS configurations:
• Grain Flow
• Header Height - shown as a percentage
• Engine Speed - shown in revolutions per minute
• Fuel - fuel consumption of the combine
Note: Elevator Speed information is not shown for CLAAS Quantimeter configurations.
DIAGNOSTICS FOR CLAAS QUANTIMETER
Diagnostics Screen for CLAAS Quantimeter
When performing a Harvest operation, you can access the Grain Harvest Diagnostics
screen by pressing the Display Information button. Technical support may request that you
look at this screen for help in diagnosing a problem. When the Devices screen opens, press
and highlight the AL Bridge listing in the CAN Device list, then press the Diagnostics button. The Grain
Harvest Diagnostics screen appears.
290
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
HARVEST
Cal Factor
Moisture
Temperature
Header
Ground Speed
Density
Header Width
Active Width
Grain Type
1.35
18.6 %
73.4 F
Down
5.5 mph
60 lb/bu
29.9 ft
29.9 ft
3
Engine Hours
Threshing Status
Separator Hours
Chopper Hours
Total Fuel
Total Fuel (Field)
Total Fuel (Road)
Active Segments
Engine Speed
1395.6
OFF
1250.5
1248.2
290.6 gal
178.3 gal
112.3 gal
10
1112 rpm
Header Segments
Total Distance
Distance (Field)
Distance (Road)
Total Yield
Total Yield (Dry)
Fuel Rate
Calibration Flow
Header Pos
10
182168.6 ft
164042 ft
18126.6 ft
1090.7 T
1019.9 T
2.6 gal/h
2058.4 bu/h
25 %
• The Grain Harvest Diagnostics screen
displays different information than the
Diagnostics screen that appears for other
Harvest configurations. This information is
relayed from the CEBIS monitor.
For specific information regarding
settings shown on this screen, contact
Technical Support.
Bridge Module
The Bridge Module routes communication between
• (A) CAN-Bus
• (B) ParaDyme CAN-Bus
• (C) CLAAS CAN-Bus
Three indicator lights verify communication received from
these systems. A green light indicates good communication;
an amber light indicates no communication.
When the Bridge Module is communicating
with the display, it should appear on the
display’s Devices list. (For more information
on Device Information, see “Device
Information” on page 69).
Devices
Firmware:
1.0.15
DISPLAY
Firmware ID:
207 AL BRIDGE
Hardware ID:
Serial Number:
AL BRIDGE
4001826
Revision:
2009010001
1.255.255.255
Run Time:
34209
Boot Counter:
212
Diagnostics
TROUBLESHOOTING CLAAS QUANTIMETER CONFIGURATIONS
During the operation of a CLAAS Quantimeter field operation configuration, you may see the following
error messages. Below is a table describing the cause and solution of the error messages that could
appear.
Error Message: Warning: “Full header width doesn’t match Quantimeter full header width”
Possible Cause: The full header width that was specified in the display’s Header Setup Wizard does
not match the header width in the CEBIS monitor.
Solution: Set the swath width in the CEBIS monitor to match the swath width of the
operating configuration in the display.
Error Message: Crop Type Changed: “The current configuration is no longer valid”
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
291
CLAAS QUANTIMETER
Notes:
Grain Harvest Diagnostics
www.4qte.com
Possible Cause: The display has detected that the crop type specified in the CEBIS monitor has
changed to a crop type that is different than what is specified in the display’s field operation
configuration.
Either:
Solution: 1. Change the crop type specified in the CEBIS monitor back to what is specified
in the display. Then reload the display’s field operation configuration.
Or
Solution: 2. Create a new field operation configuration that includes the new crop type. If
necessary, create a new Harvest Product in Product Setup with the Harvest Crop Wizard.
For more information, see “Grain Harvest Settings” on page 23.
Error Message: Grain Calibration: “A new grain calibration has been detected. Select an operating
configuration to continue.”
Possible Cause: When a new calibration is started in the CEBIS monitor, the warning at left
appears on the display. At the same time, the display unloads the Field Operating Configuration
that was collecting data with the old calibration.
Solution: Acknowledge the warning by pressing
. At the Home screen, press the
Select Event button. Use the Field Operation Wizard to create a new field operation
configuration. After receiving the new calibration from the CEBIS monitor, the display will
calculate that field operation configuration’s harvest data by using this new calibration
that was sent from CEBIS. (Also discussed in “Calibration Information” on page 288).
Error Message: CLAAS Communication Error: “Cannot communicate with CLAAS bridge module.”
Possible Cause: No communication between Bridge Module and CLAAS CAN-Bus. (Shown as
Indicator Light C on Bridge Module in “Bridge Module” on page 291).
Solution: Check cabling between Module and CLAAS Can-Bus.
Error Message: CAN Node Lost: “AL Bridge Node has stopped communicating.”
Possible Cause: No communication between Bridge Module and display. (Shown as Indicator Light
A on Bridge Module in “Bridge Module” on page 291).
Solution: Check cabling between Bridge Module and display.
292
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
SYSTEM DIAGRAMS REFERENCE
To view detailed system diagrams for various machine configurations, go to the Support tab of the
Ag Leader Web site.
Note: To view and/or print the System diagrams, you will need the Adobe Acrobat or Adobe Reader .pdf file
format. The Adobe Reader software comes pre-installed on most personal computers. If Adobe Reader is not
installed on your computer the program is available for download at no charge. A link to the Adobe download
site is located at the Ag Leader Web site.
CURRENT FILE FORMATS
.AGSETUP
Use to transfer setup information from display to display or from SMS and display
• Replaces MSF, IBY, PAT, IRX, REF
• Allows full synchronization of the following items:
• Management Data (Growers, Farms, Fields, Seasons, Operators)
• Products and Product Mixes
• Boundaries
• Guidance Patterns
• Marker Sets and Markers
Note: Do not use the IBK to “clone” a display anymore. Use AGSETUP.
.AGDATA
• Includes all the necessary data to fully archive in SMS
• Includes recorded operation data
• Equipment Used
• Products Used
• Marks Logged
• Boundaries
• Guidance Patterns
• Flexible export options
• Will be able to export by Grower
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
293
www.4qte.com
LEGACY FILE FORMATS
PRESCRIPTION MAP FILE TYPES
• .irx
The .irx file supports multiple product recommendations in a single file.
• .shp, .shx, .dbf (shape file group)
What is commonly called a shape file is actually a collection of three different files. All three of the files are
required and must be present on the USB drive for the system to use shape file groups for variable rate
product application. A single "shape file" can contain recommendation rates for multiple products.
Note: Legacy Prescription file (.irx) is supported and enhanced. Shape file (.shp, .shx, .dbf)
continues to be supported for prescription control.
BOUNDARY AND GUIDELINE FILE TYPES
• .iby
Boundary file format. Boundary files are created at the Boundary tab, found on the Mapping Toolbox of the
Map screen; or imported to the system from the Import Files button at the External Storage Operations
screen. The External Storage Operations screen can be accessed by pressing the External Storage
Operations button on the Home screen.
• .pat
Pattern guideline file. Pattern files are created at the Guidance tab, found on the Mapping Toolbox of the
Map screen; or imported to the system from the External Storage Operations button on the Home screen.
The External Storage Operations screen can be accessed by pressing the External Storage Operations
button on the Home screen.
Note: Legacy boundary file (.iby) and legacy pattern file (.pat) import and export will be supported
for compatibility with Insight and Edge displays
IMAGE FILE TYPES
• .png and .bmp
Supported file formats for the Display Owner Image. File size is limited to a maximum of 200 pixels wide by
100 pixels tall. Import the file from the Import Image button on the Display screen’s General tab.
SYSTEM FILE TYPES
• .ibk
System backup file. Backup files are written to the USB drive by pressing the Create Backup button on the
Display Setup screen’s Advanced tab.
• .ilf
System log file. Created with the Copy Data button on the External Storage Operations screen or pressing
the Export Data Files button of the Display screen’s Advanced tab.
• .fw2
Firmware upgrade file for the display and control modules. Install firmware updates from the USB drive by
pressing the Upgrade Firmware button on the External Storage Operations screen. The External Storage
Operations screen can be accessed by pressing the External Storage Operations button on the Home
screen.
294
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
• .ref
Variety reference map file. SMS software uses planting data to create a variety reference map which is
saved as a .ref file. This .ref file can then be exported to the display for use with the Automatic Variety
Tracking and Automatic Region Changing features.
Note: Legacy Reference files (.ref) will not be supported in 3.0. SMS will be able to include variety maps in
.AGSETUP for harvest variety tracking.
Note: IBK, MSF are not supported in 3.0. Use the new .IBK2 format for backups in 3.0. IBK2 will continue to
be specific to a particular display model. Version 3.0 will not restore from an “IBK” from previous releases.
MODULE LED DIAGNOSTIC STATES
• Off
No power
• Flashing 1 Hz green
Normal operation
• Flashing 1 Hz orange
CAN bus errors detected (error active/passive state)
• Steady orange
CAN bus off
• Steady red
Hardware or initialization failure
• Flashing 1 Hz red
Firmware download in progress
• Flashing fast red
Firmware download error
COMPANY WARRANTY STATEMENT
Ag Leader Technology will repair or replace at no charge any component of the display that fails during
normal service, while being used in an approved application, within two years of the warranty start date.
Warranty is not provided for damage resulting from abuse, neglect, accidents, vandalism, acts of nature,
or any causes that are outside of the normal intended use of the display. Ag Leader Technology shall not
be liable for indirect, incidental, or consequential damages to the dealer, end user, or third parties arising
from the sale, installation, or use of any Ag Leader Technology product.
UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS
Certain features of the display can be locked-down by authorized personnel having password access
and should be changed only by authorized personnel having password access. Unauthorized access to
the locked-down features is prohibited. Attempts to access the locked-down features by unauthorized
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
295
APPENDIX
• .msf
The .msf (Management Setup File) file format allows the display to import Grower and Field information
from SMS software via the USB drive.
www.4qte.com
personnel constitutes fraud. Ag Leader is not responsible for any damage or loss incurred as a result of
access to the locked-down features by unauthorized personnel and you as owner of the display agree to
indemnify and hold harmless Ag Leader, its, partners, subsidiaries, agents, affiliates, and/or
licensor(ee)s, as applicable, for any unauthorized access to the locked-down features.
PROPRIETARY TECHNOLOGY NOTICE
Ag Leader Technology's display has patents on its design and operational features. Copying features of
this system relating to measurement and calculation of grain flow and weight, organization of field and
load data may result in patent infringement.
COPYRIGHT NOTICE
Ag Leader Technology has copyrighted (© 2013) the contents of this manual and the operating program
for the display. No reproductions may be made without first obtaining the consent of Ag Leader
Technology.
SERVICE AND SUPPORT
Your display was designed with simplicity and ease of use in mind. This manual has been provided to
help familiarize yourself with the display and its basic functionality. Setup wizards are implemented
where appropriate within the system to further simplify configuration and use.
If you have additional questions or feel that you may be having a problem with your system, call your
local Ag Leader Technology dealer or call us directly at the phone number below. If we determine you
have a hardware failure, we will ship replacement hardware immediately.
Our Technical Support Department can be reached by phone at 515-232-5363 extension #1 or through
email at support@agleader.com.
296
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
INDEX
Index
crop settings screen 23
Custom Permission 37
D
A
AB/smartpath toggle 125
active line cycle 126
adaptive curve 120
area count 127
heading change 127
heading threshold 127
new pass 127
adaptive pattern options 127
Add a User 34
add configuration 21
add product 22
add product mix 22
all area covered 127
area 282
area count 127
automatic swath control 281
autoswath 281
RTK 281
sensitivity 281
B
base path 126
Basic Permission 36
boundary 283
bushels per hour 283
C
calibrate header sensor 276
calibration load 279
calibration sequence 275
CAN device list
moisture module 284
cancel 119, 120, 122, 123
center pivot 122
clean grain elevator 275, 284
clear map 283
clear nudge 132
configuration settings 275
configuration tab
add button 21
console button 16
copy all files 275
crop settings
expand bushels 23
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
data 283
delete product 22
diagnostic 283
diagnostics 284
flow max 284
flow min 284
flow offset 284
flow rate 284
header raw 284
moisture raw 284
motor current 285
proximity sensor 284
relay status 284
sensor force 284
speed pulses 284
temperature 284
temperature raw 284
diagnostics button 284, 290
dry bushels 282
E
edit info button 23
edit legend button 23
edit pattern 128
edit product 22
elevator mount unit sensor 284
elevator speed 283
EMU sensor 284
expand bushels 23
export pattern 128
F
field 31
flow delay 284
flow max 284
flow min 284
flow offset 284
flow rate 284
flow sensor 284
followed path 126
Full Permission 36
G
gear ratio
example 171, 173
multiple drives 171, 172
297
www.4qte.com
single motor drive 170
gear ratio calculation 170
GPS button 16
grain harvest diagnostics 284
grain settings screen 23
grain weight calibration 279
grid 283
Grower 30
grower 30
guidance 283
guidance options
adaptive curve 127
guidance tab 118
cancel 119, 120, 122, 123
pause 119, 120, 122, 123
resume 119, 120, 122, 123
H
harvest diagnostic button 283
harvest diagnostic screen 283
header height 283
header offset 277
header raw 284
header sensor
reset all 277
heading change 127
heading threshold 127
home screen 15
I
identical curve 121
import product 22
instantaneous coverage 284
L
legend
moisture 283
yield 283
legend reference
grid 283
Rx 283
legend select 283
boundary 283
clear map 283
data 283
guidance 283
load reference 283
marker 283
reference 283
298
legend setup button 283
load reference 283
load weight 279
logged area 127
M
manage patterns
edit pattern 128
export pattern 128
management setup
field 31
grower 30
season 33
Managers 35
map screen
flow delay 284
mapping toolbox 118
marker 283
metric 283
moisture 282, 283
moisture calibration 278
moisture module 284
moisture raw 284
motor current 285
N
new AB pattern 119
new pass 127
nudge 132
O
operating configuration 21
P
pause 119, 120, 122, 123, 131
Permission Level 36
pivot 122
cancel 124
number of rows 124
row spacing 124
shift by distance 124
shift by rows 124
pre-harvest preparation 275
product name 22
product option 22
add product 22
add product mix 22
import product 22
product settings screen 23
product setup 22
Firmware Version 6.3
www.4qte.com
R
reference 283
relay status 284
remark A 131
remove all 129
remove all patterns 129
remove button 129
remove pattern 129
reset 129
reset all 277
reset button 126
reset pattern 129
resume 119, 120, 122, 123, 131
Rx 283
S
save button 126
season 33
sensor force 284
setup buttons 16
console 16
GPS 16
setup product 22
setup screen 22
product settings 23
shift by distanc 124
shift by distance 133
shift by rows 124, 133
smart tab 127
smartpath 124
active line cycle 126
all area covered 127
base path 126
followed path 126
heading threshold 127
logged area 127
notes 126
projected path 126
Ag Leader PN 4002722-ENG Rev. I
reset button 126
save button 126
select previous pass 126
smart tab 127
speed pulses 284
status items 282
area 282
dry bushels 282
metric 283
moisture 282
wet bushels 282
wet weight 282
yield 282
stepper seed control
gear ratio 170
Straight Track 119
swath width 283
INDEX
product tab 22
add 22
crop settings 23
delete 22
edit 22
edit info 23
edit legend 23
grain settings 23
projected path 126
proximity sensor 284
T
temperature 284
temperature calibration 278
temperature raw 284
V
vibration calibration 277
number 278
W
weight calibration 279
wet bushels 282
wet weight 282
Y
yield 282, 283
299
www.4qte.com
300
Firmware Version 6.3
Open as PDF
Similar pages